units

faculty-pg-med

Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences

Monash University

Monash University Handbook 2013 Postgraduate - Units

This unit entry is for students who completed this unit in 2013 only. For students planning to study the unit, please refer to the unit indexes in the the current edition of the Handbook. If you have any queries contact the managing faculty for your course or area of study.

print version


36 points, SCA Band 3, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Janeane Dart

Synopsis

Dietetic skills and competencies developed in this unit include nutrition assessment skills, nutrition counselling and intervention (of individuals), application of the nutrition care process, the use of food as a therapeutic tool, clinical reasoning, reflection and advanced communication and interpersonal skills required for dietetic practice. Elements covered in this unit include: counselling theory and skill development, nutrition screening and assessment, application of anthropometry, clinical chemistry and biochemical result interpretation, interpreting personal, social, clinical and dietary data, qualitative and quantitative dietary analysis, interpretation, nutrition interventions and exploring the Dietitian's role in health care teams, and evidence based practice. A range of simulation modes will be used in this unit.

Outcomes

At the completion of the unit students will be able to:

  1. apply a range of nutrition and dietetic screening and assessment tools with consideration of the limitations of application in working with individuals
  2. measure and interpret anthropometrical measures as part of nutritional assessment
  3. collect, interpret and integrate relevant biochemical, clinical, dietary, personal and social data into appropriate and tailored nutritional assessment and management;
  4. interpret medical terminology to support nutrition assessment and management
  5. assess and analyse food intake data (qualitatively and quantitatively) in relation and comparison to nutritional standards for individuals and the broader population in a variety of contexts and settings
  6. identify the aetiology, epidemiology, determinants and medical and nutritional principles of malnutrition, aged care and functional decline to dietetic practice in the simulated setting
  7. integrate a comprehensive knowledge of food diversity and food composition into dietetic practice
  8. incorporates nutrition counselling theory and a range of communication strategies in developing practical , relevant and targeted nutrition interventions to support dietary change for individuals and group
  9. begin to translate the science of nutrition into practical food and nutrient messages for individual and groups
  10. discuss and document the elements of effective nutrition care planning
  11. effectively communicate in preparation for dietetic practice
  12. be client centred and incorporate cultural competency in their approach to dietetic practice
  13. be empathetic and compassionate in their approach to dietetic practice
  14. reflect on learning to assist in critical thinking and problem solving skills; and apply an inquiry based approach to learning
  15. critically appraise and apply an evidence based approach to dietetic practice

Assessment

Objective Structured Clinical Examination (OSCE): 40%*
Mini Portfolio: 40%
Assignment: Evidence Based Resource: 20%

Passing the OSCE is a hurdle requirement to pass this unit and all assessment tasks must be completed to a pass grade standard to complete this unit

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 days (x 6 hours per day ) over 10 weeks - a combination of lectures, workshops, practical activities and simulated learning experiences

Students will also be expected to undertake self-directed study related to the unit content and complete assessment tasks as defined

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Nutrition and Dietetics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Claire Palermo

Synopsis

Public health nutrition addresses the prevention and management of diseases at a population level. This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings of public health, health promotion and health education and focus on strategies that address the major nutrition related diseases and issues affecting the Australian population. The theories of program planning will be used to inform the basis of planning, implementing and evaluating public health nutrition interventions across a continuum of strategies and these strategies critiqued using the literature and policy analysis and evaluative frameworks.

Outcomes

  1. Discuss opportunities for beneficial change to the Australian food supply
  2. Explain how the Australian health system meets the needs of the general population and population sub-groups
  3. Explain how the Australian health system is regulated by state and government agencies and discuss channels for change
  4. Evaluate how public health policy may influence food consumption and nutritional status and review its relevance to chronic disease management in populations
  5. Explain the prevention paradox and its application to chronic disease management at a population level
  6. Discuss the socio-environmental/ecological approach to population nutrition issues
  7. Define and differentiate public health and public health nutrition
  8. Explain the main theoretical bases of health education and health promotion
  9. Apply the social, environmental, economic and political determinants of nutrition status to a priority public health nutrition area
  10. Critique and compare several scientific papers in the field of nutrition and public health findings from evidence based research to dietetic practice
  11. Analyse the major disease-related morbidity and mortality issues in Australia
  12. Indicate the biological and social links between diet and disease
  13. Identify priority public health nutrition issues in Australia and the frameworks that support them
  14. Plan, implement and evaluate a group education program.
  15. Design an evaluation strategy for an intervention to improve population health
  16. Demonstrate media advocacy skills around a nutrition issue

Assessment

Assignments 60%; Exam 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

1 week intensive plus 1x 3 hour classroom sessions for 10 weeks of semester

Co-requisites


36 points, SCA Band 3, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


36 points, SCA Band 2, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Ghaie

Synopsis

The unit covers:

  • an introduction to medical acupuncture which includes a discussion of the terms used and an explanation of these terms in modern medical thought
  • knowledge of the history of acupuncture is important in understanding that observation was the most important historical factor in the production of this method of medical care. The philosophy was based around the religion at the time and observation of the many factors that affect the way people react to their environment. This is important to understand the methods of choice of points, which form the last part of this subject
  • the channels and points and micro acupuncture system will be fully discussed. This system can be seen as a complex underground transport system, with only the station (points) able to be located. The acupuncture points are described anatomically, and can - after demonstration and practice - be palpated clinically. Hence the need for practical clinical tuition. A knowledge of how the channels run helps the clinician to group points together for maximal therapeutic effect, based on thousands of years of observation.

Outcomes

By the end of this unit candidates should be able to:

  1. Reflect on the philosophy of acupuncture arising from the historical perspectives dealt with in the introduction in the course.
  2. Describe the correspondences, and the laws of acupuncture and the way these laws work in practice.
  3. Demonstrate that a lot of good simple acupuncture therapy can be practised without an in-depth knowledge of TCM, using a western medical approach.
  4. Demonstrate that many of the more difficult patients in the western sense do in fact fit more simply into the TCM patterns and that it is in these patients that TCM is of immense value.
  5. Be able to describe the course of each channel and its internal connections, describe the major points of the channel and the correct way of finding them, and their actions. Special points eg; influential points, alarm and associated points, area of influence points, source points and points which have a special influence on various bodily activities. They should also be able to describe the correspondences of each organ complex and hence embrace the understanding of the philosophy of acupuncture into this subject, within the western medical model of care.

Assessment

Journal (100%)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Paul Ghaie

Synopsis

This unit will cover the development of various theories pertaining to the neuro-physiology of acupuncture starting off with Felix Mann's Somato-Viseral theories. Becker's "Electric Man", The Gate Control Theory of Wall and Melzak, and the humoral theories starting with Pomeranz (and others) work on endorphin. The latest discovery in neuro-physiology with regard to pain pathways and in particular the concept of neuroplasticity will be discussed. The seminal work of J.S Han of Beijing, involving the identification of many of the neuropeptides as a response to Electro-acupuncture, and which provides a basis for pain management is also explored in depth.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit the student should be able to:

  1. Understand the basic research in acupuncture over the past 25-30 years in modern physiological terms.
  2. Apply the concepts of acupuncture therapy within the framework of modern physiology, particularly in the realm of pain management.
  3. Consider the differences, and similarities between the ancient philosophy of TCM and modern physiology, to provide a rationale for the choice of acupuncture points in clinical practice.

Assessment

Journal (100%)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Paul Ghaie

Synopsis

Acupuncture techniques and methods of stimulation allows the previously learnt channels and points, and philosophy of Acupuncture to be utilised in the clinical situation. Demonstrations of materials used, and of various techniques of stimulation will be provided at the residential weekend, and by the mentors.

Acupuncture therapeutics provides the framework from which all therapeutics can be easily organised according to a simple protocol. This subject ties together all of the previous material in the course, to allow the student to begin using acupuncture in their medical practice on suitable cases.

Outcomes

At the completion of this section students should be able to:

  1. Describe the various methods of stimulating acupuncture points;

  1. Understand the use of the various modalities;

  1. Choose the most appropriate methods of stimulation in a particular patient or disease state;

  1. Describe the rationale for the choice of points for any condition deemed satisfactory for acupuncture theory;

  1. Understand the relationship between knowledge of western medicine and acupuncture in your daily practice;

  1. Integrate these two methods of care so that the most appropriate treatment is given to the patient at all times; and

  1. Recognises the difficulty of assessing acupuncture therapy in trials using western methodology and interpreting reports that appear in the literature.

Assessment

Journal (100%)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Paul Ghaie

Synopsis

This unit covers all aspects of Medical Acupuncture with particular emphasis on the practical side of the subject, ensuring that the student is able, by the end of the course, to incorporate this method of therapy into their own practice with confidence.

Outcomes

  1. To ensure that the students understanding from the theoretical basis, can be transferred into the practical clinical situation.
  2. To make sure that each student can find the major acupuncture points on a patient, not simply to be able to describe the location.
  3. Students should be able to work through a therapeutic protocol, and arrive at a combination of acupuncture points to be used in the treatment of their patients.

Assessment

10 mentor sessions (30 hours)
Case Presentation, Clinical Audit, Examination (100%). Students must achieve a pass or higher in the examination to pass the unit overall.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Brendan Murphy

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the essential clinical practice skills required for adequate performance as a clinician in a community mental health setting. The unit addresses psychiatric assessment, the use of a structured instrument (e.g. HONOS) and specific assessment issues that arise in different clinical scenarios. The unit also covers case management principles and practical issues in mental health delivery with an emphasis on some special focus areas. The unit also addresses the theoretical framework and management of schizophrenia and related disorders, affective disorders, anxiety disorders, substance abuse disorders and personality disorders.

Outcomes

  1. Be able to understand and conduct an adequate assessment of a patient with a psychiatric syndrome.
  2. Be familiar with the essential skills in using a structured instrument as an assessment tool eg, HoNOS
  3. Be able to describe the principles and features of case management in mental health.
  4. Be able to utilise the principles in clinical practice as demonstrated by experience.
  5. Have developed sufficient knowledge about various psychiatric syndromes and their management to be utilised in clinical practice.
  6. Be able to critically appraise the recent development relevant to this unit.

Assessment

Essay (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (30%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (10%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jill Gray

Synopsis

This unit provides a comprehensive account of the historical facts about various systems and models of mental health care, and covers the context in which mental health services are developed and delivered, with particular focus on community-based system of care in Australia. This includes covering the areas of social power and mental illness, community based responses to mental illness and the global perspective of mental health services. The unit also includes the mental health policy framework in Australia, and details and data about mental disorders in Australia. There will be a special focus on the particular needs of indigenous persons and people from non-English speaking background. Various service models in different states and territories will be covered, and there will be a case study of mental health services of Victoria. The unit concludes with discussion of the future direction of community mental health services in Australia. Contents include:

  • History of mental illness and its care, an overview.
  • Social power and mental illness.
  • Mental illness, responses from the community.
  • The global perspective.
  • Mental Health Policy in Australia.
  • Mental Disorder in Australia.
  • The particular needs of indigenous peoples.
  • The particular needs of people from non-English speaking backgrounds.
  • Services in the specific states and territories.
  • Mental health services in Victoria - a case study.
  • Next steps.
  • Summary and integration.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit participants should:

  1. Have developed a working understanding of the context of mental health delivery.
  2. Have understood the community-based framework of mental health services.
  3. Understand the policy framework, epidemiological basis and basics of service systems in mental health services.
  4. Be able to develop an understanding of the special needs of patients from an indigenous and non-English speaking background.
  5. Be able to critically appraise the mental health service in Victoria through a case study.

Assessment

Essay (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (30%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (10%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Professor Lenore Manderson

Synopsis

The unit will provide a basic understanding of scientific research in mental health and the methods of evaluation of the practice. There will be topics on medical and biopsychosocial models, psychodynamic principles, cognitive-behavioural models, and role of prevention in mental health. The unit also covers the process involved in multi-disciplinary team functioning, role of other stakeholders, consumers and the function of various disciplines. There will be an emphasis on understanding the mental health care system and various service models and the subject will conclude with an integration of all topics covered in the context of community mental health service. Content includes:

  • Scientific Research in Mental Health.
  • Evaluation in mental health practice.
  • The medical and biopsychosocial models.
  • Psychodynamic thinking.
  • Cognitive behavioural models.
  • Prevention and stress- diathesis models.
  • Function
  • Understanding teams: Multidisciplinary Teamwork.
  • Understanding other participants in the system: perspectives from different stakeholders.
  • Understanding mental health care systems; model services.
  • The perspective of the consumer.
  • Summary and integration.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student should:

  1. Have a basic understanding about scientific research and evaluation methods in mental health.
  2. Have achieved sufficient knowledge base on medical and biopsychosocial models, psychodynamic models, cognitive-behavioural models and stress-diathesis models.
  3. Have a functional understanding of multi-disciplinary teamwork and processes and critically understand the perspective of other stakeholders.
  4. Learn and understand various mental health care systems and models of service.
  5. Be able to integrate all concepts in the mental health practice with the systems and model of service delivery.

Assessment

Essay (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (30%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (10%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Ms Jill Gray

Synopsis

This unit provides an overview of the various policy contexts in community mental health practice like national and state mental health policies and a global move towards community mental health care. It addresses various practice paradigms of community mental health practices. The concept of needs of the patients, needs assessment and interpretation of the needs will be covered. There will be an emphasis on various patient groups. Community based intervention strategies and models will be covered with discussion of the skill base for community mental health practice. The role of consumers, participation, empowerment and collaboration will be covered and there will be an integration of all these concepts into clinical mental health practice.

Contents include:

  • The Policy Context of Community Mental Health Practice;
  • Practice Paradigms;
  • Mental Health Practice in the Community;
  • The Concept of Need;
  • Assessing Mental Health Needs;
  • Particular Groups and the Interpretation of Need;
  • Community Based Intervention Models and Strategies;
  • Skills for Community Mental Health Practice;
  • Power, Participation and Collaboration;
  • Consumers and Citizenship; and
  • Community Mental Health Practice.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, the student should:

  1. Be familiar with the policy context of community mental health practice;
  2. Be able to understand various practice paradigms;
  3. Be able to understand the concept of need and competently do a need assessment and develop community intervention models;
  4. Be able to understand the skills needed for community mental health practice;
  5. Be able to critically understand the concepts of empowerment, consumer participation and collaborative practices; and
  6. Be able to develop a consumer focused understanding of mental health needs.

Assessment

Essay (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (30%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternate Assessment (10%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Barbara Eppingstall

Synopsis

Topics include dementia, depression, delirium, and delusional disorders, as well as recent developments in these areas and how appropriate services are delivered. Other major areas are treatment and management issues of the elderly.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, student will have:

  1. Gained a basic background in aged mental health;
  2. Developed a knowledge of recent developments in this area;
  3. Become familiar with service delivery, examining treatment and management issues in the mental health of the elderly; and
  4. Developed an understanding of research findings in the literature.

Assessment

Essay (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (30%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (10%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

One day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Lenore Manderson

Synopsis

The effects of cultural background on the definitions of mental illnesses and the implications of cultural and community structures for the delivery of mental health services. Major areas covered include adaptation and acculturation, characteristics of Aboriginal and ethnic communities in Australia, racism and prejudice, the mental health of Aboriginal and immigrant communities in Australia, cultural assumptions of standard methods of assessment and treatment, explanatory models of illness, State mental health policy, psychiatric service utilisation, and gaps in current service provision.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students will have:

  1. Developed a greater sensitivity to the impact of trauma, migration and settlement on mental health;
  2. Explored definitions of mental illness across cultures and the continuing debate concerning differing conceptions of mental illness;
  3. Gained an understanding of the cultural factors in assessment and treatment approaches;
  4. Gained knowledge of the major national and Victorian policy approaches to providing mental health services to Aboriginal and ethnic communities; and
  5. Developed an understanding of current gaps in service provision to Aboriginal and ethnic communities in preparation for participation in policy development, service delivery and evaluation.

Assessment

Essays (60%)
Applied Learning Exercises (30%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (10%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit deals with two major disabilities associated with mental health problems: intellectual disability and substance misuse. Topics include aetiology of intellectual disability, epidemiology of mental illness in intellectual disability, manifestations of mental illness in the intellectually disabled, management issues for the intellectually disabled, substance use, harmful use, addiction, dependence and other definitions, determinants of substance use and abuse, substance use and precipitation of mental illness, motivational intervention, models of change and harm minimisation in the area of dependency, and HIV and substance misuse.

Outcomes

  1. Intellectual Disability

Upon completion of this unit students will:

  1. Have an understanding of the interaction between the aetiologies of intellectual disability and of mental disorder;
  2. Be aware of the epidemiological background to mental disorder in intellectual disability;
  3. Understand the key principles and philosophies of care for persons with learning difficulties in the more general case;
  4. Understand how to incorporate the general principles of care for those with intellectual disabilities into psychiatric management; and
  5. Understand the application of special strategies for management of mental disorder in the case of those with intellectual disability.
2. Substance Misuse

Students will also:

  1. Understand the determinants of substance use in the general population;
  2. Understand the social and individual determinants of pathological substance use;
  3. Be aware of definitions of various patterns of abnormal substance use;
  4. Be aware of current understandings and treatment strategies in the area of substance misuse;
  5. Understand the role of substance misuse in precipitating psychiatric and medical disorder;
  6. Understand the ways in which psychiatric disorders may affect individuals ability to respond to treatment interventions for substance misuse and
  7. Know how to adapt strategies for management of substance misuse to the specific problems of those with mental illness.

Assessment

Assessment for the Mental Illness and Alcohol and Other Drugs component of the unit consists of a 1,500 - 2,000 word (approx) assignment weighted at 35% and a 1,000 word (approx.) learning journal weighted at 15%. Assessment for the Mental Illness and Intellectual Disability component of the course consists of a 2,000 word assignment weighted at 40% and a 1,000 word (approx.) learning journal weighted at 10%. All assessment tasks must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Professor Mairead Dolan

Synopsis

History of the development of concepts of the mind, modern understandings of the nature of consciousness, philosophical problems in understanding consciousness; the nature of introspective, empirical, narrative and phenomenological evidence for the efficacy or otherwise of various forms of psychological interventions; assessment in cognitive behavioural psychotherapy, cognitive behavioural interventions in depression and anxiety; use of cognitive behavioural strategies in controlling positive symptoms in psychosis. The unit also includes origins of aggression; negotiation strategies, boundary issues, milieu issues; psychological issues associated with the use of restraint; dynamic and learning theory based understandings of the major personality disorder groups; modern approaches to therapy in these conditions.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students will have:

  1. An understanding of modern theories of the mind in normal and abnormal states. They will be aware of the range of psychological interventions available in the management of mental disorder and of the nature of the evidence which underpins the efficacy of these interventions.
  2. Developed a familiarity with the practice of modern psychological interventions useful in both inpatient and community settings, particularly as applied to the areas of depression, maximisation of compliance with therapeutic regimes, management of aggression, management of positive and negative symptoms in psychotic disorders and the management of personality disorders.

Assessment

Essay (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (30%)
On-Campus Workshop (10%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

One day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

The unit will examine the theory and practice of mental health service delivery in primary health care. It will consider the skills and knowledge required to improve the delivery of mental health services in primary care environments. Strategies for service planning, including needs analysis, project management and service evaluation will be explored. The impact on service provision of organisational and professional cultures and boundaries will be examined along with philosophies that shape service delivery within primary care. Service delivery models and clinical models of prevention, early intervention and health promotion will be explored. Effective client intervention strategies of counselling, motivational interviewing, behavioural intervention and problem solving will also be addressed.

Contents includes:

  • An overview of the mental health service system
  • National and international trends in primary care
  • The concepts of early intervention, prevention, health promotion
  • Understanding partnership: cultures, cooperation and service boundaries
  • Service planning - needs analysis and program development, program implementation and evaluation
  • Special needs clients
  • Intervention strategies - Motivational interviewing, problem solving techniques, behavioural interventions

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students will have:

  1. Developed their awareness of current philosophies and the policies driving mental health practice in primary care;
  2. An understanding of the concepts of prevention, early intervention and health promotion in mental health;
  3. Developed an understanding of the key function and skills required of primary mental health practitioners;
  4. An appreciation of the roles of the key stakeholders in primary care; and
  5. An awareness of the evidence supporting the intervention strategies relevant to primary mental health service delivery.

Assessment

Essay (60%)
Applied Learning Exercise (30%)
On-Campus Workshop (10%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

One day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Karen Wilkinson

Synopsis

This unit aims to enable students to have a familiarity with and a knowledge of some of the theories on which the understanding of child development and the practice of child psychotherapy are based. It is designed to give students knowledge of human development from three theoretical perspectives and thereby enable them to have a theoretical basis for their practice of observation, assessment and case management. The theoretical perspectives to be studied in this unit will be those of Sigmund Freud, Anna Freud and John Bowlby.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student is expected to:

  1. display an understanding and knowledge of the theories of Sigmund Freud, Anna Freud and John Bowlby relevant to child development,
  2. demonstrate knowledge of the specific similarities and differences between the three theorists and their theories,
  3. understand the different phases of child development,
  4. demonstrate an ability to integrate the theories and apply them to clinical material,
  5. display an ability to compare and contrast the theories.

Assessment

Written assignment (900 words)(15%)
Written assignment (1800 words)(30%)
Essay (2100 words)(35%)
Attendance at On-campus workshop/Alternative Assessment (20%)

All assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Carolyn Aston

Synopsis

This unit will explore the history, theory and principles of Developmental Observation and its relevance to clinical and consultative work with children and adolescents. There will be a consideration of the nature of the links between observation and the developmental theories. Students will be able to explore these areas both through the context of the course work and prescribed observations of children in their naturalistic settings.

Outcomes

This unit is designed to give students an understanding of the history, theories and principles of developmental observation and its relevance to clinical work with children and adolescents. On completion of this unit the student will be expected to:

  1. have an understanding and knowledge of the history, theory and principles of Developmental Observation;
  2. recognise the relevance that observation skills have to the understanding of children and adolescents and therapeutic and consultative work;
  3. understand the nature of links between observation and the developmental theories; and
  4. have an appreciation of how to recognise and understand their own responses to what is observed and the use of these in their work.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (20%)
Written assignment 2 (20%)
Essay (40%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (20%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

This unit will consider the theories of Donald Winnicott and Melanie Klein and their relevance to understanding the psychological development of children and adolescents in terms of both healthy development and the development of psychopathology. The unit will also examine the relevance of these theories to working therapeutically with children and adolescents.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit students will be expected to:

  1. display an understanding and knowledge of the theories of Donald Winnicott and Melanie Klein relevant to child development;
  2. to demonstrate the relevance of these theories to the psychological development of children and adolescents in terms of both healthy development and the development of psychopathology;
  3. to understand the historical context in which these theorists sit and their contribution to the field of understanding and working with children and adolescents;
  4. demonstrate knowledge of the specific similarities and differences between these theorists and their theories; and
  5. to examine these theoretical concepts by the use of case examples as illustrations.

Assessment

Written assignment (40%)
Journal 1 (10%)
Journal 2 (10%)
Journal 3 (20%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (20%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop

Prerequisites

CPS5001 (DCP0001)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Toni Heron

Synopsis

This unit is designed to present an introduction to the conceptual framework and guidelines for the methodology of the psycho-dynamic assessment of psychological disturbance in children and adolescents. It will introduce students to disturbances in normal psychological development and the clinical concepts of assessment that are based on psychodynamic and developmental principles.
It will consider interviewing and observational methods with children and adolescents that enable psychological data to be collected and understood. It will also demonstrate the complex task of integrating information from several different sources to provide a diagnostic assessment of the individual nature and degree of disturbance presented, and the extent to which that interferes with the child's normal development and functioning.

Outcomes

This unit is designed to present an introduction to the conceptual framework and guidelines for the methodology of the psychodynamic assessment of psychological disturbance in children and adolescents. On completion of this unit the student is expected to:

  1. Understand theoretical and clinical concepts relevant to psychodynamic and developmental assessment of children and adolescents;
  2. Have an understanding of the possible meaning of the child's/adolescent's behaviour;
  3. Recognise the process occurring between child and worker and the data this provides;
  4. Recognise that assessment is a process that will provide a psychodynamic and developmental diagnostic formulation; and
  5. Explore optimal case management where treatment options and timing are presented in light of the diagnostic formulation, the available professional and clinical resources, and the child/adolescent's context. This will include the indications or contra-indications for child psychotherapy and other treatment options.

Assessment

Report A (10%)
Report B (10%)
Report C (20%)
Essay (40%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (20%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop

Prerequisites

CPS5001 (DCP0001) and CPS5002 (DCP0002)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

This unit will outline the principles of Child Psychotherapy from a developmental and psychoanalytic perspective. It will address the context and boundaries of therapy and explore ways the child communicates in therapy. It will also address issues of technique including the therapeutic use of the relationship between the child and the psychotherapist being the central tool in ongoing clinical work; the process of observing, hearing and interpretation in psychotherapy; issues of termination: and the structure, significance and dynamics of this process.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit students will be expected to have an understanding and knowledge of:

  1. the means by which the child communicates in therapy eg. through play, speech and other behaviours;
  2. the significance and meaning of the way the child relates to the therapist ie. an understanding of the concepts of transference ( the way the child perceives and relates to the therapist) and countertransference (the way therapist reacts to the child) and the possible meanings of these concepts and their importance;
  3. the use of interpretation in therapy - timing content and intention;
  4. the significance and importance of boundaries and structure provided by the therapist;
  5. termination - the process of bringing the therapy to a conclusion; and
  6. the impact of working with the disturbed child including the disturbed child in special situations - understanding this in a way which furthers understanding of the child and the therapeutic process.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (20%)
Written assignment 2 (20%)
Essay (40%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (20%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ros Webb

Synopsis

This unit will present a psychodynamic framework for adolescent developmental tasks, as well as associated problems and disturbances. It will also look at both general and phase specific principles and issues in psychotherapy with adolescents for the professionals as well as for the adolescents themselves.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit students will be expected to:

  1. Have a knowledge of a psychodynamic theoretical understanding of adolescent development, tasks and issues;
  2. Have some understanding of how various levels of problems and disturbances can arise during adolescence;
  3. understand basic principles in assessment for therapy with adolescents;
  4. examine how adolescents may present in therapy;
  5. understand basic issues which arise in working with adolescents;
  6. explore the impact of working with adolescents on professionals and the importance of the process between professional and adolescent;
  7. explore termination issues in working with adolescents; and
  8. explore specific issues and principles to consider for inpatient work with adolescents.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (20%)
Written assignment 2 (20%)
Essay (40%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (20%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Marell Lynch

Synopsis

This unit is designed to present an introduction to the theoretical principles underlying the practice of short-term psychodynamic psychotherapy and crisis work. Areas covered will include assessment and treatment issues.

Outcomes

This unit is designed to give students knowledge of the several modes of shorter term psychotherapeutic response and their attendant practices. The unit, as one of the final units of the program, will attempt to overview the course and reflect upon the effective use of psychoanalytic psychotherapy skill in a range of non-traditional applications.

On completion of this unit the student is expected to:

  1. have an understanding of the historical development of short-term therapy;
  2. have an understanding of the models and central issues of short-term, brief and crisis therapy;
  3. understand the application of short-term, brief and crisis therapy to the age and developmental stage of the particular child or adolescent;
  4. have an understanding of the use of transference and counter-transference and interpretation in this work through detailed case examples;
  5. understand the importance of the development of skills through training prior to undertaking this work; and
  6. reflect upon the application of psychoanalytic understanding to the variety of needs present in child and adolescent community mental health auspices.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (40%)
Written assignment 2 (40%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (20%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Marita Lowry

Synopsis

This unit will examine an understanding of the role of parents in their child's development and different ways of working with parents from a psychodynamic and developmental perspective. Consideration will be made of the following ways of working with parents and the similarities and difference in the models: parent therapy; parent and child work combined; short-term and crisis work with parents; parent counselling; parent education; marital therapy/counselling; individual therapy/counselling.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be expected to:

  1. understand theoretical and clinical concepts of working with parents;
  2. have an understanding of the importance of parents' own development as it may affect their role as parents;
  3. explore possible ways of working with parents as relevant to their particular needs and those of their child/children; and
  4. understand the difficulties that may be experienced by the therapist when working with parents.

Assessment

Written assignment 1 (15%)
Written assignment 2 (25%)
Essay (40%)
On-Campus Workshop/Alternative Assessment (20%)
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

Concepts and principles of rural health practice and the impact on people in rural and remote areas. Definitions of rurality and their influence on health outcomes and access to health services. The nature of rural communities is examined and the health/illness patterns explored from a social and epidemiological framework. Structure and function of rural health care services and their role in maintaining the health status of individuals and communities. Rural practice from the point of view of the rural health professional, including consideration of personal and professional issues and on-going issues of recruiting and retaining health professionals in rural areas.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Critically analyse definitions of 'rural' and 'remote' as they pertain to health;
  2. Communicate and understand the impact social structures, roles and relationships have on the health and well-being of people living in rural and remote communities;
  3. Use evidence to identify the factors which affect the health status of Australians living in rural and remote communities;
  4. Engage in critical appraisal of the structures and processes involved in health services delivery in rural and remote areas;
  5. Differentiate between the aspects of rural and remote practice that distinguish it from practice in the metropolitan setting;
  6. Critically analyse the factors that affect the recruitment and retention of rural and remote practitioners.

Assessment

Case study of a rural/remote community - 3000-3500 words (50%)
Interview with a rural practitioner - 2500 words (35%)
Discussion forum (15%).

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedGippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anske Robinson

Synopsis

This unit aims to orientate the student to research through an exploration of the nature of health professional research. The unit will assist students to interpret published research and enhance their appreciation of the ethical issues that health researchers face. The delivery of the unit is via WebCT.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit students will be expected to:

  1. Recognise and appreciate the importance of research to health care practice;
  2. Critically appraise research reports;
  3. Discuss the application of various research methods to their own practice;
  4. Identify a range of health care problems that could be investigated by research;
  5. Develop skills related to the design, implementation and evaluation of research proposals;
  6. Apply selected findings to health and health-related research to improve practice.

Assessment

Written assignment: Analysing and critiquing quantitative research data and literature. (40%)
Written assignment: Analysing and critiquing qualitative research data and literature. (40%)
Written assignment: Developing a short research proposal. (20%)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit explores the context in which drug use and drug management occur in rural areas of Australia. The unit introduces students to current, and at times contentious, debates in the alcohol and other drug field and examines responses to these issues in the community and in services in rural areas. Students are encouraged to critically appraise drug issues and apply these understandings to particular rural communities. Core topics explore: historical context of drug issues; theories of addiction; current drug policies in Australia; the cultural context of drugs and alcohol; drug use in rural Australia; drug services in rural areas; co-morbidity and dual diagnosis.

Assessment

Written assignments
discussion group participation

Chief examiner(s)

TBA


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit takes a broad view of indigenous health in Australia and beyond. It examines the social, cultural, historical, economic and political factors that underlie the health contexts of Indigenous Australians. A better understanding of these factors must precede the generation of solutions to improving indigenous health outcomes. Wherever possible, the unit uses and looks for the Indigenous voice and perspective rather than the mainstream public health perspective of its earlier format, or a purely clinical approach. It emphasises the diversity of Australian Indigenous communities and their health contexts, therefore seeking widely for different approaches to improving Indigenous health.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit participants should be able to:

  1. Assess the complexity and dynamism of Indigenous communities;
  2. Describe Indigenous concepts of health, wellbeing and illness;
  3. Demonstrate an understanding of the interaction between Indigenous concepts of health and mainstream health systems at the individual, family and community level;
  4. Articulate the importance of social justice, human rights, and cultural factors to local, national and international Indigenous health;
  5. Critically evaluate strategies for improving Indigenous health; and
  6. Demonstrate critical reflection about your own professional practice and attitudes to all aspects of Indigenous health (social, cultural, historical, economic and political).

Assessment

Discussion of proposed essay or project (10%)
Literature review and annotated bibliography - 1500 words (25%)
Major Essay - 3000-3500 words (50%)
Discussion of findings for discussion forum (15%).

Chief examiner(s)

TBA


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit is concerned with developing the knowledge and skills necessary for successful rural interprofessional practice. The material will assist health professionals to organise and interconnect activities and roles with other professionals and occupational groups for the benefit of rural patients. The delivery of the unit is a combination of self-directed learning and interactive workshops focusing on theoretical knowledge and practical skills. This unit is relevant to all health professionals and, the skills gained by students are applicable for current and future work in the health sector and, will benefit any subsequent community in which they work.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Critically examine the principles of interprofessional practice as related to their own practice;
  2. Identify the characteristics of effective interprofessional teams and their influence on patient centred care;
  3. Explore the diversity, effectiveness and impact of interprofessional practice in rural health practice;
  4. Develop a model of interprofessional practice which can be used to evaluate an existing or theoretical practice environment.

Assessment

Workshop 1 (1500 wd equivalence) 25% comprising 10% online discussion and 15% participation in work
Workshop 2 (2100 wd equivalence) 35% comprising written assignment 15% and 20% participation in work
Project proposal (2400 wd equivalence) 40%

Chief examiner(s)

TBA


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

In this unit students will be implementing the proposal developed in CRH5016. Goals and objectives will be negotiated through individual student learning contracts.

Outcomes

Negotiated clinical project

Chief examiner(s)

TBA

Prerequisites

Must have passed unit CRH5016


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Eleanor Mitchell

Synopsis

Designed to support in the preparation for the independent research project (minor thesis). It contains a theoretical component, but is aimed at teaching practical research skills. Students are taught how to translate their thoughts and interests into a sound research project by undertaking a critical review of the literature, developing a research proposal and preparing an ethics application.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Communicate an understanding of the use of research as a basis for decision making in the health care policy and clinical arena particularly in its application to health care practice;
  2. Undertake a critical analysis of the research literature in response to the proposed research question;
  3. Develop a research proposal which explains the selection of appropriate research questions, designs and implementation plans within a health or community setting;
  4. Prepare an ethics application which examines the ethical considerations, legislation and guidelines in promoting ethical conduct in research.

Assessment

Literature review (2500 words)(40%)(hurdle)
Research proposal (2500 words)(40%) (hurdle)
Ethics application (1000 words)(20%) (hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Must have passed CRH5001


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Rural Health
OfferedGippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Margaret Stebbing

Synopsis

Environmental change can have both direct and indirect effects on human health. Exploring issues such as global climate change and loss of biodiversity, this unit will examine relationships between human health and anthropogenic environmental change (environmental change accelerated by human activity). Questions underpinning students' exploration will be: What is the relationship between the health of the environment and the health of human communities? Do ecological changes affect human health and well being? What are possible solutions? How do we act in the face of lack of evidence, gaps in knowledge, uncertainty and conflicting evidence. The emphasis of the unit will be on global and regional environmental change and how this manifests at a local level in both individuals and populations. The role of health professionals and policy makers will be explored and students will reflect on their own personal viewpoints and practice as professionals and as global citizens. Students will examine local and regional issues relevant to their professional practice and place these in the larger global context. Multidisciplinary approaches to an ecological perspective of health - the concept of a web of interconnected, interacting and dynamic relationships which embeds humans in their physical environment - will be applied to examine issues such as: health effects of global warming; health effects of loss of biodiversity; vector-borne and zoonotic diseases and agricultural pollutants.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Discuss specific examples of direct and indirect effects of anthropogenic environmental change on human health;
  2. Critically analyse processes of interaction between anthropogenic environmental change and human health at a local, regional and global level using ecological perspectives on health and the physical environment;
  3. Examine the socioeconomic context of environmental change and health in differing vulnerabilities and rural and urban populations;
  4. Critically analyse strategies for dealing with lack of evidence, conflicting evidence and uncertainty;
  5. Reflect on the impact of studying this unit on your own professional practice and personal perspectives; and
  6. Undertake an ecological analysis of a selected issue and develop recommendations that will help to improve practice.

Assessment

Case study analysis (1500 wds)(20%)
Reflective essay (3000 wds)(40%)
Group discussion activities (2000 wds)(40%)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor M Abramson

Synopsis

Advanced understanding of epidemiology methods used to study chronic diseases. Overview of descriptive and analytical epidemiology of diseases of major public health importance in Australia. Particular methodological issues include assessing causality, bias, confounding, effect modification, exposure assessment, outcome assessment, prevention paradigms and whether epidemiology has reached its limits.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Understand and discuss the principles underlying the epidemiological study of diseases;
  2. Appreciate and identify the methodological difficulties inherent in observational epidemiological studies of diseases;
  3. Be able to apply general epidemiological principles to specific diseases;
  4. Understand and use descriptive epidemiological measures to summarize the population impact of specific diseases; and
  5. Appreciate new methodological developments in epidemiology.

Assessment

Two written assignments (50% each)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 contact hours per week

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Doctor of Public Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Rory Wolfe

Synopsis

Confounding and effect modification, logistic regression, conditional logistic regression for matched case-control studies, linear regression, diagnostics to assess model fit, model estimation methods, Poisson regression for rates, Stata statistical software.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will have:

  1. learnt regression methods as applied to epidemiological data.
  2. gained an understanding of regression methods in terms of the epidemiological concepts of confounding and effect modification.
  3. the skills to apply regression methods to example datasets using statistical software on a laptop computer.
  4. gained an understanding and the skills to interpret regression methods in published articles on epidemiological research studies.

Assessment

Two written assignments (50% each).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 x 2 block days.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor M Abramson

Synopsis

Quantitative skills necessary to undertake and complete doctoral level projects. Major types of epidemiological study designs, defining research questions and hypotheses. Assessment of reliability, validity of questionnaires, selecting appropriate instruments for public health research. Steps in preparing a grant application for competitively awarded funding, alternative sampling strategies for subject election, data analysis strategies and bias control. Ethical issues in public health research & role of ethics committees.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. demonstrate a thorough understanding of quantative research methods in public health;
  2. design, develop and present an original research protocol;
  3. prepare an application for approval by an Ethics Committee;
  4. design and outline methods for validating a questionnaire suitable for data entry; and
  5. write a paper suitable for publication in a peer reviewed journal.

Assessment

Written appraisal (20%)
Oral presentation (25%)
Written protocol (25%)
Draft questionnaire and manuscript (20%).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 contact hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Prof J Stoelwinder

Synopsis

Leadership and management principles as related to public health organisations. Key management and organisational theories, interface of theory and practice, human resource management, sources of power and influence. Techniques for managing organisational change, building effective and adaptive health organisations, elements of strategic planning, difference between leadership and management. Leadership skills, team building, conflict management, network development and management, strategic alliances, application of leadership and management principles to solve complex health organisational problems

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of key management and organisational theories and an understanding of the interface between theory and practice in the management of health care systems;
  2. describe the components of human resource management;
  3. describe sources of power and influence;
  4. describe techniques for managing organisational change and for building effective and adaptive health care systems;
  5. describe the elements of strategic planning;
  6. demonstrate an understanding of the difference between management and leadership,
  7. demonstrate skills in leadership, team building and conflict management;
  8. describe the development and management of networks and strategic alliances;
  9. apply the principles of leadership and management to solve complex problems in public health settings.

Assessment

Web-based tasks 30%
Written assignments 70 %

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Robert Hall

Synopsis

Supervised practical placement in University Departments and Centres, hospitals, affiliated research Institutes, community health services, non-government organisations or the Dept of Human Services. Giving students the opportunity to interact with practising public health professionals. Students are co-supervised by a member of the Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences academic staff.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. demonstrate a thorough understanding of quantative research methods in public health;
  2. design, develop and present an original research protocol;
  3. prepare an application for approval by an Ethics Committee;
  4. design and outline methods for validating a questionnaire suitable for data entry; and
  5. write a paper suitable for publication in a peer reviewed journal.

Assessment

Written report 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Audrey McKinlay

Synopsis

Psychopathology Part I and II are designed to impart students with a working knowledge of mental disorders. The units also aim to equip students with the clinical skills required to assess, formulate and diagnose clients presenting with a variety of clinical conditions.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Conduct a clinical interview with a client, incorporating a mental status examination.
  2. Complete a thorough and accurate written evaluation of a client.
  3. Be familiar with major classes of psychiatric illness.
  4. Feel competent in the formulation and diagnosis of a wide variety of psychiatric problems.
  5. Effectively and appropriately contribute to case discussions regarding formulation and diagnoses and reflect upon and evaluate own and others' assessment/clinical interviewing skills

Assessment

Satisfactory Class Participation 10%
Mental Status Examination 1 (1000 words) 10%
Mental Status Examination 2 (1000 words) 10%
Psychological Report (1500 words) 30%
End of semester test 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rene Stolwyk

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to general principles of psychological assessment across the lifespan, including ethical and cultural issues, reliability and validity, sensitivity and specificity, error types and bias prevention, statistical and clinical significance, and the effect of base rates. They will learn how to apply behavioural assessment techniques. They will be exposed to a range of tests and scales assessing important aspects of cognitive and emotional functioning and they will learn the background theory of these measures, as well as how to administer, score and interpret them. They will learn how to integrate and interpret psychological assessment results and communicate this information in both written and oral form.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should:

  1. Understand the principles and processes of psychological, behavioural, and personality measurement and their application;
  2. Have become proficient in the administration, scoring, interpretation and integration of assessment results utilising some of the most commonly used psychological tests, including cognitive and personality techniques; and
  3. Have developed skills in behavioural assessment including development, implementation, and evaluation of behavioural assessments.
  4. Show competency in evaluating psychometric instruments for research purposes and in screening referrals for psychometric assessment, selecting appropriate tests, integrating results and providing oral and written communication of results to interested parties.

Assessment

Satisfactory attendance and participation are required to pass the unit.
Psychometric Measure Evaluation (20%)
Behavioural Assessment (20%)
Behavioural Focused Self-Assessment (Hurdle)
WAIS-IV & WMS-IV Administration (Hurdle)
WAIS-IV Examination (20%)
Psychological report (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Katrina Simpson

Synopsis

This unit will equip students with the necessary skills to undertake research. Nonetheless, the primary motivation for this course concerns future employment. Research design and analysis are critical components of both academic and professional psychology.

Outcomes

This unit equips students with the necessary skills they need to design research and analyse data for their thesis, placements, and employment. After completing this unit successfully, students should be able to undertake a comprehensive program evaluation as well as a single subject design, and complete their thesis, confidently, competently, and independently.

Specifically, students should be able to:

  • Understand and design the main phases of the key research approaches, including program evaluations, single subject designs, experiments, quasi-experiments, and qualitative projects;
  • Accommodate the considerations and complications of these approaches, such as sampling biases, spurious variables, common method variance, suppressors, non-recursive relationships, confounds, consequential validity, asymmetric transfer, mediators, moderators, stakeholder needs, economic evaluation, family wise errors, power, autocorrelation, and nonlinear dynamics;
  • Apply multivariate statistics techniques to address some of these complications, such as ANCOVA, discriminant function analysis, logistic regression analysis, multiple regression analysis, canonical correlation, and factor analysis;
  • Recognize the fundamental principles of more advanced concepts, which can then be explored through additional reading, including HLM, grounded theory, survival analyses, meta-analyses, catastrophe theory, signal detection theory, ARIMA, interim designs, Bayesian theory, and structural equation modelling;
  • Develop creative and insightful methods to maximise the utility of research; and
  • Justify and report the procedures and techniques that were utilised.

Assessment

The assessment will comprise two components: a journal (60%) and a multiple-choice examination (40%).

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael Daffern

Synopsis

A range of topics associated with the provision of psychological services, including basic counselling skills, review of relevant legislation and ethical/professional standards, and developing ethically and culturally sensitive psychological practice. This unit comprises a two day workshop, held prior to the commencement of formal course-work and seminars. Material will be presented in various formats including didactic teaching, small group exercises and role plays. The workshop and seminars will be supplemented by readings and handouts.

Outcomes

The primary aim in this unit is to:

  1. Equip students with knowledge of the laws and ethical principles which govern research and professional practice in psychology and understand how to apply their knowledge of relevant legislation and codes of professional conduct to such issues as confidentiality, informed consent, freedom of information, intra and inter professional relationships, responsibilities, and professional conduct.
  2. Have an understanding of the intercultural and ethnic issues that impact on their practice.

Assessment

Self Assessment (Hurdle)
Examination (80%)
Class presentation (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Nicole Rinehart

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to ensure that students are familiar with disorders that occur during childhood and adolescence. Diagnosis and classification, aetiology of the major disorders occurring in childhood and adolescence, as well as the major forms of treatment and management based on recent research will be covered. Various disorders will be examined including autism, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, anxiety disorders, and depression. Students will be expected to develop competence in the application of diagnostic classification systems to children but also will be encouraged to critically evaluate such systems and be aware of their limitations in paediatric populations. A component of this unit will be devoted to formal psychological, especially cognitive, assessment of children and adolescents. Although the major focus of this unit will be on the identification and assessment of disorders and assessment of cognitive abilities in children, the use of various treatment modalities with children, adolescents, and their families will also be discussed with an emphasis on cognitive behavioural approaches. The final sessions of this unit will focus on clinical developmental issues later in life.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Understand the diagnosis, classification, and aetiology of the major disorders occurring in childhood and adolescence;
  2. Understand the principles of interviewing and assessing children and adolescents;
  3. Be competent in the administration of the Wechsler Intelligence Scale for

Children (WISC-IV);

  1. Be familiar with the major forms of treatment and management based;
  2. Be competent in writing a clinical case formulation for a child presenting with a clinical developmental disorder; and
  3. Understand clinical developmental issues in later life using a biopsychosocial frame-work.

Assessment

WISC-IV assessment. (20%).
a brief report (1000 words) 30%
Examination 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael Daffern

Synopsis

Students will develop an understanding of the role of the Clinical Neuropsychologist and of legal and ethical principles governing research and professional practice in psychology. Students will review relevant legislation and ethical/professional standards and develop ethically and culturally sensitive psychological practices. They will learn how to work with other professionals and develop the skills to conduct a clinical interview, take a case history, and write a report. Students will observe at least one neuropsychological assessment.

Outcomes

The primary aim in this unit is to equip students with the basic skills necessary for their entrance into the profession of Clinical Neuropsychology. When students have completed this unit they will:

  1. Be familiar with the legal and ethical principles which govern research and professional practice in psychology and understand how to apply their knowledge of relevant legislation and codes of professional conduct to such issues as confidentiality, informed consent, freedom of information, intra and inter professional relationships, responsibilities, and professional conduct;
  2. Be able to define the professional role/s of the Clinical Neuropsychologist;
  3. Understand the relationship between the Clinical Neuropsychologist and other health professionals;
  4. Have an understanding of the importance of teamwork and the skills necessary to implement this understanding;
  5. Have acquired the practical skills necessary to conduct a clinical interview, develop an understanding of the history preceding the development of a neuropsychological problem and write a comprehensive case report; and
  6. Have an understanding of the intercultural and ethnic issues that impact on neuropsychological practice.

Assessment

Satisfactory attendance and participation are required to pass the unit.
Assessment tasks include:
A history-taking exercise (Hurdle Requirement);
A case report (Hurdle Requirement);
Examination (80%)
Class presentation (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Russell Conduit and Professor Julie Stout

Synopsis

This subject reviews the neuroanatomy of the human brain and spinal cord at the level of detail required by the practicing clinical neuropsychologist. Emphasis is placed on structure-function relationships, and how different brain regions interact to regulate complex cognitive skills. Students also learn about the clinical neurological examination and neuroimaging, with an emphasis placed on what these methods allow us to infer regarding underlying neuroanatomy and lesions. In addition, students will learn about neurogenetics, and how genetic disorders link to variations in neuroanatomy that underpin behavioural manifestations of these neurogenetic disorders. Students learn:

  1. to identify the major features of the brain and spinal cord, using prosected specimens, models and cross-sectional images
  2. to understand the structural and functional relationships between these features
  3. to be able to apply this knowledge to the clinical situation.

Outcomes

At the completion of the subject, students should

  1. Identify the major components of pathways associated with smell, vision, hearing, touch, balance, taste, movement, memory, emotion, and language.
  2. Be familiar with the external anatomy of the brain, to be able to name and identify each part and describe its contribution to behavioural and cognitive function.
  3. Be able to identify the main subcortical nuclei and their functions.
  4. Be able to identify the fibre tracts in the brain and spinal cord and describe their function.
  5. Be able to identify each major blood vessel in the brain and describe the functional consequences of infarction for each vessel.
  6. Be fluent in the terminology used to navigate the brain and describe brain structures.
  7. Be familiar with neurogenetic disorders and their manifestation in brain anatomy.
  8. Be knowledgeable about the clinical neurological examination and how neurologists denote and interpret their findings.
  9. Be familiar with the most common forms of imaging relevant to clinical neurology and neuropsychology.
  10. Have a view of how cognition and behaviour are implemented in neural tissues from the cellular to systems levels of analysis.

Assessment

Weekly assignments 80% final assessment 20%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Audrey McKinlay

Synopsis

Psychopathology Part I and II are designed to impart students with a working knowledge of mental disorders. The units also aim to equip students with the clinical skills required to assess, formulate and diagnose clients presenting with a variety of clinical conditions. In addition, the unit will include an introduction to drug classifications; legal control of drug use; pharmacokinetics; variability in response to drugs;chemical transmission and receptors.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Conduct a psychiatric interview with a client;

incorporating a mental status examination;

  1. Complete a thorough and accurate written evaluation of a client; and
  2. Be familiar with major classes of psychiatric illness.
  3. Understand the basic concepts of psychopharmacology with particular reference to recent advances in the fields of psychiatric medication, cognitive enhancers and neuroprotective agents, and substance abuse; and
  4. Effectively and appropriately contribute to case analyses regarding formulation and diagnoses and reflect upon and evaluate own and others' assessment/clinical interviewing skills

Assessment

Class Participation - Hurdle requirement
Psychiatric History Report (1500 words) - 15%
Clinical Case Report (3000 words) - 25%
Test - 20%
Examination - 20%
Essay (2000 words) - 20%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr J. Sabura Allen

Synopsis

Each session will include both lecture and experiential components. Experiential components will include group discussion, viewing and discussion of video tapes, skills practice with other group members, feedback/discussion of taped practice sessions, and providing resources for use in providing CBT therapy.

Outcomes

Students completing the initial sessions of this unit should have a basic understanding of a range of different schools of therapy and the historical, scientific and social contexts surrounding their development and practice. Students should be conversant with the specific assumptions, concepts and techniques of the major schools of therapy and have some knowledge of relevant outcome literature. In addition, students should have a thorough understanding of the processes common to all forms of intervention. By the end of the unit, students should have proficiency in the particular skills of behavioural and cognitive-behavioural therapies and their application to a range of clinical problems. Students will be expected to be competent in selecting interventions for individuals and monitoring the progress of their application.

Assessment

Presentation 1 (Hurdle)
Audiotape (Hurdle)
Class Participation (Hurdle)
Quiz (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Julie Stout

Synopsis

Neuropsychological disorders will be considered from perspectives taken in cognitive psychology and cognitive neuropsychology. In particular, there will be an emphasis on establishing frameworks for conceptualising neuropsychological features of neurological and psychiatric conditions, and frameworks for approaching clinical assessment and rehabilitation.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Have knowledge of neural bases of attention, language, visuospatial functions, memory, executive functions, emotion processing, and complex adaptive behaviours, in both in normality and pathology;
  2. Understand the current theoretical models proposed to account for neuropsychological impairments.

Assessment

2 x assignments (10% each)
4 x assignments (15% each)
Visual-graphic assignment (20%)
Oral presentation (hurdle requirement)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

Students will observe oral case presentations given by experienced clinicians and other students. They will be exposed to a variety of different presentation styles designed to cater for specific audiences and will learn to evaluate case material in an objective and critical manner. They will participate in discussions of clinical issues and recent developments in the field of Clinical Neuropsychology and will be challenged to remain informed about such developments and issues.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is to provide students with an opportunity to observe and participate in oral presentations of case material and other professional issues at the same time as they commence their first clinical placement.

When students have completed the unit they will:

  1. be familiar with the format of oral presentations suitable for a number of different audiences, ranging from the medico-legal forum and other colleagues to lay persons;
  2. participate confidently in case discussions;
  3. be informed about current issues in the field of clinical neuropsychology;
  4. have developed sufficient rapport with staff members to seek assistance when it is required during later years of the course; and
  5. have developed their ability to read and evaluate journal papers relevant to clinical neuropsychology.

Assessment

Class Contribution 25%
Oral Presentation 75%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rene Stolwyk

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to the scientist-practitioner model of neuropsychology incorporating the hypothesis testing approach to assessment. Students will be exposed to a number of neuropsychological tests and scales, designed to assess aspects of cognitive, behavioural and emotional functioning. They will learn how to select which tests are most appropriate in specific clinical situations and how to administer, score and interpret each measure. The skills required to document the assessment results will be imparted. Issues in assessing people from other cultural and linguistic backgrounds will also be discussed. On a broader level, students will be taught to be critical consumers of the neuropsychological literature.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is theoretical and practical, being to introduce students to an overarching approach to neuropsychological assessment and case formulation, as well as test selection, administration, scoring and interpretation.

At the conclusion of this unit students will:

  1. Be able to critically evaluate a wide range of neuropsychological tests and scales designed to assess numerous aspects of cognitive, behavioural and emotional functioning.
  2. Be able to plan neuropsychological assessments, including both qualitative and quantitative methods, appropriate to specific clinical contexts and referrals (eg; across the lifespan, cross-cultural assessment etc.).
  3. Be able to interpret and integrate information obtained during neuropsychological assessment to formulate a comprehensive analysis of an individual's neuropsychological function.
  4. To be able to disseminate findings of a neuropsychological assessment across a range of formats (reports, verbal feedback) and audiences (other clinicians, clients, family).

Assessment

Take Home excersise 70%
Oral Presentation 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

In this unit students will become familiar with a number of neuropsychological syndromes. Sessions will feature guest lecturers who are experts in their fields.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is to provide students with the knowledge required to recognise, describe and assess a number of common neuropsychological syndromes.

On completion of the unit students will:

  1. be able to provide a verbal description of the neuropsychological deficits associated with common inherited and acquired neurpsychological disorders;
  2. be able to recognise and differentiate between common syndromes on the basis of the patient's history, presentation and assessment results;
  3. feel confident in planning and executing a formal assessment of a patient presenting with each syndrome; and
  4. be aware of psychosocial and treatment issues associated with each disorder.

Assessment

Weekly take-home assessment (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stefan Luebbers / Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The DPsych program has established a network of placements in a variety of settings within which students can receive appropriate practica training. The practica coordinator and staff at the agency arrange the placements. Student preferences, practica availability and student training needs are taken account of in this process. Which agency and supervisor, number of days for the practica and also the commencement and completion dates are specified. Students are not permitted to negotiate their own practica or change any practica arrangements without first obtaining approval from the University Practica Coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the initial practicum, students will be:

  1. expected to have gained an appreciation of the professional role a psychologist in practice and to have an understanding of the delivery of a service to patients, clients and other interested parties;
  2. to have acquired an understanding of the context of the delivery of the service and the particular function it serves to the individual and the community at large;
  3. to have developed an appreciation of the competing demands on service delivery and the range of issues which impact on service delivery;
  4. expected to become proficient in establishing rapport with patients, administering and scoring the commonly used intellectual, diagnostic and personality tests, integrating the results and providing appropriate oral and written reports;
  5. expected to have developed an understanding of the functioning of a multi-disciplinary team and the role of its various members.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sabura Allen

Synopsis

Students completing the unit will have further developed their skills in therapeutic techniques and delivery of treatment in CBT and other integrative treatments for treatment of a variety of disorders, acquire the knowledge and skills to design focused treatment plans, appropriately implement treatment as required by a placement setting under supervision, report intervention outcomes appropriately, and have an understanding of the underlying theories of such interventions.

Outcomes

Students completing the unit should be conversant with the specific assumpions, concepts and techniques of the major schools of therapy and have some knowledge of relevant outcome literature. In addition, students should have a thorough understanding of the process common to all forms of intervention. By the end of the unit, students should have proficiency in the particular skills of behavioural and cognitive-behavioural therapies and their application to a range of clinical problems. Students will to be competent in selecting interventions for individuals and monitoring the progress of their application.

Assessment

Case Study 1 (20%)
Case Study 2 (25%)
Resource Book (20%)
Psychological Assessment Report (35%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 hour seminar per week

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jillian Broadbear

Synopsis

The unit will cover the following topics.

  1. Introduction to drug classifications; legal control of drug use; pharmacokinetics; variability in response to drugs; chemical transmission and receptors.
  2. Mood disorders: antidepressants and mood stabilizers; anti-anxiety drugs, sedatives and hypnotics, drugs used for OCD, panic, and phobic disorders.
  3. Psychosis and schizophrenia; anti-psychotic drugs. Cognitive enhancers: ADHD, Alzheimer's disease, brain trauma.
  4. Drugs of abuse: affects on brain and cognition.
  5. Delirium; The Mini Mental State Examination.
  6. Mental health in older adults.
  7. Bereavement.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students should:

  1. Understand the basic concepts of psychopharmacology with particular reference to recent advances in the fields of psychiatric medication, cognitive enhancers and neuroprotective agents, and substance abuse;
  2. Have a broad understanding of commonly prescribed psychoactive drugs, legal and illegal drugs and other commonly abused substances.
  3. Be able to comment on the likely physiological and psychological effects in a particular individual of a specific drug (together with possible drug interactions), and to prepare a written report on the topic.
  4. Be exposed to current issues in clinical psychopharmacology and in research concerning treatment approaches.
  5. Gain a broad understanding of the advanced psychopathology topics of delirium, mental health in older adults, and bereavement.

Assessment

Take-Home Examination (40%)
Essay (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kate Taylor

Synopsis

This unit provides an advanced level introduction to the growing field of health psychology. The major systems of the body that underlie health and illness will be reviewed, including the nervous system, endocrine system, immune system and cardiovascular system. The prevalence of major chronic diseases will be discussed and factors related to prevalence. Behaviour and lifestyle as they relate to health and illness will be reviewed. Health promotion and the prevention of disease will be discussed.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:

  1. Understand the scope of the related fields of health psychology and behavioural medicine, and their history.
  2. Understand the systems of the body that underlie health and disease.
  3. Comprehend the prevalence of different chronic diseases and factors that affect prevalence rates.
  4. Understand how behaviour and lifestyle relates to health.
  5. Understand the main models of health behaviour and behaviour change.
  6. Understand the goals and methods of health promotion and the prevention of disease.
  7. Understand how to develop conceptual models of patient problems, and how to plan and implement interventions based on the model and the relevant empirical literature.
  8. Understand the major chronic diseases that affect morbidity and mortality, that is, cancer and cardiovascular disease, from a behavioural perspective.
  9. Understand how to assess and manage, or contribute to the management, of a number of exemplar disorders/problems namely chronic headache, smoking tobacco, overweight and obesity, cancer and cardiovascular disease.
  10. Understand how to increase patient adherence with advice from health professionals.
  11. Understand models of stress and the stress-moderating variables of coping and social support; how to measure these constructs; and methods of stress management.
  12. Understanding how patients feel when asked by psychologists to complete 'homework assignments' and self-monitoring.

Assessment

Satisfactory attendance (80%) and participation in each seminar are required to pass the unit.
Experience Summary 1 (Hurdle)
Experience Summary 2 (Hurdle)
Examination (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

Students will observe oral case presentations given by experienced clinicians and other students and will present their own cases. They will be exposed to a variety of different presentation styles designed to cater for specific audiences and will learn to evaluate case material in an objective and critical manner. They will participate in discussions of clinical issues and recent developments in the field of Clinical Neuropsychology and will be challenged to remain informed about such developments and issues.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is to provide students with an opportunity to practice giving oral presentations of case material. A secondary aim is to provide a forum in which students may discuss other professional issues of interest to them.

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. be proficient in summarising and presenting case material in an oral format suitable for a number of different audiences, ranging from a hospital or rehabilitation setting through to a medico-legal forum, to other colleagues and to lay persons,
  2. participate confidently and productively in case discussions;
  3. be informed about current issues in the field of Clinical Neuropsychology.

Assessment

Class Contribution 25%
Oral Presentation 75%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stefan Luebbers/ Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The DPsych program has established a network of placements in a variety of settings within which students can receive appropriate practica training. The practica coordinator and staff at the agency arrange the placements. Student preferences, practica availability and student training needs are taken account of in this process. Which agency and supervisor, number of days for the practica and also the commencement and completion dates are specified. Students are not permitted to negotiate their own practica or change any practica arrangements without first obtaining approval from the University Practica Coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the intermediate practicum, students should have:

  1. developed skill and confidence in applying their theoretical knowledge to the psychological treatment of individuals with relatively uncomplicated emotional and/or behavioural problems and to the assessment of treatment outcomes;
  2. developed an awareness of the intricacy of the therapeutic relationship and of the contribution of their personal qualities to it. Their contribution to service delivery should reflect the principles of best practice and their role within an agency should be equivalent to that of a junior employee.
  3. the ability to demonstrate an understanding of the complexities of the agency's role in service delivery and to service delivery and to independently contribute to the development of strategies for improved service delivery.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

DPSY5299

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rene Stolwyk

Synopsis

This unit provides students with information on the roles of the neuropsychologist within the health setting, the assessment techniques commonly used by neuropsychologists, common neuropsychological syndromes, and the process of rehabilitation for those with neuropsychological impairment.

Outcomes

On completion of the course students should:

  1. have an understanding of the anatomy and physiology of the brain and be able to apply this knowledge to understanding brain behaviour relationships;
  2. have acquired expertise using a hypothesis testing approach for basic neuropsychological assessment and diagnosis and be able to apply this knowledge to a variety of populations.
  3. have a understanding of key neuropsychological syndromes that are regularly encountered in clinical practice
  4. have a greater understanding of how to interpret neuropsychological reports and apply recommendations

Assessment

Class Participation (Hurdle)
Case report Series (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Renee Testa

Synopsis

Students will become familiar with the use of appropriate paediatric neuropsychology assessment tools and will learn the skills required to obtain a comprehensive history from parents, teachers, hospital case notes and other relevant information sources. Assessment and management of the behavioural consequences of neuropsychological deficits will be discussed, together with the provision of parent education and school interventions. The importance of conveying neuropsychological findings and recommendation in a clear and interpretable manner for non-psychology professionals, such as teachers and careers, will also be an area of focus.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Be familiar with the main stages of central nervous system development, and the impact of these stages on normal cognitive functioning;
  2. Be fully aware of the impact that various neurodevelopmental disorders, various neuropsychiatric disorders or several kinds of acquired brain injury might be expected to have on the development of cognitive skills;
  3. Be familiar with theories of recovery function during childhood and adolescence, and appropriate rehabilitation and management strategies;
  4. Be competent in taking a comprehensive case history, in selecting and administering neuropsychological tests suitable for each developmental period, and interpreting the results of these;
  5. Be able to effectively impart their neuropsychological findings and recommendations to non-professionals such as parents and teachers; and
  6. Feel confident working with children, parents, teachers and professional childcare workers.

Assessment

Assessment will be based on three components, each of which will be graded.
Test administration: 35%
Essay/Report: 35%
Written assignment: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

Students will observe oral case presentations given by experienced clinicians and other students and will present their own cases. They will be exposed to a variety of different presentation styles designed to cater for specific audiences and will learn to evaluate case material in an objective and critical manner. They will participate in discussions of clinical issues and recent developments in the field of Clinical Neuropsychology and will be challenged to remain informed about such developments and issues.

Outcomes

The primary aim of this unit is to provide students with an opportunity to observe and practice giving oral presentations of case material. A secondary aim is to provide a forum in which students can discuss other professional issues of interest to them.

On completion of the unit students will:

  1. be proficient in summarising and presenting case material relative to assessment and management in an oral format suitable for a number of different audiences, ranging from hospital to rehabilitative settings, through to the medico-legal forum to other colleagues to lay persons;
  2. participate confidently and productively in case discussions;
  3. be informed about current issues in the field of Clinical neuropsychology;
  4. be familiar with case material drawn from a number of different settings.

Assessment

Class contributions (25%)
Oral presentation (75%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Jennie Ponsford

Synopsis

Students will develop an understanding of strategies used to manage neuropsychologically impaired individuals and will learn how to assess the efficacy of techniques used to rehabilitation and management. Participants will receive information from other allied health professional, rehabilitative approaches used by these professions and discuss how a multidisciplinary approach can be used to provide substantial benefits to the brain-injured individual.

Outcomes

This unit aims to equip students with the conceptual information necessary for them to work effectively in a rehabilitation setting.

On completion of the unit students will:

  1. have acquired a good understanding of current theories and models of recovery of brain function after neurological damage;
  2. be familiar with recent research examining plasticity and reorganisation in the primate brain;
  3. be informed about the current World Health Organisation (WHO) framework for conceptualising disability in terms of impairment of function, activity limitation and participation restriction;
  4. know how clinical neuropsychologists and other allied health professionals assess impairment following neurological damage;
  5. be familiar with current rehabilitative interventions for specific neuropsychological disorders, and the methods commonly used to assess the effectiveness of these interventions;
  6. be well informed about strategies used in the management of those with neurological damage.

Assessment

Take-home exercise (20%)
Case report (80%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stefan Luebbers / Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The DPsych program has established a network of placements in a variety of settings within which students can receive appropriate practica training. The practica coordinator and staff at the agency arrange the placements. Student preferences, practica availability and student training needs are taken account of in this process. Which agency and supervisor, number of days for the practica and also the commencement and completion dates are specified. Students are not permitted to negotiate their own practica or change any practica arrangements without first obtaining approval from the University Practica Coordinator.

Outcomes

By the end of the advanced practicum, students' skills should be extended to:

  1. include management of individuals identified with serious and difficult problems;
  2. independently develop and deliver intervention strategies across a range of areas which reflect an understanding of the current psychological principles and how these can be implemented within service delivery systems.
  3. utilise a full understanding of the complexities of provision of services should be apparent with evidence of appreciation of the wider context in which the client operates and in which the service is provided.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

DPSY5299 and DPSY6199

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology or Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kate Taylor

Synopsis

The Specialised Clinical Practicum provides students with opportunity to directly contribute to service delivery by participating in the planning and provision of clinical psychological assessment and treatment to a range of individuals in a variety of settings. At this stage of their training students will be expected to carry a client load with minimal supervisory support. The location of the specialised practicum will be negotiated with individual students, taking into account their preferences and their need for specialised skill acquisition, but options include forensic settings, child and adolescent mental health services, psychiatry units of private and public hospitals, and specialised health services. The aim of the Specialised Clinical Practicum is for students to gain proficiency in their clinical psychology skills or to consolidate skills in specialist areas.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students will be able to develop and deliver assessment and intervention strategies which reflect an understanding of the current knowledge of best practice in clinical psychology.
On completion of the unit students will be able to provide input at the organisational level.
On completion of the unit students will demonstrate a sound understanding of clinical psychological principles and how these are implemented within service delivery systems.
On completion of the unit students will understand fully the role of a clinical psychologist at an organisational level, and the contributions that a clinical psychologist makes to a service delivery system.
On completion of the unit students will be able to recognise when input from a senior member of staff is required and be able to seek out this input in a timely and professional manner.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)
2 Clinical Reports (50% each)

Contact hours

16 hours per week

Prerequisites

DPSY5299, DPSY6199, DPSY6299


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor James Ogloff

Synopsis

The unit will commence with an examination of the Australian legal system, the players in it and trial procedures in the various courts and tribunals. Using both seminars and practical sessions, rules of expert evidence and procedure will be examined, along with the role of the forensic psychologist in giving advice, performing assessments, writing reports for the court, giving evidence and mediation. Finally, case examples will be used to examine the application of psychological research to forensic issues and the particular ethical issues that arise for forensic psychologists.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should:

  1. be cognisant of the institutions of the Australian legal system and its processes;
  2. have a basic understanding of the relationship between the law and other social institutions;
  3. understand the role and discretion of the various players in the legal system, and in particular, the areas in which the forensic psychologist can contribute;
  4. be aware of the areas of psychological research which have general relevance to the legal system.

Assessment

Class Participation (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael Daffern

Synopsis

The unit will begin with an examination of relevant legislation. Using both seminars and practical sessions, students will then learn how to conduct psychological assessments of children, adolescents and/or families in contested custody and access determinations, and in protective and criminal proceedings. Treatment issues will also be examined.

Assessment

Class Participation (10%)
Report (3000 words) (90%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr J Sabura Allen

Synopsis

This unit covers the application of and development of students' skills in the application of clinical psychology training to mental health and health settings. The field of clinical psychology will be extended to include advanced theoretical frameworks and treatments that include linking psychological and physical aspects of health and illness to specialised areas of clinical psychology, such as serious mental health illness and disorders and in the context of clinical health issues and disorders. The focus will include appropriate assessment skills for various health and mental health contexts.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students will be familiar with the field of clinical psychology as applied to mental health and health settings and have knowledge of the theoretical frameworks relevant to this field. They will have a better understanding of the psychological processes associated with various mental health and related conditions and the way developmental stages affect responses to illness.

Students will be expected to:

  1. have an awareness of clinical psychology related theoretical frameworks;
  2. be familiar with common mental health and health conditions and their impact on recovery;
  3. show awareness of and, be sensitive and responsive to cultural/ethnic differences in response to illness;
  4. become familiar with specialised assessments, such as crisis assessment, and assessments in a consultation-liaison context.

Assessment

Class Participation (Hurdle)
2 Written Assessments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Nicole Rinehart

Synopsis

The focus of this unit is on clinical assessment and intervention/management in the field of child and adolescent clinical psychology. Commensurate with the advanced training context of this unit, the content will include a sequence of topics which extend the topics included in the Introductory unit which all students complete in Year 1 (see Clinical Developmental Psychology DSY5105). This Unit will include complex child and adolescent case presentations by senior clinicians in the field. Students will also be required to present cases which relate to their clinical training in the Doctorate program. In addition some specific topics such as: trauma, critical incidents, the use of projective assessment techniques, and group therapy, are included in the seminar topics. Students are expected to demonstrate their knowledge of these areas in their clinical case discussions and written assessment tasks.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will have:

  1. Demonstrated and advanced knowledge of clinical assessment and management of children and adolescence.
  2. Increased their theoretical knowledge of a variety of assessment and therapeutic approaches for children, adolescents and families;Developed more advanced management / therapy skills in a child and family context.
  3. An ability to write comprehensive clinical assessment reports in the field of child and adolescent clinical psychology.

Assessment

Class Participation (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Adam McKay

Synopsis

The advanced specialist practicum provides students with opportunity to directly contribute to service delivery by participating in the planning and provision of neuropsychological assessment and treatment to a range of persons with relatively complicated presentations. At this stage of their training students will be expected to carry a client load with minimal supervisory support. The location of the specialised practicum will be negotiated with individual students, taking into account their preferences and their need for specialised skill acquisition, but options will include rehabilitation, developmental neuropsychology, neuropsychiatry, neurogeriatrics and forensic neuropsychology.

Outcomes

By the end of the advanced specialist practicum, students' skills and knowledge in a particular area of clinical neuropsychology should be extensive.

On completion of the unit students will:

  1. be able to independently develop and deliver assessment and intervention strategies which reflect an understanding of the current knowledge of best practice;
  2. be able to provide input at the organisational level;
  3. be able to demonstrate a sound understanding of neuropsychological principles and how these can be implemented within service delivery systems;
  4. demonstrate a full understanding of the complexities of provision of services should be apparent with evidence of appreciation of the wider context in which the client operates and in which the service is provided.

Assessment

Placement Contract (Hurdle)
Mid-placement Review (Hurdle)
Student Diary (Hurdle)
Student Case/Logbook (Hurdle)
Supervisor Logbook (Hurdle)
Final Student Assessment Report (Hurdle)
Final Supervisor Assessment Report (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

DPSY5299, DPSY6199, DPSY6299

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Neuropsychology


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael Daffern

Synopsis

The unit will commence with an examination of theories of crime and criminal behaviour, with particular attention being given to psychological research on specific groups of offenders (e.g., murderers, shoplifters, arsonists, pathological gamblers, sexual offenders). Through practical sessions and seminars, students will develop some expertise in providing expert evidence in criminal cases, with such issues as fitness to plead intoxication and intent, diminished responsibility, insanity, automatism, infanticide, psychological syndromes, and mitigating factors receiving particular attention. Finally, theories and techniques of intervention with offenders will be examined.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should:

  1. understand the various theories of crime and criminal behaviour;
  2. be familiar with relevant legal definitions:
  3. be familiar with the specific issues on which the forensic psychologist might be called as an expert in criminal cases;
  4. be familiar with current research on specific groups of offenders;
  5. be familiar with the various sentencing options and their impact;
  6. understand how to amend, where necessary;
  7. be able to apply their skills in clinical assessment and intervention to incarcerated and out-patient offenders

Assessment

Class Participation (Hurdle Requirement)
Written Assignment (100%)

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor James Ogloff

Synopsis

The subject will commence with an overview of the civil arena and examination of the concept of tort liability for negligence. Seminars will focus on personal injury litigation (including such issues as workers' compensation, "compensation neurosis" and "functional overlay", assessing psychological impairment, post traumatic stress disorder, head injury and its sequelae, chronic pain, occupational stress, compensation and recovery). Students will observe the operation of various tribunals and boards and observe psychologists conducting assessments in civil matters (e.g., personal injury, guardianship and administration, testamentary capacity).

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should:

  1. be aware of the breadth of matters falling within the arena of civil law and the common matters on which psychologists are asked for advice;
  2. be cognisant of the factors which may complicate the assessment and treatment of personal injury claimants;
  3. be cognisant of the particular features of victims of crime and other traumatic conditions

Assessment

2 Reports (Hurdle)
Class Participation (Hurdle)

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Nicole Rinehart

Synopsis

The focus of this unit is on clinical intervention in the field of clinical child psychology. These interventions include infant-parent psychotherapy, play therapy, behaviour therapy, cognitive-behavioural therapy, supportive therapy, psychodynamic therapy, family therapy, group therapy, liaison and secondary consultation with kindergartens, schools and other agencies. In addition some specific topics such as: psychopharmacology, cross-cultural issues, childhood chronic illness, trauma and critical incidents are included in the seminar topics, and students are expected to demonstrate their knowledge of these in their clinical case discussions and written assessment tasks.

Outcomes

At the end of the subject students would be expected to have:

  1. Increased their theoretical knowledge of a variety of therapeutic approaches for children, adolescents and families;
  2. Developed their skills in conducting therapy with children and adolescents, and
  3. Gained experience in the planning, running and evaluation of group therapy with children or adolescents.

Assessment

Report (3500-4500 words) (55%)
Evaluation (35%)
Class Participation (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Three hour seminar and 2 hours of private study per week for 12 weeks plus 7.5 hours of observation/practical work per week for 23 weeks.

Prerequisites

Completion of Years 1 and 2 of the DPsych (Clinical) and of DPSY7141

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr M Davies / Prof F Cicuttini

Synopsis

Differences between descriptive & analytical epidemiology, strengths & weaknesses of different epidemiological study design & basic concepts & methods of biostatistics including confidence intervals, p-values & sample size, statistical tests for comparing groups, regression models & survival analysis. Design & evaluation of clinical trials.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students will be able to:

  1. appreciate the strengths and weaknesses of different epidemiological study designs;
  2. demonstrate an understanding of basic concepts and methods of biostatistics;
  3. interpret confidence intervals, p-values and sample size;
  4. use epidemiological and biostatistical principles to critically evaluate epidemiological research.

Assessment

Two assignments (1500 words each): (50%)
Examination (3 hours): (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor J Simpson

Synopsis

Introduction to a variety of health-related data collection sources, calculation of population fertility, mortality & morbidity rates, health service utilisation measures, disease registration & reporting. Use of direct & indirect age standardisation, life expectancy calculations, valid comparisons & health differentials. Development, design & delivery of health questionnaires. Use of focus groups, standard instruments for health surveys, coding, validity, reliability of measures & models of data collection. Efficient sampling strategies, data interpretation & analysis including stratification, clustering & weighting.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. derive and compare population measures of mortality, illness, fertility and survival, using basic demographic tools such as life tables and age standardisation;
  2. access the main sources of routinely collected health data and choose the appropriate one, taking into account their advantages and disadvantages;
  3. design a valid and reliable health survey to collect primary data, design an efficient sampling strategy to obtain random sample of the target population, and choose the most appropriate mode of delivery;
  4. analyse, interpret and present the results of survey data, taking the sampling strategy into account.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gary Glonek

Synopsis

Core topics in algebra and analysis, including polynomial and simultaneous equations, graphs, concepts of limits, continuity and series approximations, including Taylor series expansions. Calculus is used to describe techniques of integration and differentiation of vector expressions. Study of probability, concepts of probability laws, random variables, expectation and distributions. Essential topics in matrix algebra relevant to biostatistical methods. Essential numerical methods, including Newton-Raphson method for solution of simultaneous equations and concepts of numerical integration.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate a broad understanding of the mathematics underlying key statistical methods;
  2. demonstrate an understanding of basic algebra and analysis, and the ability to manually differentiate and integrate algebraic expressions, and perform Taylor series expansions;
  3. understand the basic laws of probability, and the calculus basis of expectation and distribution theory;
  4. perform matrix manipulations manually;
  5. understand the numerical methods behind solutions of equations regularly encountered in methods in biostatistics.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr A Kirby

Synopsis

The unit will introduce the core concepts of statistical inference, beginning with estimators, confidence intervals, type I and II errors and p-values. The emphasis will be on the practical interpretation of these concepts in biostatistical contexts, including an emphasis on the difference between statistical and practical significance. Classical estimation theory, bias and efficiency. Likelihood function, likelihood based methodology, maximum likelihood estimation and inference based on likelihood ration, Wald and score test procedures. Bayesian approach to statistical inference vs classical frequentist approach. Nonparametric procedures, exact inference and resampling based methodology.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will:

  1. have a deeper understanding of fundamental concepts in statistical inference and their practical interpretation and importance in biostatistical contexts;
  2. understand the theoretical basis for frequentists and Bayesian approaches to statistical inference;
  3. be able to develop and apply parametric methods of inference, with particular reference to problems of relevance in biostatistical contexts;
  4. have the theoretical basis to understand the justification for more complex statistical procedures introduced in subsequent units;
  5. have an understanding of basic alternatives to standard likelihood-based methods, and be able to identify situations in which these methods are useful.

Assessment

Written assignments
Practical exercises.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professors A Forbes & J Carlin

Synopsis

This unit explores biostatistical applications of linear models with an emphasis on underlying theoretical and computational issues, practical interpretation and communication of results. By a series of case studies, students explore extensions of methods for group comparisons of means (t-tests and analysis of variance) to adjust for confounding and to assess effect modification/interaction, together with the development of associated inference procedures. Multiple regression strategies and model selection issues will be presented together with model checking and diagnostics. Nonparametric regression techniques, and random effects and variance components models will also be outlined.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. understand the major theoretical and computational issues underlying analyses based on linear models;
  2. develop appropriate regression modelling strategies based on unit matter considerations, including choice of models, control for confounding and appropriate parameterisation;
  3. be proficient at using a statistical software package (eg. Strata) to perform multiple regression and analysis of variance;
  4. understand the construction, use and interpretation of regression modelling diagnostics;
  5. express the results of statistical analyses of linear models in language suitable for communication to medical investigators or publication in biomedical or epidemiological journal articles; and
  6. appreciate the role of modern techniques including nonparametric smoothing and variance components models.

Assessment

Two written assignments
Practical exercise

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor C D'Este

Synopsis

This unit will describe and demonstrate the complexity of data management and statistical computing methods. It will enable students to communicate effectively about the issues in storing and retrieving information, and in assessing the quality and limitations of data repositories. It uses examples from real data sets to give students practical skills in data management, assessment of data quality and handling and linking of large volumes of data.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to demonstrate:

  1. Understanding of different sources and methods of data storage such as unit records, matrix files, longitudinal data, relational databases;
  2. Understanding of relational database concepts and data retrieval methods ;
  3. Proficiency in the handling and analysis of large data sets;
  4. Skills in data manipulation and management using the major statistical software packages;
  5. Skills in linking files through unique and non-unique identifiers;
  6. Understanding of data quality control and data entry methods and confidentiality issues, and experience in applying validation checks to data;
  7. Skills in data cleaning, identification of outliers and data trimming using appropriate statistical methods;
  8. Understanding of processes leading to finalisation of data sets prior to analysis;
  9. Ability to communicate with researchers in data-related issues of design, conduct and analysis of studies

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor A Dobson

Synopsis

Practical applications of statistical methods in clinical and diagnostic settings. Methods for assessment of clinical agreement, statistical properties of diagnostic tests and their interpretation, statistical and ethical issues involved in screening tests & fundamentals of modelling for clinical prediction. In-depth analysis of issues in systematic reviews of medical research studies, including selection and appraisal of studies, levels of evidence, meta-analytic methods for estimating effect sizes using fixed and random effect models, assessing heterogeneity and publication bias.

Outcomes

On completion of this course students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate a broad understanding of statistical methods in evidence-based health care;
  2. determine appropriate statistical methods of particular relevance to evidence-based health care in particular clinical applications; and
  3. correctly employ these statistical methods and have the skills to effectively communicate with clinicians on the application of these methods and interpretation of results.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%).

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor P Ryan

Synopsis

This unit will introduce randomised comparisons as a major tool used in medical research and the basis of providing evidence for improving clinical practice. By developing problems based on clinical questions, the need and value of different experimental designs will be introduced and expanded. Within this context, issues with regards to randomisation, clinical study design and analysis interpretation will be developed. Efficiency issues such as sample size and power will be introduced at appropriate points in the unit.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Identify the benefits of randomisation as a mechanism for reduction and balancing bias, and implement a variety of randomisation schemes.
  2. Demonstrate knowledge of the principles behind the common experimental designs and be able to implement, analyse and interpret data from a variety of randomised designs
  3. Describe the efficiency advantages of crossover designs, and be able to design, analyse and interpret the two-period crossover study.
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of the principles underlying Phase I , II and III and IV studies as well as an appreciation of the scientific basis underlying issues in clinical studies including intention-to-treat, blinding, interim analyses, subgroup analyses and the reporting thereof
  5. Appreciate the importance of sample size in clinical studies, and perform sample size calculations for a variety of trial designs with different outcomes

Assessment

Written Assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off campus students:
Twelve hours per week, consisting of (on average) 4 hours per week for reading core
material, 4 hours per week completing exercises (manual, computer-based, or on-line), 2 hours per week for on-line communication with teaching staff or students via WebCT, and 2 hours per week for assignment preparation. No residential component is required for this subject.

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor A Forbes & Associate Professor J Carlin

Synopsis

This unit will develop statistical models for longitudinal and correlated data in medical research. The concept of hierarchical data structures will be developed, together with simple numerical and analytical demonstrations of the inadequacy of standard statistical methods. Normal-theory model and statistical procedures i.e. mixed linear models are explored using SAS or Stata statistical software packages. Extension to non-normal outcomes emphasising clinical research question. Case studies contrast generalised estimating equations and generalised linear mixed models. Limitations of traditional repeated measures analysis of variance and non-exchangeable models.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Recognise the existence of correlated or hierarchical data structures, and describe the limitations of standard methods in these settings;
  2. develop and analytically describe an appropriate model for longitudinal or correlated data based on unit matter considerations;
  3. be proficient at using a statistical software package (eg Strata or SAS) to properly model and perform computations for longitudinal data analyses, and to correctly interpret results; and
  4. express the results of statistical analyses of longitudinal data in language suitable for communication to medical investigators or publication in biomedical or epidemiological journal articles.

Assessment

Written assignments
Practical exercises.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Prof A. Dobson

Synopsis

This unit will explore biostatistical applications of generalised linear models with an emphasis on underlying theoretical issues, and practical interpretation of the results of fitting these models. Relevant methods for 2 x 2 and 2 x k tables extended into logistic regression for a binary outcome as a special case of generalised linear modelling. Measures of association and modelling techniques for ordinal outcomes. Methods for analysing count data. Techniques for dealing with matched data e.g. from case control studies.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. understand the major theoretical aspects of generalised linear models;
  2. appreciate regression modelling strategies for generalised linear models;
  3. including estimation issues, choice of models, prediction and goodness of fit of a selected model;
  4. be proficient in the analysis of binary outcome data, either form a standard study design or from a matched study design;
  5. be capable of analysing ordered and unordered categorical outcomes using simple measures of association and complex regression models;
  6. be capable of analysing count data whether it satisfies standard distributional assumptions or whether it is over dispersed.

Assessment

Written assignments
Practical exercises

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor G. Heller

Synopsis

Biostatistical applications of survival analysis with emphasis on underlying theoretical and computational issues, practical interpretation and communication of results. Case studies, students will explore the various methods for handling survival data. Kaplan-Meier curve definition and its extension, survival prospects using logrank test and confidence intervals for relative risks, graphical displays and assessing underlying assumptions. Mantel-Haenszel method's connection to survival analysis. Cox proportional hazards model for handling continuous covariates. Various extensions of this model, including time-dependent covariates, multiple outcomes and censored linear regression model.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. understand the major theoretical and computational issues underlying survival analysis;
  2. develop appropriate survival analysis strategies based on unit matter considerations, including choice of models, control for confounding and appropriate parameterisation;
  3. be proficient at using at least two different statistical software packages (eg Strata, Excel) to perform survival analysis;
  4. Understand the construction, use and interpretation of appropriate graphs for showing results and checking statistical assumptions;
  5. express the results of statistical analyses of censored data in language suitable for
    1. communication to medical investigators and
    2. publication in biomedical or epidemiological journals; and
  6. appreciate the role of newer techniques including parametric non-modelling, floating odds ratios and competing risks.

Assessment

Written assignments 100%.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor A. Forbes

Synopsis

Students will be exposed to real-life biostatistical problems in an academic health research environment, industry or government under supervision by an experienced biostatistician with a staff or honorary appointment at Monash University. They will be allocated, or may select, 1 or more research projects, and required to make regular contact with the associated health research personnel together with the supervisor. Under the guidance of the supervisor, the student will assume responsibility for statistical aspects of the relevant research project(s), and perform an analysis of appropriate complexity for the project then present and interpret the results in a written and oral form.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. appreciate the challenges facing a biostatistician in professional practice;
  2. demonstrate strategies for elicitation of pertinent research questions and associated biostatistical issues from a health or medical research project;
  3. collaborate with a medical researcher in devising a strategy for statistical analysis of the research data;
  4. perform data integrity checks and an appropriate statistical analysis;
  5. present the results and their interpretation in a written report suitable for presentation to a clinical research journal.

Assessment

Written report 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

20 hours per week

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Professor Graham Wood

Synopsis

The unit begins with a brief review of elementary molecular biology: DNA, RNA, the central dogma, meiosis, mitosis and genes. Some fundamental mathematical tools for statistical analysis are also reviewed. The course then covers sequence alignment, database searching, Mendelian genetics and techniques for discovering connections between genes and disease: association, linkage and variance components studies.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit the student should be able to:

  1. Explain the core dogma of molecular biology and the central ideas of population genetics.
  2. Given a problem which requires genome or proteome data for its solution, access appropriate web based sources for data, and download the data in suitable format.
  3. Understand and apply core bioinformatics techniques for the analysis of DNA and protein sequence data, such as global sequence alignment, CLAST, Hidden Markov Models, evolutionary models and phylogenetic tree fitting.
  4. Process large quantities of data (such as the expression profiles of thousands of genes resulting form microarray experiments) using R, and communicate results in language suitable for presentation to both a bioinformatics journal and a lay audience.

Assessment

The assessment for this subject will involve four written assignments, each worth 15% plus a comprehensive final assignment worth 40%. The assignments will each involve the application of theory to problems specific to the various analytical tasks in bioinformatics.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course version {3420, 3421, 3422}

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Lyle Gurrin

Synopsis

This unit provides a thorough introduction to the concepts and methods of modern Bayesian statistical methods with particular emphasis on practical applications in biostatistics. Comparison of Bayesian concepts involving prior distributions with classical approaches to statistical analysis, particularly likelihood based methods. Applications to fitting hierarchical models to complex data structures via simulation from posterior distributions using Markov chain Monte Carlo techniques (MCMC) with the WinBUGS software package.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Explain the logic of Bayesian statistical inference i.e. the use of full probability models to quantify uncertainty in statistical conclusions.
  2. Develop and analytically describe simple one-parameter models with conjugate prior distributions and standard models containing two or more parameters including specifics for the normal location-scale model.
  3. Appreciate the role prior distributions and have a thorough understanding of the connection between Bayesian methods and standard 'classical' approaches to statistics, especially those based on likelihood methods.
  4. Recognise situations where a complex biostatistical data structure can be expressed as a Bayesian hierarchical model, and specify the technical details of such a model.
  5. Explain and use the most common computational techniques for use in Bayesian analysis, especially the use of simulation from posterior distributions based on Markov Chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) methods, with emphasis on the practical implementation of such techniques in the WinBUGS package.
  6. Perform practical Bayesian analysis relating to health research problems, and effectively communicate the results.

Assessment

Written assignments (80%)
Practical exercises (20%).

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course version {3420, 3421, 3422}

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof R Wolfe

Synopsis

This unit involves the study of basic probability and calculus-based methods of underpinning probability distributions and parameter estimation.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the meaning and laws of probability;
  2. Recognise common probability distributions and their properties;
  3. Apply calculus-based tools to derive key features of a probability distribution, such as mean and variance;
  4. Manipulate multivariate probability distributions to obtain marginal and conditional distributions;
  5. Obtain mean, variance and the probability distribution of transformations of random variables;
  6. Understand properties of parameter estimators and the usefulness of large sample approximations in statistics;
  7. Appreciate the role of simulation in demonstrating and explaining statistical concepts.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Andrew Forbes

Synopsis

This unit will involve students being exposed to a real-life biostatistical problem arising in an academic health research environment or industry. They will be supervised by an experienced biostatistician with a staff or honorary appointment at Monash University. Students will be allocated, or may select, one research project to be involved in, and will be required to make regular contact with the associated health research personnel together with the supervisor. The student will perform an analysis of appropriate complexity for the project and present and interpret the results in a written form to the health researcher and supervisor.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. appreciate the challenges facing a biostatistician in professional practice;
  2. demonstrate strategies for elicitation of pertinent research questions and associated biostatistical issues from a health or medical research project;
  3. collaborate with a medical researcher in devising a strategy for statistical analysis of the research data;
  4. perform data integrity checks and an appropriate statistical analysis;
  5. present the results and their interpretation in a written report suitable for presentation to a clinical research journal.

Assessment

Written report 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor V Gebski

Synopsis

This unit introduces advanced methods used in clinical research & clinical trials in particular. Group sequential methods are introduced as a mechanism for allowing investigators to perform interim analyses while the data is accumulating without compromising the scientific & statistical validly of the study. Regulatory guidelines for conduct & reporting of clinical trials are presented & discussed in detail. More advanced designs than the simple parallel-group randomized trial to assess superiority are presented, namely crossover, equivalence & non-inferiority trials. Finally an introduction to problems of defining & using surrogate endpoints as substitutes for direct clinical outcomes will be provided, including definitions, statistical properties & examples.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Formulate an interim analysis plan for randomised trial and perform the corresponding specialized analyses;
  2. Demonstrate knowledge of the regulatory issues and principles underlying the conduct of any clinical trial;
  3. Understand and explain the basis for cross-over trials, their advantages and their pitfalls together with analysis methodology for such trials;
  4. Understand and apply the principles underpinning equivalence and non-inferiority trials
  5. Appreciate issue associated with defining and using valid surrogate end points as alternatives to primary clinical end points and apply these in practical settings.

Assessment

Four written assignments (worth 25%, 25%, 10%, 40% respectively).

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

This unit is only available to students enrolled in the Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma or Masters of Biostatistics.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Liz Bishop

Synopsis

Develops the critical ability to evaluate the human rights considerations pertinent to research in situation in which the autonomy of potential participants is gravely diminished, for example: refugee populations, people living in poverty, conditions of civil rights violations, war or internal conflicts. How should research with vulnerable populations be undertaken, if at all?

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate clear understanding of the characteristics that make a research population particularly vulnerable;
  2. Demonstrate some understanding of the role of research in the context of vulnerable populations;
  3. Show familiarity with innovative research methods used to study sensitive issues in vulnerable populations;
  4. Demonstrate a degree of critical ability in the evaluation of the ethical and human rights considerations pertinent to research in vulnerable populations.

Assessment

Written assignments (60%)
Contributions to online discussion (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Weekly contribution to online discussion forum and reading as required.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Liz Bishop

Synopsis

Builds awareness of key bioethical issues in research and in international collaborative health research. The history of rules guiding research and essential components of ethical review process. Geopolitical purposes, 10/90 disequilibrium, relationship between research parties including host and sponsor countries, multilateral organisations and pharmaceutical companies, trial design and community / potential participants, informed consent, placebo controlled trials, justice issues including benefit access and capacity building. Different international and national guidelines reviewed.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the key ethical issues in research;
  2. show familiarity with the historical development of ethical review of medical research in its geopolitical context;
  3. show familiarity with current international and national guidelines for medical research;
  4. identify the substantive issues and controversies that arise when medical research sponsored by an industrialised country is conducted in a developing country;
  5. demonstrate an understanding of the complexities that arise when research is conducted in resource poor settings or in settings where civil rights are compromised and in environments without functioning ethical review mechanisms;
  6. demonstrate some insights into why so little of the research conducted in resource poor settings is relevant to the needs of those populations and why little benefit accrues to those populations subsequent to research;

and

  1. formulate some recommendations concerning potential responses to the issues raised during the unit.

Assessment

Written assignments (60%)
contribution to online discussion forum (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Reading as required and contribution to weekly online discussion forum

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr L Bishop

Synopsis

Introductory approach to international and domestic law to research. Examination of legal approach to substantive issues such as consent, confidentiality, discrimination, contract, intellectual property and human rights as well as different international codes, guidelines and standards.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the operation of the legal system and the sources of law, both national and international;
  2. show familiarity with the roles and powers of the various legal institutions that have a role in regulating the legal context, from courts through to international organizations that set standards;
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the key areas of law which affect research, including consent, confidentiality, discrimination, contract, intellectual property and human rights within national legal systems;
  4. demonstrate an understanding of the range of international codes and guidelines that affect research, and harmonization of the standards;
  5. identify the legal issues that arise in relation to proposals for research involving humans;
  6. distinguish legal from ethical issues and explain the respective roles of both in relation to research or humans;

and

  1. analyse a research project in terms of the legal and ethical issues that affect it.

Assessment

Written assignments (60%)
Contribution to online discussion forum (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Weekly reading as required and contribution to online discussion forum

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Liz Bishop

Synopsis

Assignment to a human research ethics committee. Observation of aspects of their functioning, including understanding the different perspectives of the various members of the committee, and the administrative processes involved in running such a committee.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the composition of a human research ethics committee, and the roles of each of the different members;
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the practical processes involved in the day-to-day running of a human research ethics committee;

and

  1. critically evaluate the ethical considerations of typical quantitative and qualitative research proposals from the perspective of the different members of a human research ethics committee.

Assessment

Written assignments (60%)
Contribution to online discussion forum (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Weekly reading as required and contribution to online discussion forum.

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mairead Dolan

Synopsis

This unit aims to equip professionals with a broad-based understanding of basic legal and criminological principles. The unit then builds on this knowledge by examining key areas involving the interaction between mental health and the law, and examining the role of the 'expert witness'.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Explain the role of the law and the criminal justice system in society;
  2. Describe in broad terms the assumptions and limitations of major criminological theories (biological, sociological and psychological);
  3. Summarize the basic processes involved in the operation of the criminal justice system;
  4. Describe the legal and ethical constraints in working at the interface between mental health and the law;
  5. Discuss the legal and ethical constraints in working at the interface between mental health and the law;
  6. Describe the roles and functions of an expert witness.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/Alternative Assessment - 10%
Applied Learning Exercise - 30%
Essay - 60%
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

TBA

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Andrew Carroll

Synopsis

Designed to provide students with an understanding of the role of mental health in criminal offending this unit provides an overview of the relevant research (drawn from psychological, psychiatric, criminological and sociological studies), key findings and the practical implications of these findings. Different types of mental disorders (psychotic, mood, personality, substance use) associated with offending are considered and explanatory models which incorporate the role of symptoms, cognitions, biological and sociological factors are discussed.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Critically evaluate the evidence for an association between mental disorder and criminal offending;
  2. Outline various possible explanations for the association between mental disorder and criminal offending;
  3. Explain the concepts of 'psychopathy', 'antisocial personality disorder', 'sever personality disorder', and their relevance to offending and rehabilitation;
  4. Explain the evidence based principles for effective rehabilitation of offenders;
  5. Describe the role of addictions including substance abuse and pathological gambling as risk factors for offending; and
  6. Outline methods for assessment and treatment of addictions.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/Alternative Assessment - 10%
Applied Learning Exercise - 30%
Essay - 60%
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Clare McInerney

Synopsis

This unit is designed to assist professionals working within both Correctional Services and Mental Health Services to develop a better understanding of the causes of conflict between the two systems, the issues that underpin such conflict and to develop ways of more effectively working at the interface of these two systems. The unit is also designed to equip professionals with a deeper understanding of the role of mental health clinicians and the clinical challenges associated with working within the correctional system.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, the student will be expected to be able to:

  1. Discuss various theories relating to the purpose and role of imprisonment;
  2. Identify challenges associated with the assessment and management of mental health issues in correctional settings;
  3. Summarise the specific mental health needs of minority populations in correctional settings;
  4. Describe appropriate systemic and clinical responses to the challenge of self harming behaviours in custody.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/Alternative Assessment - 10%
Applied Learning Exercise - 30%
Essay - 60%
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mairead Dolan

Synopsis

This unit has been designed to create a developmental context for understanding a range of issues which characterise at risk behaviour in youth. Students will gain a broader understanding of these behaviours, as seen from a range of perspectives: legal, epidemiological, psychological, sociological and psychiatric. The unit will be of interest to those currently working with at risk youth as well as providing insights into the aetiology of a range of maladaptive behaviours in adult life.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit the student will:

  1. Discuss the interface between children and the legal system;
  2. Outline the basic principles of assessment and management of risk in childhood and adolescence;
  3. Describe critically the evidence relating to long term consequence of adverse experiences in childhood and adolescence;
  4. Outline a developmentally appropriate decision making process.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/Alternative Assessment - 10%
Structured Learning Task - 30%
Essay - 60%
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Troy McEwan

Synopsis

The unit covers the aetiology and principles of management of commonly occurring antisocial 'problem behaviours' : violence, stalking, uttering threats, sexual offending, fire-setting, and abnormal complaining. Based on psychological and criminological theory of such behaviours a framework is presented, then applied to each specific behaviour. The role of mental disorder in the genesis of such behaviours is considered, in addition to the multiple psychological and social factors involved. Students will gain a theoretical understanding and develop a pragmatic model for working with a broad range of perpetrators in an ethical and evidence-based fashion.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Apply a structured evidence-based approach to understanding common problematic antisocial behaviours, which incorporates both individually-based and situationally based variables;
  2. Describe the epidemiology, social impacts, common perpetrator characteristics and high-risk situational contexts for the commission of common problem behaviours (stalking, issuing threats, abnormal complaining, fire-setting, sexual offending, violence);
  3. Outline the key principles involved in managing such behaviours, including cognitive, behavioural, psychiatric and legal approaches;
  4. Describe the role of mental disorders in the aetiology of common problem behaviours; and
  5. Explain the broader societal factors involved in the commission of such behaviours and, conversely, the impact of such behaviours on public safety and well-being.

Assessment

Workshop presentation/Alternative Assessment - 10%
Applied Learning Exercise - 30%
Essay - 60%
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Andrew Carroll

Synopsis

This unit provides students with a conceptual framework for the assessment and management of risk. Key theoretical and systematic principles are emphasized, so that the knowledge obtained will be applicable to a broad range of professional backgrounds. This unit will familiarize students with the key theoretical and basic statistical concepts involved in assessing and managing risk, with special reference to human services and criminal justice systems. It will encourage an ethical, effective systemic approach to risk management and quality assurance. Common concerns such as medico-legal liability, defensible decision making documentation and information sharing will be covered.
Special emphasis will be given to assessment and management of three areas of common concern: the risk of aggression; the risk of suicide; and the risk of client disengagement from services.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Explain key theoretical and basic statistical concepts involved in risk assessment and outcome monitoring;
  2. Apply a systemic approach to the assessment and management of risk in their daily practice;
  3. Describe contemporary approaches to systemic 'error' management, including the basics of 'root cause analysis';
  4. Apply knowledge derived from coronial and other post-incident enquiries to their own professional practice;
  5. Describe the potential sources of human error and how these may be minimized to optimise outcomes;
  6. Explain the principles behind legal liability for negligence and hence minimize the risk of litigation in their own practice;
  7. Describe contemporary evidence-based risk management approaches to: aggression, suicide, client disengagement (noncompliance).

Assessment

Workshop presentation/Alternative Assessment - 10%
Applied Learning Exercise - 30%
Essay - 60%
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Tessa Maguire

Synopsis

This unit will explore the social, political, legal, ethical and practice context of care for mentally disordered offenders. Clinical issues in forensic psychiatry and the needs of forensic mental health patients will be discussed. The knowledge and skills required by practitioners to assess and care for mentally disordered offenders will be developed.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Identify the factors (including historic, social, legal, medical, ethical) that shape forensic mental health care;
  2. Identify the specialist issues (including knowledge, skills, policy, practice, contextual) in forensic psychiatry;
  3. Demonstrate the knowledge and skills required by forensic mental health practitioners in the assessment and care of mentally disordered offenders.

Assessment

Workshop/Alternative Assessment 10%
one case study (1500 words) 15%
one assignment (1500 words) 15%+ Essay (3500 - 4000 words) 60%
All assessments must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Two day on-campus workshop.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Ranson

Synopsis

The law of evidence is a branch of adjectival law. It consists of legal rules, procedural rules and administrative arrangements whereby courts and tribunals within the justice system receive and evaluate evidence.

To perform satisfactorily in this field a forensic medical practitioner's communication skills must be of a high order and they need to understand the legal principles that govern the admissibility of their evidence.

This unit will enable students to gain practical skills in the delivery of medical evidence in courts and tribunals, in the preparation of medico legal reports to be used as items of evidence and in the techniques of advocacy that can modify the way in which a medical practitioner's evidence is received by courts.

Tutorials and presentations will be used to lay the foundations for some of the basic academic objectives of the course. Workshops will be used to establish witness skills and oral communication techniques and a moot court will be used to develop practical skills in presenting evidence and developing strategies to deal with the medico legal and advocacy issues that arise during the examination and cross-examination of witnesses including expert witnesses.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student is expected to:

  1. display an understanding of decision making processes in legal practice;
  2. demonstrate knowledge of the general principles of the laws of evidence;
  3. comprehend the special rules regarding opinion evidence;
  4. understand the role of the expert witness;
  5. be conversant with the rules governing the reception of evidence to the courts;
  6. demonstrate competency in preparing medico-legal reports;
  7. have developed the skills required to present evidence in court;
  8. have acquired the techniques necessary for managing examination-in-chief, cross examination and re-examination.

Assessment

Assignments/Essays (50%)
Casebook Workbook (25%)
Skills Evaluation (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor D Wells

Synopsis

The unit focuses on the issues surrounding the interpretation of injuries. Areas include the pathophysiology of injuries with particular reference to the anatomical, physiological and pathological principles; injury classification; documentation including forensic photography; injury patterns and circumstances of causation. Students will be expected to participate with clinical and post mortem cases.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be expected to:

  1. display an understanding of the pathophysiology of injuries;
  2. show familiarity with the factors limiting accurate injury interpretation;
  3. interpret the forces producing injuries;
  4. apply the principles of forensic photography;
  5. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the classification of injuries;
  6. be able to accurately document injuries;
  7. analyse and interpret mechanisms and circumstances by which the injuries were sustained.

Assessment

Assignments / Essays (20%)
Case Studies (30%)
Casebook workbook (30%)
Skills Evaluation (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Emeritus Professor L Waller

Synopsis

The unit aims to help students become familiar with the tools and vocabulary of ethical discourse in medicine. A framework for this discourse is built, based on the four basic principles of autonomy, beneficence, non-maleficence and justice. The elements which go to make up the Australian Legal System are covered as well as those particular areas of law relating to forensic medical practice, i.e. consent, confidentiality and disclosure, issues at both the beginning and end of life.

Outcomes

The aims of this unit are:

  1. to develop the student's awareness and understanding of the ideas and issues in medical ethics so that in practice, the interests of their patients/clients are safeguarded;
  2. to develop the student's knowledge and understanding of relevant areas of the law so that in practice their contribution to the justice system is optimal.

Assessment

Assignments / Essays (50%)
Presentations (25%)
Casebook Workbook (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Katherine Davey

Synopsis

Practitioners need to be familiar with the scope and limitations of the various branches of forensic science to know when and how they may assist in particular cases. Topics to be covered include the principles of forensic science, forensic biology, forensic botany, crime scene examination, specimen collections, forensic anthropology, forensic odontology and forensic entomology.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student is expected to:

  1. show familiarity with the principles of forensic science generally and its scope;
  2. comprehend the scope and limitations of forensic science generally and its subsections in particular;
  3. understand the tests and analyses used in braches of forensic science to assist in the proper application of their results in particular cases;
  4. know what specimens would be applicable for forensic science analysis in particular cases;
  5. demonstrate competence in the collection storage and security of forensic specimens;
  6. evaluate results of forensic scientific analysis meaningfully.

Assessment

Assignments / Essays (25%)
Case Studies (15%)
Presentations (10%)
Casebook Workbook (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Wells

Synopsis

Paediatric forensic medicine encompasses the medico-legal issues arising from the provision of a medical service to children. The unit will largely focus on the medical assessment of cases of suspected child sexual abuse.

The aim of this unit is to develop student's skills in the evaluation and management of children and adolescents suspected of being sexually abused. Integral to both evaluation and management will be a knowledge of the relevant legislation, policing and protective agencies, injury patterns, specialised investigative techniques and treatment.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be expected to:

  1. Display a detailed understanding of the roles of health practitioners in assessing cases of suspected child sexual abuse.
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of sexual development and behaviour in children.
  3. Demonstrate an awareness of the ethical and legal issues relevant to cases of suspected child sexual abuse.
  4. Describe normal genital anatomy and physiology, and be able to interpret pathological conditions.
  5. Apply medical and forensic principles to the evaluation of cases of suspected child sexual abuse.
  6. Display a broad comprehension of the consequences, treatment and prevention of child sexual abuse.
  7. Recognise the role of the other disciplines involved in investigations; protective workers, police, lawyers.
  8. Recognise the medical and legal implications of a sexually transmitted infection in a child.

Assessment

Assignment 1 - Workbook questions 2,3,4, and 9: 15%
Assignment 2 - Case critique: 20%
Assignment 3 - Workbook questions 12, 13, 14, 15: 20%
Face to face teaching & case presentation: 15%
Essay: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

12 hours of study per week over the semester. This will include contact time (25 hours), private study (text and readings), assessment tasks (case studies, assignments), and involvement in case work, plus a compulsory 2 day workshop

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus (distance education) with a two-three day attendance block during the semester.

Prerequisites

A registered medical practitioner who is involved in assessing (or may be required to assess) children/adolescents when child/adolescent sexual abuse is suspected.

Prohibitions

FOR2006 Paediatric Forensic Medicine

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Wells

Synopsis

Paediatric forensic medicine encompasses the medico-legal issues arising from the provision of a medical service to children. The unit will largely focus on developing practitioners' skills required for the medical assessment of cases of suspected non-accidental injury in children.
Such assessments require knowledge of the relevant legislation, injury patterns, specialised investigative techniques, documentation and interpretation. Teaching will focus on trauma and forensic principles, childhood development, injury patterns (both accidental and non-accidental), medical conditions that may mimic injurious events presentation of findings and opinions to the courts.

Outcomes

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the principles of injury assessment;
  2. Develop the skills required for accurate documentation - notes, diagrams and photography;
  3. Have a comprehensive knowledge of common injury patterns at the different stages of a child's development;
  4. Demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of non-accidental injury as it applies to bones, intra-abdominal and intra-thoracic trauma;
  5. Discuss features of injuries of childhood both accidental and non-accidental;
  6. Understand the process of assessing children when there are concerns of neglect

Assessment

Assignment 1 - Questions: 20%
Assignment 2 - Case critique: 20%
Face to face teaching & case presentation: 10%
Essay: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

12 hours of study per week over the Semester. This will include contact time (25 hours), private study (text and readings), assessment tasks (case studies, assignments), and involvement in case work, plus a compulsory 2 day workshop.

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus (distance education) with a two-three day attendance block during the semester.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

A registered medical practitioner who is involved in assessing (or may be required to assess) children where there are concerns of non-accidental injury.

Co-requisites

Nil

Prohibitions

FOR2006 (Paediatric Forensic Medicine).

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anthony Hill

Synopsis

Forensic Odontology encompasses the intersection between dentistry and the law. Practitioners in this field require a solid understanding of all aspects of dental practice as it relates to medico-legal investigation.
The aim of this unit is to provide students with knowledge and practical skills that will enable them to apply their dental knowledge to questions of legal/coronial import, especially in the field of human identification.
Forensic Odontology practitioners require expert knowledge in areas including; injury interpretation, evidence interpretation, dental anthropology, forensic anthropology, imaging technology, mortuary practice, and medico-legal report writing.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the core elements of Forensic Odontology which underlie Forensic Odontological investigation;
  2. To introduce students to the fundamentals of mortuary practice and protocol, including ethical treatment of the deceased, dental examination and imaging procedures.
  3. To develop a working understanding of human skeletal and dental development and the changes which occur with increasing age, including an introduction to forensic age estimation methods.
  4. To acquire an understanding of the structure of the human skeleton, and to develop the ability to distinguish human from non-human skeletal and dental elements,
  5. To introduce students to Disaster Victim identification, including mass grave exhumation techniques and an awareness of the role of the Forensic Odontologist in war crimes investigations;
  6. To develop skills in the application of CT technology and software systems in post-mortem examinations.
  7. To develop an understanding of the principles of medico-legal report writing as applied to the discipline of forensic odontology.

Assessment

Assignment -25%
Case report 25%
Oral presentation - 25%
Case book - 25%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

2 day workshop

Prerequisites

+ Graduate with the degree of Bachelor of Medicine/Surgery or Bachelor of Dentistry in an Australian University; or
+ Have qualifications which, in the opinion of the Faculty Board, are equivalent to or are a satisfactory substitute for the qualifications described above; and
+ Have at least 3 years experience in clinical or dental practice.
+ Provide proof of Medical or Dental Board registration


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Bassed

Synopsis

The primary function of Forensic Odontology is to identify unknown deceased individuals who cannot be visually recognized by close family members. Forensic Odontology practitioners require expert knowledge in areas including; post-mortem examination technique, ante-mortem record interpretation and transposition, specialized post-mortem imaging methods, and cranio-facial superimposition techniques.
The aim of this unit is to provide students with a thorough understanding of the standard methods involved in post-mortem dental examination techniques leading to the identification of unknown deceased individuals. The unit is designed to provide practicing dentists with the required knowledge and skills so that they will be able to conduct a standard forensic identification case from the beginning to its completion.


Outcomes

After successfully completing this unit a student will be expected to have acquired the knowledge and skills required to:

  • Demonstrate a thorough knowledge of relevant mortuary protocol and practice - including OH&S issues.
  • Demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of dental post-mortem examination techniques, including standard and advanced imaging modalities.
  • Discuss the techniques involved in ante-mortem record collection and interpretation methods specifically related to dental issues.
  • Comprehend the Interpol guidelines and understand the complex issues involved in reconciliation of ante-mortem and post-mortem data using the Interpol standard forms.
  • Demonstrate familiarity with the terminology used when describing and reporting on injuries to the teeth, cranio-facial skeleton, and soft tissues of the face
  • Comprehend and articulate an understanding of the role of other mortuary based identification methods, such as molecular biology, fingerprints, the weight given to circumstantial evidence, and cranio-facial superimposition.

Assessment

Assignment 20%
Case Studies 30%
Oral Presentation 20%
Case Book 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

It is expected that students will need to undertake approximately 12 hours of study per week over the semester. This will include contact time, private study, assessment tasks (case studies, assignments) and involvement in case work. Students are required to attend all workshops offered at the Department of Forensic Medicine during the semester.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

FOR4007 - Elements of Forensic Odontology
FOR4001 - Medical Evidence
FOR4002 - Injury Interpretation
FOR4003 - Ethics, Medicine and the Law


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Bassed

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide students with a thorough understanding of all aspects of forensic odontology relating to the treatment of living people in a legal setting. The unit is designed for practicing dentists and medical practitioners who wish to gain a greater understanding of how to deal with the examination and reporting of injuries caused by the teeth, and injuries inflicted to the oro-facial complex. The unit will also cover dental age estimation techniques, identification of unknown living individuals and issues surrounding dental malpractice and fraud investigations.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be expected to have acquired the knowledge and skills required to:

  • Demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of the anatomy of the facial skeleton, the bio-mechanics of bone and of facial trauma.
  • Practice bite mark interpretation and analysis.
  • Evaluate dental age estimation methods as applied to living individuals.
  • Recognise and evaluate the dental manifestations of child abuse.
  • Illustrate the limitations inherent in identification of individuals from CCTV images.
  • Discuss the regulations of the Australian Dental Board as they relate to malpractice and fraud investigation.
  • Construct a dento-legal report and demonstrate knowledge of the ramifications involved in presentation of clinical forensic odontology evidence before the courts.

Assessment

ASSIGNMENT 20%
CASE STUDIES 30%
ORAL PRESENTATION 20%
CASE BOOK 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

It is expected that students will need to undertake approximately 12 hours of study per week over the semester. This will include contact time, private study, assessment tasks (case studies, assignments) and involvement in case work. Students are required to attend all workshops offered at the Department of Forensic Medicine during the semester.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

FOR4001 - Medical Evidence
FOR4002 - Injury Interpretation
FOR4003 - Ethics, Medicine and the Law


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anthony Hill

Synopsis

Forensic Odontology encompasses the intersection between dentistry and the law. Practitioners in this field require a solid understanding of all aspects of dental practice as it relates to medico-legal investigation
The aim of this unit is to provide students with a sound theoretical and practical knowledge of all Phases of the Disaster Victim Identification (DVI) process and the role the forensic odontologist plays in each Phase. It will provide the student with the capability of operating in both national and international response teams.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students will be expected to have acquired the knowledge and skills required to:

  • Describe the core elements of Disaster Victim Identification principles and methods which underlie forensic odontology investigations following natural and man-made mass fatality incidents.
  • Discuss the role the forensic odontologist plays in each Phase of a DVI operation.
  • Describe and operate the common computer based systems used during a DVI operation.
  • Appraise the International protocols, standards, charting methods and the Interpol forms that are used during a DVI incident.
  • Recognise the various cultural, religious and legal frameworks in which international DVI incidents may occur.
  • Demonstrate the value of CT technology as it is employed in DVI scenarios.
  • Review the principals involved in medico-legal report writing as applied to DVI incidents.

Assessment

Case Study 40%
Oral Presentation 25%
Short Answer Assignments 35%

Chief examiner(s)

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

FOR4007 - Elements of Forensic Odontology
FOR4001 - Medical Evidence
FOR4002 - Injury Interpretation
FOR4003 - Ethics, Medicine and the Law


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vanita Parekh

Synopsis

Sexual assault is addressed in this unit as it pertains to a doctor working in a therapeutic and forensic role with victims. Theoretical and historical perspectives are considered in order to provide a thorough grounding for practical discussions on current legislation and police investigation. The medical role will be examined in detail. Forensic responsibilities are dealt with including specimen collection, laboratory liaison and injury interpretation. The unit will address the medico-legal report and the role of the expert witness in court appearances.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit the student will be expected to:

  1. Provide a comprehensive medical service for a victim of sexual assault.
  2. Demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of the forensic responsibilities in sexual assault cases.
  3. Display ability to collect forensic evidence based on theory.
  4. Understand an overview of the laboratory treatment of forensic evidence.
  5. Write a medico-legal report and appear in court under subpoena to assist the court.
  6. Comprehend historical, theorectical and cultural aspects of sexual assault.
  7. Discuss epidemiology and the broad range of circumstances in which sexual assault occurs.

Assessment

Assignments / Essays (35%)
Case Studies (25%)
Casebook Workbook (35%)
Skills Evaluation (5%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr M Odell

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to present the medical issues applicable to road trauma. The topics covered include the law and policing practices, driving skills and the impact of alcohol, other drugs and medical conditions on these skills, the effects of ageing on fitness to drive, interpretation of traffic injuries, the principles of traffic engineering and road trauma epidemiology.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be expected to:

  1. display an understanding of the history of road trauma and the counter measures introduced to combat the road toll;
  2. show familiarity with road safety legislation;
  3. evaluate policing practices impacting on road safety;
  4. demonstrate an understanding of the effects of a range of medical conditions upon driving skills with particular reference to licensing;
  5. evaluate the effects of alcohol and other drugs upon driving skills;
  6. display a comprehension of the procedures and practice of investigating vehicle collisions;
  7. interpret common injury patterns resulting from road trauma;
  8. evaluate blood drug levels with regard to the effects of drugs on driving skills;
  9. display an understanding of drug toxicology.

Assessment

Assignments / Essays (80%)
Presentations (10%)
Casebook Workbook (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Prof O Drummer

Synopsis

Teaching in this unit aims to develop students' familiarity with the concepts of clinical and post-mortem toxicology. The unit also focuses on the basic pharmacokinetic and pharmacological properties of commonly abused drugs found in forensic medical cases. Emphasis will be on behavioural issues of these drugs and how they relate to forensic practice. Such issues include the effects on cognitive and psychomotor skills in drivers and in the workplace and other adverse reactions attributed to drug misuse.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be expected to:

  1. demonstrate a familiarity of the technical terms associated with analytical toxicology;
  2. demonstrate a broad understanding of the range of techniques used in forensic toxicology;
  3. demonstrate an awareness of the type of drugs seen in forensic medical cases;
  4. comprehend the main pharmacological effects of alcohol, amphetamines, cocaine, benzodiazepines, and cannabis with the emphasis on their effects on behaviours, psychomotor control and cognition;
  5. describe and recognise the relevant behavioural effects of common illicit drug combinations and common adverse illicit drug reactions; and
  6. apply this knowledge to forensic cases for the purpose of preparation and presentation to courts..

Assessment

Case study 1: 20%
Case study 2: 30%
Presentation: 25%
Workbook: 25%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Michael Levy

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to present and discuss the current issues arising from the provision of a medical service in a custodial setting. The topics covered provide insights into the health impacts of penal institutions and the powers and responsibilities of custodians; ethical issues; fitness for interview; fitness for detention; deaths in custody; interpersonal violence and the assessment and management of some frequently presenting medical problems (specifically mental illness and addiction).

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student is expected to:

  1. understand the responsibilities and powers of custodians;
  2. display a knowledge of custodial and penal institutions;
  3. show familiarity with the procedures for investigating complaints by prisoners and the issues surrounding deaths in custody;
  4. comprehend the ethical issues of the doctor/patient relationship in a custodial setting;
  5. conduct an assessment of an individual's fitness to be interviewed or detained in custody;
  6. recognise and manage a range of medical problems presenting in the custodial setting.

Assessment

Assignments / Essays (30%)
Case Studies (40%)
Presentations (10%)
Casebook Workbook (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Compulsory 2 day workshop


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Vanita Parekh

Synopsis

Developing and implementing adult sexual assault services must be founded upon evidence based clinical practice and an understanding of a variety of perspectives. Advanced Issues in Sexual Violence will provide insight into a variety of perspectives of adult sexual assault including local, national and international.

The following topics will be taught within this unit:

  • Patient, counselling, policing and legal perspectives of sexual violence.
  • Global aspects of sexual assault.
  • Sexual assault medical service provision; theory, models and practice.
  • Quality assurance in the provision of sexual assault services.
  • Vicarious trauma theory and practice.
  • Sexual violence research, key issues, data and sources.

On successful completion of the unit, students will be expected to have developed a broad knowledge of the published data in relation to local, national and international perspectives of adult sexual assault. They will have acquired the knowledge and skills required to provide input into the delivery of adult sexual assault medical services and teaching programs.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit a student will be expected to have acquired the knowledge and skill sets to:

  • Establish and maintain an adult sexual assault service
  • Identify and debate sexual assault issues from a global perspective .
  • Describe the key issues of adult sexual assault from the perspectives of a victim, a counsellor, an investigator and a legal practitioner.
  • Understand and implement strategies to deal with vicarious trauma .
  • Develop and deliver training in the field of adult sexual services .
  • Describe and discuss the key literature in the field of sexual violence.
  • Understand research in the field of sexual assault.

Assessment

Assignment (30%)
Participation in a topic related debate (10%)
Presentation (20%)
Dissertion and oral structured interview (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

It is expected that students will need to undertake approximately 12 hours of study per week over the Semester. This will include contact time (16 hours), private study (text and readings), assessment tasks (case studies, assignments), and involvement in case work. Students are required to attend a 2 day workshop during the semester.

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

A registered medical practitioner who is involved in assessing (or may be required to assess) victims of sexual violence. The medical practitioner must be able to show evidence of working or training in the field of sexual assault medicine.
Successful completion of the Adult Sexual Assault Unit, FOR5005 with a grade of credit or above.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Southbank Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Southbank Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Wells

Synopsis

This unit offers students the opportunity to apply and consolidate the knowledge and professional skills they have acquired through the course within the practical context of forensic medicine. It requires independent learning and research by the student while fostering practical knowledge and skills related to the student's field of activity. Students undertake a project with a forensic medicine focus, in the area which they choose.

Assessment

Project (12,000 words) (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Completion of core units for the Masters of Forensic Medicine - Honours level


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank First semester 2013 (Day)
Southbank Second semester 2013 (Day)
Southbank Full year 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Prof Stephen Cordner

Synopsis

Autopsy techniques will be taught via experiential learning in the mortuary, with experience practitioners from the VIFM acting as tutors/supervisors. Over the 12 months of training, the student will be required to apply the learned techniques to different types of cases, allocated to ensure as wide a range of experience as possible is gained. Students will also be given practical instruction in techniques to forensic odontology and anthropology that are used to support forensic pathology practice, particularly in identifying unknown remains.

Outcomes

Upon completion of the unit the student will be expected to:

  1. Accurately assess the significance of contextual information contained in medical records and other relevant documentation and apply it to interpretation of autopsy findings.
  2. Show proficiency in standard autopsy techniques, applied to routine coroners cases.
  3. Show familiarity with specialised techniques applied in specialised.
  4. Be able to recognize and interpret disease and injury in standard and specialised cases.
  5. Be able to present and discuss autopsy findings with colleagues.
  6. Accurately analyse, interpret and document autopsy findings in autopsy reports for use in the coronial system.
  7. Show familiarity with specialized forensic odontology and anthropology techniques.

Assessment

Performance of autopsies and presentation of findings (25%), Oral and written examination (50%), Casebook (25%).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students will attend regular pathologists meetings approx 40 hours, 200 hours in mortuary engaged in practical work and observation. Approx 72 hours individual study and case book preparation.

Prerequisites

Enrolment by Department of Forensic Medicine permission only


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitVictorian Institute of Forensic Medicine
OfferedSouthbank Full year 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof David Ranson

Synopsis

Coronial and other medico-legal death investigation systems.
This topic provides a framework and wider context for the practice of forensic pathology and covers:
Actual and theoretical models for death investigation systems, using examples from Australia, other jurisdictions and recent reform proposals in the UK including issues of organisation and administration, investigation powers and inquests/formal hearings.
Relationships with forensic pathology and science services.
Management of bodies and tissues.
Interaction with next of kin.

Death Scene Investigation
This topic will provide students with theoretical knowledge and practical skills to observe and analyse evidence at death scenes, enhancing their ability to work effectively with other participants in the process and assist in answering questions about the cause and the circumstances of deaths under investigation. These skills will be applied to a range of special scenes to provide students with as varied and relevant experience as possible:
Deaths in Custody
Hospitals and other Health Institutions
Transport Related Deaths
Mass Disaster
War Crimes Death Investigation
Industrial Deaths
Fire Scenes
Explosion Scenes
Exhumations

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student is expected to:

  1. Demonstrate knowledge of different models for death investigation systems.
  2. Understand how issues of organisation and administration of death investigation systems and management of key processes impact on forensic pathology practice.
  3. Understand the principles of death scene investigation and the roles of the relevant participants in the investigation;
  4. Have acquired skills necessary for effectively observing and analyzing death scene evidence.
  5. Be able to apply these skills to different types of death scenes.

Assessment

Assignments 30%, Case Study presentation 40% and Oral Examination 30%.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

60 Contact hors (tutorials and attendance at scenes), 50 hours of case and practical work and approximately 46 hours for individual study, assignments and case book preparation.

Prerequisites

Enrolment by Department of Forensic Medicine permission only


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedGippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pamela Wood (Gippsland, off-campus), Dr Beverley Copnell (Clayton Campus, on-campus)

Synopsis

Research is integral to nursing practice. As leaders in clinical practice, education or management, it is essential that Master's-prepared nurses have the skills to effectively consume, produce and apply research knowledge to ensure that practice is based on appropriate and critiqued evidence. This unit will provide students with the theoretical knowledge required to evaluate research evidence for use in clinical practice, education or management, and will prepare students to undertake their own research project.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit it is expected that students will be able to:

  1. Discuss the contributions of research to the nursing knowledge base and to patient outcomes;
  2. Identify relevant and significant nursing problems for investigation;
  3. Critically analyse various approaches to nursing research;
  4. Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of different methodologies and research designs;
  5. Locate, critically appraise and synthesis research evidence relating to nursing problems;
  6. Analyse the principles of ethical research conduct and discuss their application in practice.

Assessment

Written assignment (4000words) 40%
Written assignment (5000 word) 60%

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester B 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Beverley Copnell (Clayton), Dr Beverley Copnell (Peninsula), Ms Jenny Grubb (off-campus)

Synopsis

The unit gives nursing graduates a program which combines a strong theoretical and practical focus to health services management. Topics on management and administration include: change and organisational structures; power, authority and politics, leadership; people in health service organisation, change and organisational effectiveness. Flexible delivery mode includes optional seminars, which assist the student with applied skills such as quality assurance and best practice models, managing budgets, managing programs, the preparation of business plans and quality improvement plans and program evaluation.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit and with further study and practice, the student will be expected to:

  1. have an appreciation of the similarities and the differences in administration and management concepts;
  2. work towards effective nursing services within health care service organisations through the introduction of service delivery models that are guided by continuous improvement strategies;
  3. recognise quality outcomes in health services management;
  4. implement strategies in line with modern management techniques such as strategic management, organisational culture, organisational effectiveness, productivity enhancement, communication strategies, and safe environmental strategies;
  5. be cognisant with the principles of human resources management when organising resources within an organisation,
  6. ensure nursing executive efficiency through the analysis of systems, theories and processes that affect advanced nursing practice and advanced clinical nursing practice.

Assessment

Three assignments: 30%, 20%, 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

6 hours per week


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Mark Hedger

Synopsis

This unit provides students with a theoretical and practical background to reproductive endocrinology. Information about the general organisation and regulation of the reproductive endocrine system will be taught including hormones produced by the pituitary, hypothalamus, ovary and testis and their respective interactions, regulation and mode of action. The role of growth factors will also be considered. Students will also learn about the ethical considerations required in human and animal experimentation, acquire basic laboratory and tissue culture skills and complete a biostatistics series to learn how to interpret and analyse biomedical research data.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will have:

  1. acquired the basic theoretical background and practical knowledge about the components of the reproductive endocrine system;
  2. become familiar with current concepts relating to animal and human ethics, laboratory safety, use of library facilities and critical analysis of scientific journals;
  3. experience in current laboratory skills associated with research in reproductive biology;
  4. gained knowledge about, and experience in, the appropriate use of statistics to analyse data in reproductive science;
  5. demonstrated skills in report writing and the presentation of scientific data.

Assessment

Open-book written examination (1.5 hours): 50%
3 written practical reports: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

This unit is conducted over six weeks in the first semester. For the first five weeks, students are required to attend lectures and practical session. It is expected that all students, including part-time students, attend all the lectures and practical classes from Week 1 to Week 6 inclusive.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Cellular and whole organ events involved in reproductive endocrinology and development, and the interactions between the reproductive organs are covered in this unit. The development and differentiation of the male and female reproductive systems through the examination of oocyte and follicular development; ovarian cycles including oestrous and menstrual cycles; testicular function and cell/cell interactions in the testis and fertilisation are also taught. Students will also undertake a research project to gain experience in planning projects and reporting findings.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will have:

  1. acquired a basic theoretical background and knowledge about the cellular and whole organ events involved in reproductive endocrinology, and development, and the interactions between the reproductive organs;
  2. put into practice current concepts relating to animal and human ethics, laboratory safety, use of library facilities and critical analysis of scientific journals;
  3. gained experience in research laboratory practices in reproductive biology;
  4. developed their skills in report writing and the presentation of scientific data.

Assessment

Open-book written examination (1.5 hours): 50%
Literature review (3000 words): 25%
Written project report in the form of a scientific paper: 15%
Oral Critical Journal Review: 10%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

This unit will be held over 3 weeks in first semester. Students are required to attend all lectures, tutorials and journal review sessions. In addition attendance is required from 9 am to 5 pm for a one week practical laboratory project.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Jansen & A/Prof Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

All aspects of human pregnancy from implantation to the puerperium. Unit taught by both basic and clinical scientists, thereby affording the student an appreciation of the close integration between the disciplines. The module will be taught in four sections: implantation and placentation, the foetus, the mother and politics of pregnancy.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will have:

  1. gained an overview and an understanding of the pathophysiology of human pregnancy in terms of both the mother and her foetus. Students will understand the processes regulating implantation and placental development and function, goetal growth and development, neonatal adaptation, maternal adaptation to pregnancy and puerperal changes and the regulation of parturition;
  2. become familiar with common aberrations in normal physiology and development including foetal abnormality and prenatal diagnosis, recurrent miscarriage, pregnancy hypertension, preterm labour, puerperal disorders and neonatal care;
  3. become aware of some of the key unanswered questions in perinatal research and gain an understanding of the research strategies capable of affording new developments;
  4. acquired an understanding of the theory and practice of the laboratory techniques of dispersed cell culture and immunohistochemistry.

Assessment

Open-book written examination (1.5 hours): 50%
Literature review (3000 words): 25%
Written project report in the form of a scientific paper: 15%
one oral presentation of the practical project: 10%.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

This unit will be held over 3 weeks in first semester. Students are required to attend all lectures, tutorials and journal review sessions. In addition attendance is required from 9 am to 5 pm for a one week practical laboratory project.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Jansen & A/Prof Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Builds on earlier course work concerning the basic mechanisms in reproductive biology. Demonstrating to students how the knowledge of the basic mechanisms can be applied to key problems in reproductive health. Disorders of sexual development and the normal processes involved in puberty and the menopause plus reproductive toxicology are covered. Key elements of sexually transmitted disease and the HIV pandemic discussions will provide the student with the pathological processes involved in these disorders. Reproductive disorders covered include the common reproductive cancers, menstrual disorders, infertility and erectile dysfunction.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. have a thorough understanding of the disorders of sexual development and the normal processes involved in puberty and the menopause;
  2. understand the key elements in the transfer of sexually transmitted disease and the HIV pandemic;
  3. be familiar with the mechanisms involved in reproductive cancers, menstrual disorders, erectile dysfunction and infertility, the current approaches to the management of these disorders, and the implications of these disorders for the health industry'
  4. have the ability to communicate this knowledge.

Assessment

Open-book written examination (1.5 hours): 60%
Literature review (5000 words): 30%
Oral presentation: 10%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

This unit will be held over six weeks in the second semester. Students are required to attend all lectures and tutorials. Student are also required to present an oral presentation.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Meachem & Dr Kristy Brown

Synopsis

Regulating the size of a population and the rate of population growth is a major problem for many countries. Ensuring infertile couples have the opportunity to form a family is also an important issue. The current trends in population growth and the policies introduced in countries to regulate this growth is explored as well as the extent of infertility and the legislation introduced nationally and internationally to regulate its treatment. The medical, legal and ethical aspects of present and future methods available to control fertility (contraception, contragestion and abortion) and for overcoming infertility (assisted reproductive technology) will be addressed.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will:

  1. understand the demographic trends and policies relating to world population;
  2. be informed about the methods available to women and men to regulate their fertility and the advantages and disadvantages of these methods;
  3. be familiar with the new methods of contraception under development;
  4. have a broad understanding of the ethical and legal issues surrounding the regulation of fertility and infertility;
  5. be able to communicate this information and show an ability to critically evaluate it.

Assessment

Open-book written examination (1.5 hours): 60%
Literature review (5000 words): 30%
Journal Review presentation: 10%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

This unit will be held over six weeks in the second semester. Students are required to attend all lectures and tutorials. Students must also present 3 journal reviews and attend a round table discussion.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

This unit will focus on the reproductive biology and breeding of animals. The lectures and tutorials will build on an understanding of basic reproductive physiology and endocrinology to explore ways in which reproduction can be manipulated to increase the reproductive efficiency and genetic gain in farm animals and animals in danger of becoming extinct. How this information can be applied to the monitoring and regulation of reproduction in pets, zoo animals, Australian native animals and vertebrate pest species will also be explored. The approaches that will be examined include hormonal and immunological manipulation of reproduction, artificial insemination (AI), in vitro fertilization (IVF), intra-cytoplasmic sperm. A facility that is using these approaches will allow students to see first hand how fundamental information can be applied to achieve environmental and/or commercial outcomes.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. possess a thorough knowledge and understanding about the reproductive biology of farm animals, animals in danger of becoming extinct, pets, zoo animals, Australian native animals and vertebrate pest species;
  2. be familiar with the techniques that are available to manipulate reproduction in animals, including the hormonal and immunological manipulation of reproduction, artificial insemination (AI), in vitro fertilisation (IVF), intra-cytoplasmic sperm injection (ICSI), the cryopreservation of semen, and embryo production and transfer;
  3. understand the limitations of the procedures that are applied to manipulate reproduction in animals and have gained first hand experience of ICSI in animals;
  4. understand the commercial, environmental and ethical issues related to the use of reproductive technologies on animals;
  5. know how to evaluate contemporary research papers and communicate a critical review of several scientific papers and appreciate how fundamental can be applied to achieve environmental and/or commercial outcomes.

Assessment

Open-book written examination (1.5 hours): 50%
Practical work and report: 30%
one mini-seminar 20%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

This unit will be held over six weeks in second semester. In addition to attendance at lectures and tutorials students are required to attend practical demonstrations and site visits. Attendance from 9 am to 5 pm for a 3 day laboratory project is also required.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

The new reproductive technologies are now widely used for the treatment of human infertility and for prenatal diagnosis of familial genetic disorders. These techniques involve in vitro fertilization (IVF) and therefore require a sound knowledge of reproductive endocrinology, cell biology and specific techniques involved in the handling and maturation of human sperm and ova. Micromanipulation is an important new method required for fertilization (intracytoplasmic sperm injection - ICSI) and chromosome or genetic diagnosis (embryo biopsy for fluorescent in situ hybridisation - FISH, or polymerase chain reaction - PCR amplification of genomic DNA). This unit also involves the new and rapidly changing areas of cell and tissue cryobiology and transplantation. Specific tests are now also evolving for assessment of embryo viability, particularly now that embryos can be grown successfully to late preimplantation stages of development. These new techniques are presented in the context of laboratory quality assurance and the ethical and legal frameworks of local legislation and regulation.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

1. understand the clinical and laboratory techniques required for successful IVF, the reasons for the methods used, and why quality assurance is a premium for clinical IVF services; 2. comprehend the limitations of the procedures applied in human infertility and genetic diagnosis; 3. understand and have experienced micromanipulation, the handling of embryos (animal) and their cryopreservation, and have used the FISH technique to identify chromosomes in single cells; 4. have learned about ethics and the laws governing IVF, and assessed new articles on IVF; 5. have worked together to solve a problem and presented their solution as a poster; 6. be familiar with evaluating and communicating a critical review of contemporary scientific research papers.

Assessment

Open-book written exam (1.5 hrs): 50%
Written report on quality assurance in an IVF program: 25%
Preparation of poster and oral poster presentation: 25%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

This unit is held over 6 weeks in second semester. Students are required to attend all lectures, interactive sessions, practical sessions and a site visit to Monash IVF.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ben Smith

Synopsis

This unit provides opportunities to examine the impact of multiple factors that contribute to the health of Australia's population, known collectively as the social determinants of health as well as the opportunity to develop knowledge and skills in program planning for health promotion. Students will examine the intended and unintended effects of health promotion and its capacity to influence the determinants of health particularly on reducing disparities and inequities experienced between identifiable groups or categories of people within populations. They will also develop skills in needs assessment, priority setting, designating targets for change, using evidence and theory to make intervention choices and establishing systems for program management.

Outcomes

  1. Define health promotion from differing perspectives and explain the principles that underpin contemporary health promotion;
  2. Describe and discuss a range of theories for promoting health and how they are used in health promotion programs;
  3. Explain frameworks for the social determinants of health and critically reflect on their relationship to social equity, health inequities, social justice and the ethical project of health promotion;
  4. Describe the steps in comprehensive program planning as a basis for action to address health determinants;
  5. Identify the information sources that can be used to identify health needs, assess determinants and select targets for change;
  6. Demonstrate an understanding of priority setting and specification of goals, objectives and strategies based on a logic model;
  7. Demonstrate the use of evidence and theory in all stages of planning, including evaluation;

Assessment

Review of literature (30%)
Case Study (20%)
Development of Program Plan (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

In addition to weekly activities and online discussions, two non-compulsory on-campus/on-site study blocks are offered.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Ben Smith

Synopsis

This unit will equip students with skills to evaluate disease prevention and health promotion strategies using a range of methodologies. An emphasis will be placed on the evaluation challenges posed by the complexities of public health action and the contexts in which it is carried out, with case studies used to foster an understanding of these issues.

Outcomes

  1. Distinguish between levels of evaluation recognise how these are linked to program plans;
  2. Select qualitative designs that are appropriate for different evaluation questions;
  3. Identify the range of quantitative study designs that can be employed and the strengths and weaknesses of these for different strategies and contexts;
  4. Describe methods to measure indicators at all levels of evaluation;
  5. Develop survey questions and interview guides that demonstrate an understanding of measurement quality;
  6. Describe the strengths and weaknesses of different methods of respondent sampling;
  7. Develop a comprehensive evaluation plan.

Assessment

Comparison and analysis of evaluation design options (30%)
Development of impact measurement instrument (30%)
Evaluation plan (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

In addition to weekly activities and online discussions, two non-compulsory on-campus/on-site study blocks are offered.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Professor Helen Keleher

Synopsis

Health literacy is both a public health issue and the agendas of national health policy. One in five Australians do not have adequate literacy skills to participate effectively in everyday life and even fewer have high levels of health literacy, which is fundamental for good health. Health literacy involves a range of skills and knowledge including the sourcing and interpretation of health information, seeking of appropriate care and managing health decisions. At more upstream levels, health services need to become more responsive to health literacy issues and develop approaches to ensure their health communications are accessible to people of all literacies. In this unit students will examine health literacy concepts, measures of literacy, tools for readability and increasing understanding, and practical approaches for services to become health literate organisations.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to demonstrate and communicate a broad, critical conceptual and practical understanding of:

  1. the theoretical approaches to understanding health and other types of literacy
  2. the approaches to measurement of health literacy and their validity
  3. the efficacy of strategies to address health literacy
  4. project development that enables health literacy to be addressed utilizing a settings-based health promotion approach.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.

Prerequisites

HSC5002 Foundations of health promotion and program planning


24 points, SCA Band 2, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Assessment

Major thesis
minor coursework as specified by the enrolling department.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit will provide students with an overview of the basic embryological knowledge that is essential for working in animal and human IVF laboratories. Theoretical information about hormonal control of reproduction, folliculogenesis, gametogenesis, fertilisation, implantation, early embryo development to gastrulation, germ and somatic cell lineages and also epigenetics from a cellular, genetic and molecular perspective will be presented and discussed in lectures and tutorials. Also an overview on potential stem cell therapies discussing the production and use of human embryonic stem cells, comparing with stem cells from adult and foetal origin will be given.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Understand and describe in detail the processes of spermatogenesis, hormonal control of reproduction and fertilisation;
  2. Understand and describe the cellular, genetic and molecular aspects of embryonic development and differentiation to a level required by a human IVF program or a research laboratory;
  3. Define epigenetics and, using cell differentiation as an example, explain its importance in causing phenotypic and gene expression changes without change in nuclear DNA sequence
  4. Describe in detail the events involved in the transformation of an embryo from the 2-cell stage to hatching of the late blastocyst
  5. Explain how the trophoblast forms and the process of implantation
  6. Understand and clearly explain the process of embryonic development from the inner cell mass to gastrulation and formation of the trilaminar embryo.
  7. Discuss other embryonic manipulations and explain the potential effects of epigenetics on the development of an embryo and subsequent offspring
  8. Understand and discuss stem cell therapies, and be aware of the differences between adult,.foetal and embryonic stem cells;
  9. Demonstrate an ability to critically and constructively analyse research data in various aspects of embryology;
  10. Communicate their knowledge clearly and effectively.

Assessment

Written journal review comparison 35%
Written exam 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

16h contact per week (lectures, tutorials,forums, self-directed study).


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt and Dr Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

This unit will provide information about the infertile patient and the assisted reproduction technologies used to treat infertility. Students will identify the procedures performed in an IVF clinic and the roles of those involved. They will study the normal events of oocyte production in vivo and learn how these events are manipulated to increase the success of in vitro technologies. The unit also focuses on the outcomes of assisted reproductive technologies and its impact on the offspring generated. The theoretical basis of techniques such as oocyte collection and handling, oocyte maturation in vitro, preparation of oocytes for IVF, standard insemination, assessment of fertilization, and the handling, assessment, selection and transfer of embryos are presented and discussed in lectures, tutorials, and seminars. On-campus students will demonstrate knowledge of OHSE issues and aseptic techniques, and develop skills in laboratory maintenance, use of equipment, superovulation of mice and collection of embryos, embryo handling (mouse) and semen analysis (human).

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Recognise and explain the cause and impact of infertility and infertility treatment on patient couples and offspring
  2. Identify and describe the roles of ART clinic staff: clinicians, scientific directors, embryologists, nurse coordinators, day surgery nurses, counsellors
  3. Be able to describe, trouble-shoot and audit the clinical processes in human assisted reproduction, including techniques for manipulating follicular growth, retrieving oocytes, analysing and preparing semen for insemination, assessing embryo development and embryo transfer
  4. Identify causes of human male infertility and explain the treatment options, using hormonal and IVF based therapies
  5. Demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of OHSE regulations
  6. Apply basic laboratory skills, such as performing dilutions, calculating the concentration of a solution, determining the molarity of a solution, testing pH and osmolarity, preparing media for in vitro culture and correct use and maintenance of equipment such as incubators, centrifuges and microscopes
  7. Show competence in super ovulating and mating mice, harvesting gametes and creating embryos using in vitro fertilization techniques, collecting and culturing embryos and assessing their stage of development and development potential
  8. Show competence in analysing human semen.

Assessment

Written examination (40%)
Essay (27%)
Practical assessment: hands on skills (on campus only) and quizzes (33%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24h contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study, practical skills
training (on-campus)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the skills and opportunity to design and optimise embryo culture systems to ensure the best pregnancy outcomes for couples undertaking infertility treatment. This is achieved through a detailed understanding of critical cellular processes, with an aim to maximize normal embryo growth potential while minimizing stress. Students will learn the methods needed to accurately evaluate embryo quality and develop the ability to micro-manage IVF processes. This unit also provides students with a detailed understanding of cryopreservation techniques and the ability to critically discuss and evaluate these techniques and cryo-banking systems for oocytes, sperm, ovarian and testicular tissue and embryos in human IVF programs. The physico-chemical properties of permeant and non permeant cryoprotectants will be discussed in context with the slow cooling and vitrification methods.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Understand and be able to explain how to control and optimise the environment of gametes/embryos in the laboratory.
  2. Understand the various quality control tests that are used routinely in an IVF laboratory, such as mouse bioassays, sperm survival tests, etc
  3. Identify and interpret scoring systems for the selection of good from bad quality embryos from the 2-cell stage through to hatching blastocysts
  4. Be able to classify maturation and fertilization status of oocytes and early stage embryos and identify cell numbers in fixed and stained embryos
  5. Be able to analyse and report data from lab books (on-campus) or clinical data (off-campus) in abstract form
  6. Be able to critically assess the techniques of gamete and embryo cryopreservation as used in clinical human in vitro fertilization programs
  7. Understand and be able to explain the physico-chemical changes in cells during cryopreservation

Assessment

Written examination (2.5 hours)(40%)
Literature review for project (35%)
Critical review of Journal Article(25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

20h contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester (extended) 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mulyoto Pangestu

Synopsis

The theoretical aspects of IVF, embryo production and cryopreservation will be covered in the previous unit reinforced by extensive practical training The theoretical knowledge gained in slow cooling and vitrification techniques will also enhanced by practical training. Students will freeze, thaw and analyse sperm samples, oocytes and embryos Students will gain a better understanding of media components by making and designing their own media. This unit enables students to develop and enhance their embryo handling skills.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Have a broad theoretical knowledge about the components of culture systems competently demonstrate skills in preparing media suites for in vitro culture of embryos
  2. Show competence in handling mouse oocytes and embryos and be able to perform mouse IVF using epididymal sperm
  3. Develop practical skills in the techniques of oocyte maturation, sperm preparation by gradient and swim up, and insemination and IVF using frozen thawed ejaculated sperm using ovine gametes Be able to demonstrate practical competence in the techniques of vitrification and slow cooling of embryos and gametes and to plan experiments to compare different freezing methods
  4. Have the skills to critically analyse research papers in cryopreservation related to human reproduction

Assessment

Practical skills on IVF (25%) and cryopreservation (25%)
Lab book assessment (10%)
Quiz (20%)
Research plan for project (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

30h contact per week (research,tutorials, self-directed study, practical skill training.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester (extended) 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt

Synopsis

This unit provides students with a detailed understanding of how to establish and equip an IVF laboratory and the quality control and quality assurance practises required to run an effective IVF service. New insights into the quality management framework for an embryology laboratory will allow students to understand and develop techniques for continuous quality improvement in their future workplaces, and to achieve ambitious goals. Knowledge gained in this unit is readily transferable into other areas of laboratory and research activities. Students will have the opportunity to visit IVF laboratories during a designated 'work experience' week and observe how they operate, what techniques are used and which services are offered. A report and an informal presentation (not assessed) on their site visit will enable students to share their experiences and compare the differences in techniques and practices between clinics.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Understand and be able to explain the principals of total quality management and apply the concepts in a laboratory setting in order to achieve continuous quality improvement
  2. Identify the equipment required to run an effective IVF laboratory and justify equipment needs
  3. Simulate the design of an IVF laboratory and its location within an IVF clinic
  4. Review national and international guidelines for establishing a quality ART facility
  5. Predict, measure and solve problems that may arise in an IVF laboratory.

Assessment

Written reports: IVF lab visit (33%)
Quality control, lab design (33%)
Essay 34%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

6h contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study, mock audits)
2-5 days IVF lab visits (on site)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester (extended) 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt and Dr Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Students will conduct the practical aspects of their minor research project in this unit. At the completion of the research, the students will compile and analyse their data using appropriate statistical methodology. The students will interpret their results and write up a research report. Students will also present their data in poster form.
This unit will also provide students with training in the preparation of sperm for intracytoplasmic sperm injection (ICSI), the identification of spermatids, spermatocytes and other cell types recovered from testicular biopsies, and the assessment of fertilization. They will also be given practical training in ICSI mouse gametes using a variety of micromanipulation tools and instruments
On completion, students will be familiar with research methods including project planning, conducting laboratory-based research, data collection, data analysis, using appropriate statistical methods, and preparation of a 5000 word research report in the style of a journal article.They will also receive a sound training in ICSI.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Perform a minor research project, apply appropriate statistical analysis, write up the findings, and compare to other findings in current literature
  2. Identify applications of, and be skilled in the preparation of, micromanipulation instruments
  3. Perform ICSI
  4. Identify methods used for the preparation of sperm from ejaculates and testicular biopsies
  5. Communicate their knowledge clearly and effectively

Assessment

Research report (5000 words) (50%)
Presentation of research by poster (17%)
Practical tests (ICSI) (33%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

20h contact per week (research project, practical skills training (on-campus)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester (extended) 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sally Catt and Dr David Cram

Synopsis

This unit will provide a detailed understanding of the molecular biology and genetic techniques essential in a clinical human IVF programs. Students will be taught the theoretical basis of current techniques in genetic diagnosis, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), fluorescent in situ hybridisation (FISH) and micro-array analysis. This knowledge is enhanced with practical training in embryo biopsy and analysis of resultant blastomeres by FISH and PCR techniques. On completion, students will possess a sound theoretical knowledge and understanding of the molecular and genetic techniques used in a clinical human genetics laboratory, and also become familiar with the different practical applications of these techniques.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Possess a sound theoretical knowledge and understanding of the techniques essential to chromosomal and molecular genetic analysis in a clinical human IVF program
  2. Understand the technical aspects and applications of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and fluorescent in situ hybridisation (FISH)
  3. Understand the applications of micro array technology and karyotyping
  4. Have the ability to perform biopsies on mouse and sheep embryos and prepare isolated blastomeres for FISH analysis
  5. Demonstrate the extraction of DNA from cells and the skills required for carrying out PCR and genetic analysis
  6. Have the skills to critically and constructively analyse research papers in molecular biology and reproduction
  7. Be able to communicate this knowledge

Assessment

Written examination (20%)
Presentation of journal review (20%)
Essay (27%)
Practical assessment: hands on skills (on-campus only) and quizzes (33%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

16h contact per week (lectures, tutorials, forums, self-directed study, practical skills
training (on-campus)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester (extended) 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Giuliana Fuscaldo, Dr Sally Catt and Dr Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

This unit examines the current legislation and regulations governing the clinical practice of Assisted Reproductive Technologies (ART) and related research, nationally and internationally. It describes the role of ethical frameworks and
principles in health decision-making and analyses regulation in ART with respect to underlying moral and ethical principles. An introduction to ethical problem solving is presented. The major ethical issues raised by assisted reproductive technologies are examined and critically evaluated.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. Understand the current major legislative and non-legislative schemes for regulating IVF in Australia and have some knowledge of how the Australian situation compares with other countries
  2. Be aware of the relevant regulatory bodies and their requirements for licensing, accrediting and approving clinical and ART related research
  3. Have a broad understanding of the legal and ethical issues surrounding IVF, gamete and embryo donation, embryo experimentation, surrogacy, cloning, stem cell research and genetic selection and manipulation
  4. Understand the role of ethics in health care and legal decision-making and be familiar with the main ethical frameworks and principles used in analysing conflicts and solving problems
  5. Have developed the confidence to evaluate critically the ethical concerns raised by current ART practices and the future prospects for this technology in Australia and around the world
  6. Be aware of their social and ethical responsibilities as a health care professional and with regard to patient care

Assessment

Written examination (50%)
Essay (25%)
Debate (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

16h contact per week (lectures, tutorials, debates, self-directed study)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Les Segal

Synopsis

This course aims to provide a range of skills that will enhance the GP's role in whole person care of patients with musculoskeletal pain. It places considerable emphasis on management techniques and treatment modalities such as physical, chemical and behavioural. It deals with the epidemiology of musculoskeletal disease, diagnostic processes and developing a framework for rational diagnosis. It also covers practical issues of diagnosis and management and addresses problems both holistically and regionally.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Describe the epidemiology and cost of musculoskeletal disease from population and general practice perspectives, as well as appreciating the epidemiology within your own practice.
  2. Appraise the diagnostic processes used to accurately define musculoskeletal syndromes, and a rational plan of management for these syndromes.
  3. Outline the pathophysiological basis of pain and the rational basis for treating a variety of pain syndromes.
  4. Apply knowledge and skills in a variety of therapeutic modalities routinely used in the treatment of musculoskeletal disorders, including physical, pharmacological and behavioural.
  5. Acquire a range of skills used in the physical treatment of musculoskeletal disorders with particular emphasis on the cervical and lumbar spine.
  6. Incorporate the information gained in this unit to review your current management of musculoskeletal disorders with a view of introducing changes to your practice in this area.

Assessment

Clinical Audit (50%)
Journal activities (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1014


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Craig Hassed

Synopsis

While the art of medicine is often dominated by physical and technical considerations, doctors will also recognise that there are more subtle issues which make the way in which we use that technology meaningful. This area has to do with ethics, morality and law. In this unit the emphasis will be on the ethical decisions confronting doctors in daily practice. Topics covered include: the role of ethics in medical practice, philosophical ethics and principles in practice, ethical principles, critical perspectives, resource allocation, confidentiality and consent, life and death issues.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Develop a critical understanding of the scope of ethical issues and attitudes.
  2. Explain the language and concepts which form the basis of ethical debate.
  3. Reflect philosophically about the basis of beliefs and attitudes.
  4. Recognise the delineation between what is an ethical and what is a legal argument.
  5. Explain the overlap between what is an ethical and what is a legal argument.
  6. Critique the role that cultural influences have on ethical decisions.
  7. Articulate your awareness as a decision maker and the influences that personal factors can have on decisions.
  8. Evaluate the interactions between the doctor and the health care system.

Assessment

Journal (60%)
Essay (20%)
Case commentary (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1017, MCM5117, MFM4017


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Abi Tenen

Synopsis

Ophthalmology is often poorly understood by general practitioners, yet it forms an important component of the problems which patients present to doctors. The aim of this unit is not to make ophthalmologists out of general practitioners, rather, it aims to educate the GP as coordinator of health care, to know what needs to be referred and its urgency, and yet be able to manage with competence and confidence many of the common conditions which afflict the eye. As well, the unit also aims to enhance the linkage between the GP and allied health professionals like optometrists, and support groups for the visually disabled.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Recognise the prevalence of ocular problems in their own practice and in the community at large, including the burden of illness and suffering they cause.
  2. Recognise and diagnose a range of common ocular problems.
  3. Apply skills in managing most ocular problems, including appropriate referral as a management strategy.
  4. Recognise the importance of referral as a learning process.
  5. Integrate ophthalmological assessment in the management of patients with a range of chronic conditions.
  6. Explain the importance of optometrical problems like refractive errors in the day to day management of ocular problems, and understand the important role played by optometrists.
  7. Recognise recent developments occurring in ophthalmology, such as in photo refractive keratectomy for refractive errors, new laser techniques, and improved surgical techniques in cataract surgery, leading to the development of day-case cataract surgery.
  8. Incorporate optimal care to the visually impaired by evaluating the impact of visual loss and facilitating access to local services available for the visually impaired.

Assessment

Clinical Audit (30%)
Journal (70%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1019


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Prof Leon Piterman

Synopsis

Mental illness is one of the most common afflictions of developed communities with morbidity and mortality increasing each year. Australian data indicates that large segments of our population are at risk for mental illness, that a large component of mental illness is first seen in primary care settings where it is often unrecognised or inadequately managed. General practitioners intimate knowledge of patients, families and communities mean that they are ideally placed to provide effective primary care in depression and anxiety. This unit will explore issues such as the management and treatment of depression and anxiety disorders.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Recognize common presentations of mood disorders particularly depression, anxiety and mania
  2. Identify the risk factors and underlying causes of mood disorders particularly depression, anxiety and mania
  3. Apply a systematic approach to assess the severity of different types of mood disorders
  4. Describe the effects of mood disorders, including issues of morbidity and mortality.
  5. Develop a rationale for choice of treatment(s).
  6. Outline the current classification of mood disorders, particularly depression and anxiety disorders.

Assessment

Journal activities (Pass/fail)
2 Case reports (50% each)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

CGP1002, CGP1003


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Andy Morgan

Synopsis

This unit introduces the student to broad range of common dermatological problems encountered in the general practice setting, providing them with clinically relevant and up-to-date information on topics such as patterns and diagnosis of skin disease, erythematopapulosquamous diseases, dermal and subcutaneous problems, skin tumours and pigmented lesions, cutaneous manifestations of systematic diseases, skin infections, paediatric dermatology, cosmetic dermatology, Industrial dermatology and regional dermatology, amongst others. Topics are written by content specialists practicing in these areas, and are customised specifically for the general practitioner.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Apply knowledge of the structure and function of the skin to assist in accurate diagnosis.
  2. Develop a systematic approach to diagnosis which involves - assimilating sufficient knowledge to reduce the spectrum of clinical possibilities in any particular setting to a meaningful and rational diagnostic list, and -further refining this list based on an understanding of the background of each of the diagnostic possibilities.
  3. Apply knowledge of available lists or investigations to further aid diagnosis.
  4. Recognise the scope of dermatological problems seen in general practice and the potential that exists for GPs to adequately manage a considerable number of these conditions.
  5. Develop a systematic approach to treatment which incorporates 'holistic' methods involving the use of several agents in any particular condition, rather than a single agent (i.e. orchestra vs single instrument approach).
  6. Acquire the practical skills which might enhance the range of dermatological procedures carried out in general practice. Effectively use appropriate dermatological procedures for the general practice setting.
  7. Discuss future developments in dermatological diagnosis and treatment, and the refinements of sub-specialities within the field of dermatology.

Assessment

Mid-term examination 15%
End of term examination 15%
Pictorial case studies (Sessions 1-5) 40%
Logbook (prospective audit) 30%
Journal (formative assessment)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1004


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Karyn Alexander

Synopsis

Paediatrics is an enormous field covering the whole range of clinical practice in the younger age group. This unit explores areas that are of practical relevance, interest and importance to the work of family practitioners, exploring child health problems as experienced in everyday practice. The aim for this unit is to increase skills and confidence to make treating that age group an even more interesting and satisfying part of general practice.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit participants should be able to :

  1. Critically appraise important issues in child health.
  2. Identify and strengthen the unique GP role in paediatrics.
  3. Develop a comprehensive approach to child health and management of illness in the paediatric age group.
  4. Update practical skills in important paediatric problems.
  5. Gain confidence in, and exposure to, handling delicate and difficult areas of child health which GP's often tend to avoid.
  6. Develop strategies for handling difficult consultations both with children and their parents.
  7. Assess normal development and deviations from that norm.
  8. Mobilise community resources for children with special needs.
  9. Communicate with and manage appropriately the adolescent patient.
  10. Think preventively in child health consultations.
  11. Effectively handle paediatric emergencies.
  12. Manage many varied and difficult clinical problems in a more effective and comprehensive way than previously.

Assessment

Clinical audit (35%)
Essay (15%)
Journal (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1007


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr I Chenoweth

Synopsis

Many GPs practicing today have little or no formal undergraduate training in health care issues that are relevant to older people. This elective unit covers the following: social aspects of ageing, clinical aspects of ageing, functional independence, rehabilitation and promoting independence, psychogeriatrics, bladder and bowel problems, tiredness, anorexia and weight loss, breathlessness, turns, tumbles and tremors, painful conditions, hypertension, leg ulcers and pressure ulcers, institutional and nursing home care, latrogenesis, healthy ageing - health promotion and disease prevention and ethical issues.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Promote the practice of geriatric medicine among GPs.
  2. Improve the knowledge, skills and confidence of GPs in the care of the elderly.
  3. Explain the aspects of care that are different for older people.
  4. Interpret and assess information on the medical care of older people that is practical, concise and relevant to general practice.
  5. Appreciate and acknowledge the interdisciplinary nature of gerontology and geriatric medicine and rehabilitation.
  6. Describe the focus on community care, i.e. assessment of older people in their normal community environment, and the use of community resources as an integral part of their care.
  7. Emphasise the importance of prevention and health maintenance in older people.
  8. Present a positive model of geriatric practice.

Assessment

Journal activities (40%)
Audit 1 (20%)
Essay (20%)
Audit 2 (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

MFM1012


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Prof Danielle Mazza

Synopsis

This unit addresses aspects of women's sexual and reproductive health commonly encountered in the general practice setting. It will consider the particular way that women's sexual and reproductive health issues present in the general practice context, current controversies in women's sexual and reproductive health, current evidence and guidelines pertinent to investigation and management of womens sexual and reproductive health issues and consideration of the women's medical issues in a psychosocial context.

Outcomes

On completion of this course you should:

  1. Demonstrate improved knowledge and insight into womens health;
  2. Respond sensitively and competently to womens sexual and reproductive health issues in the general practice context;
  3. Critically appraise the controversial issues related to sexual and reproductive health;
  4. Have an appreciation of the psychosocial context of women's sexual and reproductive health;
  5. Be aware of current evidence and guidelines in relation to womens sexual and reproductive health;
  6. Describe normal pubertal development and appropriately manage primary amenorrhoea and dysfunctional uterine bleeding in adolescence
  7. Have a good working knowledge of the advantages and disadvantages of different forms of contraception, as well as know the indications, adverse effects and contraindications of their use;
  8. Recognise the issues involved in women deliberating over proceeding with a termination of pregnancy and know how to counsel them in a non judgemental way;
  9. Diagnose and manage sexually transmitted diseases and effectively counsel patients regarding sage sex, recognising and addressing barriers to safe sex practice;
  10. Proactively provide preconception care and be able to manage early pregnancy loss and couples attending your practice with subfertility;
  11. Understand the principles behind cervical and breast cancer screening and know how to manage abnormal smears;
  12. Describe the research base relevant to hormone replacement therapy and be confident managing common menopausal symptoms and osteoporosis;
  13. Have an appreciation of issues involved in sexuality and be able to counsel women about commonly encountered sexual problems;
  14. Appreciate the prevalence of violence against women, understand the physical and psychological consequences of it and be able to counsel women appropriately when these issues are disclosed.

Assessment

Journal (50%)
Audit of current practice (25%)
Case Study (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Available to postgraduate students only


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Craig Hassed

Synopsis

This unit examines the body of scientific evidence linking stress with mental and physical illness and with a range of abnormal lifestyle behaviours. It teaches practical skills in the form of relaxation and meditation techniques which students learn and practice themselves and can then teach their patients to carry out. The unit identifies the circumstances and conditions in which these techniques are most useful. The theory and practice are run in parallel throughout the unit.

Outcomes

By the end of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Recognise that there is now a significant body of research linking psychological states like stress with many illnesses.
  2. Recognise that there is also a large body of research demonstrating the benefits of psychological interventions like stress management and mindfulness.
  3. Describe the ways in which stress affects physical health and lifestyle.
  4. Practice the mindfulness exercises in its various forms.
  5. Understand the principles and applications of the mindfulness-based cognitive strategies.
  6. Assess and improve your professional skills as a counsellor in stress management, thereby being of greater benefit to your patients.
  7. Reflect on your own experience of stress and ways in which you manage it, thereby deriving personal benefit from the course.

Assessment

Scientific stream:
Assignment (25%)
Essay (25%)
Practical stream:
Journal (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

DFM3002


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr G Wallace

Synopsis

Pain is a common presenting problem in general practice, stimulating shared doctor and patient expectations of diagnosis and effective treatment. This unit attempts to improve the process of pain management by giving students clinically relevant and up to date information on topics including basic definition, anatomy, physiology of pain, psychological aspects of pain, evaluation of the patient with pain, role of the GP in pain management, role of pain clinics, specific disorders; migraine, neck and facial pain, TMJ, thoracic and lumbar pain, musculoskeletal pain including fibromyalgia, cancer pain and pain management in palliative care.

Outcomes

By the end of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Apply a better understanding of pain physiology and assessment in your practice.
  2. Describe the pain experience and its ramifications, recognising that whole person care is essential.
  3. Use a range of practical pain management strategies and techniques in dealing safely and effectively with patients pain.
  4. Assess the complex issue of spinal pain with a logical diagnostic and management approach.
  5. Recognise the concept of soft tissue rheumatism (localised inflammatory soft tissue disorders).
  6. Recognise the wide range of causes of headache and develop a framework for a diagnostic approach.
  7. Use the fibromyalgia syndrome model in your approach to a number of other painful chronic musculoskeletal diseases and conditions.
  8. Identify the particular needs of patients suffering cancer pain, and use a range of strategies, both pharmacological and non pharmacological, in alleviating the pain.

Assessment

Preliminary audit 15%
Post course audit 15%
Assessment tasks 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

DFM3003


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Chenoweth

Synopsis

In order to prescribe in the most appropriate manner, the general practitioner needs a broad perspective. Rational prescribing needs an understanding of: the pressures affecting a practitioner which may influence his or her prescribing patterns, the consumer and factors which impinge upon optimal use of medication, and of the subtle and not so subtle influences and constraints of manufacturers and government which determine the milieu within which practitioners prescribe. This unit aims to have such a perspective, covering topics from the practical philosophy of rational prescribing to the future of clinical pharmacology.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Recognise the context of therapeutics today, with regard to its historical development and its relationship to government and industry.
  2. Recognise the psychosocial issues involved in the prescription of medication.
  3. Analyse and select the most appropriate therapy for any particular diagnostic situation, using specific criteria.
  4. Apply the principles of pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics to clinical situations.
  5. Discuss the factors involved in patient compliance.
  6. Critically appraise different forms of drug information, including promotional items.
  7. Conduct a patient medication review.
  8. Conduct an audit of prescribing.
  9. Implement changes in their practice based upon knowledge and skills gained in this unit.

Assessment

Assignment 1 (25%)
Assignment 2 (25%)
Assignment 3 (20%)
Assignment 4 (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

DFM3006


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr C Hassed

Synopsis

Diabetes is a common disease of increasing prevalence in Australia and the rest of the world and is major source of preventable morbidity and mortality. Much of the diagnosis, treatment and monitoring of diabetic patients falls on the shoulders of General Practitioners. This unit will enhance the skills and knowledge of General Practitioners on all aspects of diabetes mellitus diagnosis and management and lifestyle modification and will include utilisation of medical specialists and diabetes support services.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Describe the aetiology, prevalence and pathophysiology of diabetes.
  2. Improve skills in diabetic screening and diagnosis
  3. Manage both type 1 and type 2 diabetes effectively and with a holistic perspective.
  4. Manage diabetic emergencies.
  5. Develop and implement a care plan including attention to relevant lifestyle factors.
  6. Monitor diabetic patients effectively.
  7. Identify, treat and/or refer diabetic complications early and effectively.
  8. Describe special areas of diabetic management.
  9. Utilise diabetic support services and networks effectively.

Assessment

Case study (40%)
Pre course and post course audit (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

DFM3007


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Henry Taub

Synopsis

This unit aims to acquaint family physicians with the latest information about andrological topics - and to make them confident and comfortable in dealing with patients who suffer from the many disorders of the male reproductive organs. The content of the unit will cover: androgens; male infertility; erectile dysfunction; benign prostate disease, prostate cancer, testicular tumours and sexually transmitted infections. The Department of General Practice acknowledges Andrology Australia, an initiative of the Australian Government Department of Health and Ageing, for its financial commitment to the initial development of this module.

Outcomes

By the end of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Appreciate the major issues in male reproductive health today.
  2. Explain in detail the physiology of the male reproductive system,
  3. Demonstrate confidence in dealing with issues of infertility and erectile dysfunction.
  4. Discuss recent advances in diagnosing and managing prostate disease.
  5. Explain the issues of diagnosis, management and prevention of testicular tumors.
  6. Develop skills in conducting a clinical audit. Conduct a clinical audit.
  7. Recognise the potential of audits to improve clinical practice.

Assessment

Journal activities (25%)
Essay (25%)
Audit part 1 and Audit part 2 (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

DFM3008


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr S Wijesinha

Synopsis

General practitioners are in the best position to identify individuals who are at risk of heart disease, and so implement primary prevention. This unit focuses on the modern assessment and management of cardiovascular problems encountered by the general practitioner. Topics covered include: hypertension, chest pain, atrial fibrillation, heart failure and syncope.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Appreciate the major issues in cardiovascular health today.
  2. Assess and advise patients from the viewpoint of preventive cardiology.
  3. Manage patients with hypertension, chest pain, atrial fibrillation, heart failure and syncope effectively.
  4. Assess the currently available investigations for diagnosis and management of cardiovascular disease. Evaluate current evidence and research for diagnosis and management of cardiovascular disease?
  5. Be familiar with modern methods of interventional cardiology
  6. Conduct a clinical audit - either in screening for risk factors or in the management of cardiac failure.
  7. Recognise the potential of audits to improve clinical practice.

Assessment

Journal activities (pass/fail)
Essay (25%)
Essay (25%)
Audit part 1 and Audit part 2 (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

Seminars include psychoanalytic theories and psychopathology including an in-depth study of the work of Sigmund Freud and Melanie Klein. The applied seminars continue and include consultation, ethics and research. Clinical Supervision: individual Psychotherapy supervision, 2 hours per week. Parent Therapy Supervision, 1 hour per week. Infant Observation Seminar, 1 hour per week.

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit are:

  1. To continue an exploration in seminars of the fundamental psychoanalytic and developmental theories.
  2. To explore the application of these theories to various aspects of clinical work both in seminars and clinical supervision.
  3. To acquire knowledge of the application of ethical issues, consultation to, and research in the area.
  4. To observe the ongoing development of a non-clinical infant for one hour per week, from birth until at least six months of age.
  5. To undertake psychotherapy with children, adolescents and parents, to present this work to the clinical supervisors; to be able to demonstrate a beginning competence with the various techniques in the work.

Assessment

Trainees' performance on seminars
trainees performance on the infant observation seminars
Written report submitted by clinical supervisors for each trainee detailing progress made
An integration of the various aspects of the unit are to be demonstrated

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MCP5001 (MCP0001) and MCP5002 (MCP0002)


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

Seminars include psychoanalytic theories and psychopathology including an in-depth study of the work of Sigmund Freud and Melanie Klein. The applied seminars continue and include consultation, ethics, trauma and research. Clinical Supervision: individual psychotherapy supervision, 2 hours per week. Parent Therapy Supervision, 1 hour per week. Infant Observation Seminar, 1 hour per week.

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit are:

  1. To continue an exploration in seminars of the fundamental psychoanalytic and developmental theories.
  2. To explore the application of these theories to various aspects of clinical work both in seminars and clinical supervision.
  3. To extend knowledge of the application of ethical issues, consulation to and research in the area .
  4. To continue the observation of the ongoing development of a non-clinical infant for one hour per week, from six months of age to until at least twelve months of age.
  5. To submit on completion a written account of this twelve-month infant observation.
  6. To undertake psychotherapy with patients viz. children, adolescents and parents, and to present this work to the clinical supervisors; to be able to demonstrate a developing competence with the various techniques in the work.

Assessment

Trainees' performance on seminars
Written account of the year's infant observations to be submitted
Written report submitted by clinical supervisors for each trainee detailing progress made
An integration of the various aspects of the unit are to be demonstrated.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MCP5001 (MCP0001) and MCP5002 (MCP0002) and MCP5003 (MCP0003)


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

Seminars include psychoanalytic theories and psychopathology including the work of Sigmund Freud, Melanie Klein and Wilfred Bion.. Clinical and Research seminars continue. Clinical Supervision: individual psychotherapy supervision, 2 hours per week. Parent Therapy Supervision, 1 hour per week.

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit are:

  1. To continue in seminars an exploration of the fundamental psychoanalytic and developmental theories.
  2. To explore the application of these theories to various aspects of clinical work both in seminars and clinical supervision.
  3. To examine the psychodynamic functioning of groups and organisations; To examine research and thesis writing as relevant to the area.
  4. To undertake psychotherapy with patients viz. children, adolescents and parents and to present this work to the clinical supervisors; to be able to demonstrate competence with the various techniques in the work.

Assessment

Trainees' performance on seminars
Written report submitted by clinical supervisors for each trainee detailing progress made
An integration of the various aspects of the unit are to be demonstrated in the students' clinical work

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MCP5001 (MCP0001) and
MCP5002 (MCP0002) and
MCP5003 (MCP0003) and
MCP5004 (MCP0004)


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jeanette Beaufoy

Synopsis

Seminars include psychoanalytic theories and psychopathology including the work of Sigmund Freud, Melanie Klein and Wilfred Bion. Clinical and Research Seminars continue. Clinical Supervision: individual psychotherapy supervision, 2 hours per week. Parent Therapy Supervision, 1 hour per week

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit are:

  1. To continue an exploration in seminars of the fundamental psychoanalytic and developmental theories of this work.
  2. To explore the application of these theories to various aspects of clinical work both in seminars and clinical supervision.
  3. To further examine research and thesis writing as relevant to the area.
  4. To undertake psychotherapy with patients viz. children, adolescents and parents and to present this work to the clinical supervisors, to be able to demonstrate clinical competence with the various techniques in the work and to demonstrate the capacity to function independently as a clinical child psychoanalytic psychotherapist.
  5. To participate in regular research workshops and to develop a proposal for a thesis.

Assessment

Trainees' performance on seminars
Written report submitted by clinical supervisors for each trainee detailing progress made
An integration of the various aspects of the unit are to be demonstrated.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MCP5001 (MCP0001) and
MCP5002 (MCP0002) and
MCP5003 (MCP0003) and
MCP5004 (MCP0004) and
MCP5005 (MCP0005)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This is a core unit in the Graduate Certificate of Disaster Preparedness and Management. This unit provides an introduction to the field of study. The unit includes international disaster epidemiology, the disaster cycle, the science and contemporary models of disaster preparedness and management. The unit will introduce national and international organisations, academic resources and an introduction to the multi-disciplinary approach and the community, social and political concepts of disasters and disaster management. A major consideration will be an overview of the personal attributes and emergency management leadership required in disaster preparedness and management. Students will apply the principles in this Unit to their respective professional practice.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. Enhance their ability to perform in their role as community-based emergency services professionals.
  2. Describe the international classification and scope of disasters.
  3. Describe the international trends in disaster epidemiology in Australia, Oceania and Asia, with a specific focus on the student's local or professional environments.
  4. Explain the phases in the natural history of disasters.
  5. Explain the phases of the emergency management cycle.
  6. Outline contemporary models and principles relating to the science of disaster preparedness and management.
  7. Outline the academic resources available in this field.
  8. Outline the national infrastructure, and international relations, relating to Disaster Preparedness and Management.
  9. Describe the personal attributes and emergency management leadership required in the multi-disciplinary approach to disaster preparedness and management.
  10. Outline the impact of political and social contexts of disasters.

Assessment

3 part assignment (3,000 words) - 45% Assignment (3,000 words) - 55%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

On-campus students:
156 hours including 5 day full-time block release, supported by online tutorials using MUSO.

Off-campus students:
Students are required to spend 12 hours per week on this unit working through self-directed learning materials, participating in tutorials through MUSO and in preparation of unit assessment tasks (156 hours total).


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This is a core unit in the Graduate Certificate of Disaster Preparedness and Management. The unit begins by outlining the classification and scope of major events that actually, or potentially, threaten the health status of a community. Contemporary models are described to examine and structure disaster risk reduction and preparedness. The unit will apply these models to a sample of recent major events in Australia, Oceania and/or Asia to develop the principles of emergency preparedness and capacity building. A major consideration will be exploring the personal attributes and emergency management leadership through effective communication with the community in times of emergency preparedness for major events. Students will apply the principles in this Unit to their respective professional practice.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Outline contemporary models and principles for disaster risk reduction and preparedness
  2. Discuss the application of risk assessment and vulnerability reduction in potential hazards in the student's local or professional environments, Australia, Oceania and Asian major events.
  3. Apply models and principles of disaster preparedness in the community, organisational and health care facility settings
  4. Discuss personal attributes and emergency management leadership through establishing effective community communication in times of Emergency Preparedness for Major Events.

Assessment

3 part assignment (3,000 words) - 45% Assignment (3,000 words) - 55%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off-campus students:
Students are required to spend 12 hours per week on this unit working through self-directed learning materials, participating in tutorials through MUSO and in preparation of unit assessment tasks (156 hours total).


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This is a core unit of the Graduate Certificate in Disaster Preparedness and Management. The unit introduces contemporary models and principles of emergency management and the management of multiple casualties, including incidents involving hazardous materials, in the response and early recovery phases of major events or disasters. These principles will be applied in a case-based approach to a sample of recent major events, in Australia, Oceania and/or Asia. The unit uses table-top exercises to demonstrate personal attributes and emergency management leadership and apply the principles of disaster response. An overview of issues in international responses will be included. Students will apply the principles in this Unit to their respective professional practice.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. Describe the contemporary models and principles of responses to major incidents from both the emergency and health care sectors and how these sectors collaborate to manage major events.
  2. Describe the process of effective emergency management in the response and early recovery phases of major events or disasters.
  3. Outline the spectrum of medical, public health, psychological and behavioural problems which may be encountered during common major events, in Australia, Oceania and Asia, specifically in the student's local or professional environments
  4. Demonstrate personal attributes and emergency management leadership by participating in the table-top (emergotrain) disaster response exercise.

Assessment

3 Part Assignment (3,000 words) - 45% Assignment (3,000 words) - 55%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off-campus students:
Students are required to spend 12 hours per week on this unit working through self-directed learning materials, participating in tutorials through MUSO and in preparation of unit assessment tasks (156 hours total). Off-campus students must complete the one day on-campus attendance hurdle requirement to participate in the table-top (emergotrain) exercise.

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students must complete the one day attendance hurdle requirement to participate in the table-top (emergotrain) exercise.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This is a core unit of the Graduate Certificate in Disaster Preparedness and Management. The unit will outline contemporary models and general principles of disaster recovery, and the interface of the 'response' and the 'recovery' phases, including community resilience, using a sample of recent major events from Australia, Oceania and/or Asia. The unit will explore the ongoing community support that may be required, the psychosocial issues of recovery, and the restoration of infrastructure following major events. The unit will examine the personal attributes and emergency management leadership required in disaster recovery. Students will apply the principles in this Unit to their respective professional practice.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Describe contemporary models and principles of disaster recovery planning and the medical, public health, psychological and behavioural, infrastructure and emergency management issues which may need to be managed, specifically in the student's local or professional environments
  2. Describe attitudes and skills to continue to develop and further enhance their personal and professional development as emergency service providers.
  3. Critically review the strategies to care for self as an emergency service provider.
  4. Demonstrate personal attributes and emergency management leadership within an appropriate ethical and professional construct in the setting of disaster recovery.

Assessment

3 Part Assignment (3,000 words) - 45% Assignment ( 3,000 words) - 55%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off-campus students:
Students are required to spend 12 hours per week on this unit working through self-directed learning materials, participating in tutorials through MUSO and in preparation of unit assessment tasks (156 hours total).


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit will consider the unique challenges involved with preparing for, responding to, and recovering from emerging disaster threats. The unit will define 'emerging' disaster threats and provide international and national examples as case-studies. The unit will explore the current evidence-base for emerging disaster threats, appropriate contemporary models and principles and/or international standards, and explore the infrastructure, inter-agency involvement and community engagement required for preparing for and managing these events. This unit will examine the policy and social implications of responding to emerging disaster threats including an examination of the ethical issues involved with the provision of resources during emerging disaster threats. Students will apply the principles in this Unit to their respective professional practice.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Critically review the classification, literature and evidence-base of emerging traditional and non-traditional events which threaten national health security and community safety.
  2. Analyse the unique challenges associated with preparing for, responding to, and recovering from, emerging disaster threats in terms of appropriate contemporary models and principles and/or international standards.
  3. Critique the policy, infrastructure, inter-agency involvement and community engagement required for the effective preparation and management of these emerging disaster health threats.
  4. Discuss the socio-cultural and the ethical issues involved in these emerging disaster threats.
  5. Apply the principles in this Unit to their respective professional practice and identify education requirements and research opportunities as a consequence of emerging disaster threats.

Assessment

Two minor assignments (1500 words each)(50%)
Major assignment (3,000 words)(50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

It is expected that students will complete sufficient personal study time (for a total workload of 13 hours per week) over the 12 week semester in order to satisfy the reading, online activities, and assignment expectations of the unit. Within this total, students are also required to attend a 3 day (24 hours) on-campus intensive.

Prerequisites

MDM4010 or equivalent studies or field experience to demonstrate sufficient background to successfully undertake this Unit as determined by the Course coordinator


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

The unit will review the epidemiology trends of disaster and emergencies, from both the global and students' regional perspectives and use contemporary models and principles to examine the background, intentions and implications of the February 2011 COAG Statement on "National Strategy for Natural Disaster Resilience". This unit aims to promote the development of a broad and critical conceptual and practical understanding of disaster resilience and community safety in disaster and emergency situations, and includes themes of: disaster preparedness and leadership; hazard assessment, disaster risk reduction and disaster risk communication; vulnerability assessment; community capacity building; and, shared responsibility, each applied across the spectrum of the emergency management cycle. It will bridge the policy context to the practicalities of community capacity building in the setting of disaster resilience and will be attractive to a broad range of health and emergency management professionals in this field. The unit will conclude with examining the implications of these principles for both community and responder education and identifying research opportunities in this field. Students will apply the principles in this Unit to their respective professional practice.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. Critically review the epidemiology trends of disaster and emergencies, from both the global and students' regional perspectives;
  2. Critique the historical trends in the evolution of the conceptual base describing the "Emergency Management Cycle";
  3. Critically review the literature and evidence-base for "Disaster resilience and Community Safety", in the setting of disasters and emergencies;
  4. Analyse the unique challenges associated with Disaster resilience and Community Safety", in terms of appropriate contemporary models and principles and/or international standards, including but not necessarily limited to, disaster preparedness and leadership; hazard assessment, disaster risk reduction, based on the "Hyogo" Framework; disaster risk communication; vulnerability assessment; and, community capacity building; and, shared responsibility, each applied across the spectrum of the emergency management cycle;
  5. Apply the principles of "Disaster Resilience and Community Safety' to the student's respective professional practice;
  6. Identify education requirements and research opportunities in the field of disaster resilience and community safety.

Assessment

Two minor assignments (1500 words)(50%)
Major assignment (3,000 words)(50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

It is expected that students will complete sufficient personal study time (for a total workload of 13 hours per week) over the 12 week semester in order to satisfy the reading, online activities, and assignment expectations of the unit. Within this total, students are also required to attend a 3 day (24 hours) on-campus intensive.

Prerequisites

MDM4010 or equivalent studies or field experience to demonstrate sufficient background to successfully undertake this Unit as determined by the Course coordinator


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

Professionals working in emergency medical services do not operate in isolation but as an integral part of a co-ordinated health care system. This unit aims therefore to develop the student's understanding of the structure of the system in which they work, the roles and responsibilities of co-workers, the roles and responsibilities of other health professionals, and the importance of adopting effective communication, and operational strategies.

Currently, emergency medical services are changing rapidly with increasing sophistication and integration. This unit will explore the international, national and local trends and drivers in this field.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. describe the emerging models of emergency health services;
  2. analyse international trends in emergency health services and identify those particular relevance to the student's local context;
  3. identify contemporary issues in emergency health services, eg. restructuring and re- aligning service delivery, out of hours emergency primary health care and alternative dispositions to the traditional hospital admission; the emergence of acute care facilities versus hospital emergency departments and;
  4. identify potential new roles in emergency care.

Assessment

Portfolio (5,000 word)(100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ingrid Brooks

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide an opportunity for paramedics and other health professionals in the emergency medical system, to upgrade their clinical practice. This unit will use a negotiated learning contract based on the student's self assessment of learning needs which will be supervised by the unit convenor.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. relate the theory of intensive care paramedicine to practice through the development of a relevant project;
  2. critically appraise a topic in intensive care paramedicine;
  3. demonstrate independent scholarship through the development of suitable project; and
  4. demonstrate effective communication skills with academic staff through negotiation of the project brief and learning contract and the presentation of the project portfolio.

Assessment

Project portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self- directed learning.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit provides the student with enhanced understanding of the concepts related to undertaking research in the emergency services setting though the examination of the Principles of Good Research Practice based on the 'Australian Code for the Responsible Conduct of Research'. Relevant research studies undertaken in emergency services settings, both nationally and internationally, will be used as exemplars to promote contextual relevance to the topics covered in the unit. This unit will build on previous studies in introduction to research and evidence based practice.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. Identify the highlights of the literature profile of research in the emergency setting;
  2. Describe the process and convention requirements of undertaking a research project within the principles of Good Research Practice and the application of these principles in the emergency setting;
  3. Identify potential barriers and possible solutions to the implementation of good research practice in the emergency setting;
  4. identify ethical and privacy issues associated with undertaking research in the emergency setting;
  5. critique research articles with respect to the strengths and limitations of design, methodology, use of statistical methods, data sources, relevance of the findings, and appropriateness of conclusions, and suggest modifications that would have improved the study;
  6. source suitable avenues for research funding, collaboration and for the distribution of outcomes of emergency service research;
  7. implement change in professional practice on the basis of good evidence.

Assessment

Critical appraisal assignment (2,000 words) - 30%, Research framework assignment (4,000 words) - 60%, Discussion participation - 10%.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Completion of the Graduate Diploma in Emergency Health or equivalent.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Stephen Burgess

Synopsis

This unit will be taught using a variety of learning and teaching activities. The Unit will be flexible being conducted online using Moodle. Students will be provided with learning material, and will develop an online activities based within the digital media environment. Students will participate in online discussion including peer review of their own and other student's work. Examination, critical appraisal and online exercises are an important teaching, learning and assessment tools. Both on-campus and off-campus students will be able to undertake lectures, seminars and tutorials introducing them evidence based clinical practice. The students will be expected demonstrate their understanding of the application of evidence based clinical practice within their areas of expertise.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Describe and explain the benefits and limitations of evidence based practice
  2. Perform a comprehensive search of the medical literature
  3. Describe quantitative techniques for data collection and basic analysis for reporting data
  4. Critically appraise studies of therapy, harm, diagnosis and prognosis
  5. Interpret information generated by systematic reviews
  6. Demonstrate the ability to summarise and communicate evidence for professional audiences.

Assessment

Examination (basic statistical methods): 20%
Critical appraisal Task: 40%
On-line exercises - participation and content: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend all required contact lectures in addition to a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ingrid Brooks

Synopsis

This unit provides the student with enhanced understanding of the concepts related to clinical improvement in community based emergency health services by examining current quality management approaches, certification standards, management issues in quality; and managerial responsibilities in managing for quality. Students will be required to examine team-working, empowerment and organisational culture change from the perspective of improving clinical practice and service delivery.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Critically review the strengths and weaknesses of their ambulance service's quality management system with reference to contemporary thinking on clinical improvement methods.
  2. Review their service's key performance indicators to identify meaningful measures of service and quality, evaluate performance trends and identify areas and suggestions for improvement.
  3. Explore the service's clinical improvement implementation methods from the perspectives of culture, communication strategies, teams and employee empowerment.
  4. Implement changes to clinical practice based on sound clinical improvement principles.

Assessment

Assignment 1 (2,500 words) 40%, Assignment 2 (2,500 words) 40%, On-line tutorial participation 20%.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Andrea Wyatt

Synopsis

This unit explores and critiques learning theories and pedagogical and curriculum practices relevant to the community based emergency health context. Concepts, models and theories in educational planning and management of change will be addressed, with a focus on changes in education in the workplace. Students will develop a coherent theory of workplace-based learning relevant to their own professional context and be able to critically appraise competing education approaches. Students are expected to reflect on professional practices in their own workplaces, and critically review how knowledge, skills and attitudes are selected, developed and organised within their own professional context.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will:

  1. Critically identify and analyse contemporary learning theories and curriculum practices relevant to the community based emergency health context.
  2. Critically review their organisation's approach to workplace-based learning based on an exploration of current trends.
  3. Evaluate changes in workplace education in light of contemporary social, cultural and political issues.
  4. Critically reflect on educational practices from a national and international community based emergency health context.

Assessment

Assignment 1 (3,000 words) 45%, Assignment 2 (2,000 words) 35%, On-line tutorial participation 20%.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ingrid Brooks

Synopsis

This unit reviews key leadership theories and styles and promotes the student to develop a personal model of leadership. Key requirements to enable successful implementation of practice change including organisational readiness, an understanding of organisational systems, influencing people, team building and leading changes are explored and applied to the community based emergency health context.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. Develop a personal model of leadership based on a review and critique of contemporary leadership theories and styles.
  2. Critically examine their competence in critical leadership skills including team building, conflict management and influencing.
  3. Examine their organisation using a systems model to identify structures and processes that support or inhibit change.
  4. Examine approaches to organisational change to identify effective change management strategies suitable for their organisation.

Assessment

Leadership skills assignment (2,000 words) 35%, Organisational change assignment (3,000 words), 45%, On-line tutorial participation 20%.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ingrid Brooks

Synopsis

The student will currently be taking or about to commence a work-based project. The student will gain their employer's support and prepare a project brief in the form of a learning contract which will then be discussed with the unit coordinator and signed off by both the student and the unit coordinator. An appropriately qualified and experienced industry leader and/or academic will be appointed as co-supervisor with the unit coordinator. The unit will require the student to define the problem/question/task, identify an appropriate theoretical model/methodology, collect the necessary data, undertake the analysis and prepare the report.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. Critically review and analyse the literature on a current issue in community based emergency services.
  2. Design, develop and implement a work-based research project.
  3. Demonstrate skill in accessing information, critical appraisal, reflective practice and independent scholarship.
  4. Demonstrate communication skills in both oral and written presentations to an audience of community based emergency services professionals.
  5. Write up a work-based project that is suitable for publication.
  6. Contribute to enhancing an aspect of community based emergency services.

Assessment

Preparation of project proposal and learning contract (1,000 words) 10%,
Participation in regular meetings with supervisor and contribution to monthly WebCT discussions 15%,
Verbal presentation (20 mins plus 10 mins discussion) of final report 25%,
Written report in format suitable for publication (5,000 - 6,000 words) 50%.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit will locate the current status of the research literature in this domain. It will allow an in depth examination of the current disaster related research and evaluation models and compendia, identify the strengths and weaknesses of these models, clarify terminology issues, critically review the literature, consider conceptual frameworks and methodological issues in undertaking research and evaluations in the disaster preparedness and management setting and develop core competencies required to design, and conduct research and evaluations in this setting. The unit will establish a standardised approach to reporting disaster research and evaluations and the need to create compendia of such research evaluations towards building the science of disaster preparedness and management to provide a more sophisticated evidence-base for the discipline, and, to inform the research agenda for further research in this discipline.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Critically examine the international imperative for a structured approach to disaster research and evaluations;
  2. Explain the terminology and principles embedded in the conceptual, operational, and research frameworks for disaster research and evaluations;
  3. Locate and question databases of disaster research and evaluation reports;
  4. Locate and critically review published studies on disaster research and evaluations;
  5. Critique the current disaster research and evaluation models and conceptual frameworks, identifying the strengths and weaknesses of each model;
  6. Explain the core concepts required for a sustainable disaster research and evaluation model(s), including the principles of responsible conduct of research, using the Australian NH&MRC Guidelines as the framework;
  7. Apply these core concepts in the design, conduct and evaluation in a proposal for a disaster research or evaluation project;
  8. Identify publication sources and requirements to publish disaster research and evaluations, and,
  9. strategies to inform the research agenda for further research in this discipline.

Assessment

Two minor assignments (1,000 words each)(30%)
Major assignment (4,000 words)(70%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours


Off-campus students:
Students are required to spend, on average, 12 hours per week on this unit across the semester (156 hours in total) working through self-directed learning materials, participating in tutorials through MUSO and in preparation of unit assessment tasks.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ingrid Brooks, Ms Andrea Wyatt

Synopsis

This unit will explore the national and international trends in extended care practice for paramedics as a foundation to the preparation of advanced clinical practice skills required for solo MICA paramedic practitioners. Models of clinical decision making, risk assessment and patient safety will be applied to the solo practitioner setting and practice in advanced clinical skills will be provided. Strategies for the management of clinical emergencies as a solo practitioner will be explored. The unit will also prepare the MICA paramedic for the important role of health commander in multicasualty incidents.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. discuss the national and international trends in health care delivery driving extended paramedic practice models of care;
  2. critically review national and international models of extended paramedic practice;
  3. demonstrate effective clinical decision making and patient safety applied to the clinical expectations of senior MICA Paramedic clinicians as solo responders, including arranging alternative patient dispositions;
  4. demonstrate competency in MICA Paramedic advanced clinical practices, eg. rapid sequence induction;
  5. undertake the initial function as health commanders in multi-casualty incidents;
  6. demonstrate competency in the management of emergency incidents as a solo practitioner;
  7. demonstrate appropriate ethical, safe and effective practice in the role of solo practitioner;

Assessment

Assignment (2,000 - 2,500 words)(25%)
Advanced Clinical Skills Assessment (Pass/Fail)
Health Commander Multicasualty Simulation (25%)
Clinical Portfolio (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students are required to spend, on average, 12 hours per week on this unit across the semester (156 hours in total) working through self-directed learning materials, participating in tutorials through MUSO and in preparation of unit assessment tasks. Within this total, students are also required to attend 4 days (32 hours) on-campus distributed across the semester.

Prerequisites

This unit is only available to students sponsored by Ambulance Victoria.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill First semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Liz Molloy

Synopsis

This unit will involve participants in the development of their teaching skills, including the theoretical aspects of teaching and learning in a variety of settings.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, participants will be able to:

  1. Plan teaching and learning for a variety of contexts demonstrating participant-centred principles including preparation of learning objectives, teaching resources, aligned objectives, instructional methods and participant outcomes;
  2. Demonstrate competence as a teacher and the ability to reflect constructively on own skill and that of others;
  3. Compare and contrast individual perspectives on teaching and learning with a range of theoretical models;
  4. Analyse a range of contemporary practices in health professional education with

particular reference to the implications of learner diversity, flexible delivery and

teaching development;

  1. Compare different educational approaches across a variety of health professions and consider strengths and weaknesses in relation to own teaching practice.

Assessment

Teaching practical and plan (30%)
Teaching sequence plan (40%)
Analytical reflection on the teaching sequence plan (10%)
Teaching portfolio (20%).

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill Term 2 2013 (Off-campus block of classes)
Notting Hill Term 2 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Liz Molloy

Synopsis

This unit will provide participants with the opportunity to develop their knowledge and skills in the area of clinical teaching. Participants will explore the theories that have been developed to classify, explain and describe different approaches to clinical teaching and learning. In doing so, participants will be expected to draw upon experience from their own teaching evidence, from the approach of their own professional group and also information from other health professions.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, participants will be able to:

  1. Describe recent and current trends in clinical teaching within health professional education
  2. Demonstrate effective planning, preparation and delivery of clinically focused teaching activities including effective communication and feedback to students and colleagues;
  3. Identify roles, responsibilities and attributes of the clinical teacher, exploring the notion of the 'good clinical teacher' and the evidence available of what 'good' might signify;
  4. Apply a model of psychomotor skills development and critically appraise its use in health care teaching and learning environments;
  5. Critically evaluate contemporary teaching methods used to bridge the theory to practice gap in clinical education;
  6. Explore the impact that cultural diversity has on clinical teaching and learning experiences in the health professions;
  7. Identify and describe factors that influence 'fitness to practice' and develop strategies to deal with the underperforming student

Assessment

Teaching plan and practical (30%)
Written assignment Analytical paper (2500-3000 words)(30%)
Critical incident analysis (30%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill Second semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Margaret Hay

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide participants with the opportunity to develop their knowledge about assessment and to extend and refine their use of assessment techniques. One of the unit's aims is to develop participants' expertise both as an examiner and as a member of teams considering assessment data. It has been designed to utilize participants' existing expertise in assessment and to begin to integrate their studies in the Graduate Certificate in Health Professional Education.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit participants will be able to:

  1. Describe the role of assessment in influencing student learning behaviour and the learning process;
  2. Identify and apply the principles of educational assessment in professional healthcare teaching;
  3. Critique the range of assessment tools that can be used in the effective delivery of health professional education and select appropriately to assess a range of skills, knowledge and attitudinal characteristics in different contexts;
  4. Design a number of assessment tools appropriate to clinical and scientific teaching

contexts;

  1. Implement standard setting procedures for assessment;
  2. Describe and distinguish between the uses of formative and summative assessment procedures;
  3. Describe and distinguish between the uses of formative and summative assessment procedures;
  4. Describe and distinguish between assessment and performance in health professions and the implication this has for assessment;
  5. Outline the interface between Continuing Professional Development, assessment and reaccreditation in health professions.

Assessment

Assessment practical and plan (30%)
Assessment critique (30%)
Written assignment/analytical paper (2500-3000 words)(30%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill Second semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus block of classes)
Notting Hill Term 4 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Fiona Kent

Synopsis

MEU9004 will introduce participants to the concepts, terminology and development processes of curriculum design. The unit will focus upon the basic principles of curriculum development as they apply to the variety of organisational settings represented by the course participants. Participants will also be introduced to change management processes and evaluation skills. The unit is designed to be practical in its focus and will build upon the perspectives introduced in MEU9001-9003.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Identify the educational theoretical perspectives relevant to their own teaching environment;
  2. Apply the principles of constructive alignment to designing curriculum
  3. Differentiate between various models of educational evaluation;
  4. Perform basic evaluation skills such as development/adaptation of instruments and conducting of interviews;
  5. Outline effective educational change management processes including the drivers, barriers and catalysts to implementation
  6. Design a change management plan to facilitate a change in educational practice that will address the perceived need

Assessment

Curriculum development project (45%)
Evaluation Plan (45%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off-campus students:
Ten (10) hours per week

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.


3 points, SCA Band 1, 0.0625 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill Term 2 2013 (Off-campus)
Notting Hill Term 4 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Liz Molloy

Synopsis

In this unit course participants will choose one of the following study options:

  1. Supervision in health professional education;
  2. Negotiated individualised project of personal relevance to the participant.

Outcomes

Study option 1

Supervision

On completion of this unit participants will be able to:

  • Define clinical supervision, preceptorship and mentoring and compare and contrast these different supervisory roles within health professional education;
  • Examine barriers and drivers to change in educational innovation in supervision;
  • Analyse the implications of the implementation of a review or change to the supervisory model used within their current teaching or workplace setting.

Study option 2

Individualised project

On completion of this unit participants will be able to:

  • Develop an applied education project proposal;
  • Plan and implement the project;
  • Evaluate the project process and outcomes using appropriate evaluation methods;
  • Prepare a project report appropriate to their workplace settings.

Assessment

Literature review (30%)
Supervision plan development / project report (60%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off-campus students:
Six (6) hours per week


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill First semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Margaret Hay

Synopsis

The unit focuses on research in contemporary health professional education. It will provide participants with the opportunity to develop foundation research skills and knowledge tailored to their teaching environment and/or interests.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit, participants will be equipped to:

  1. Outline the significance of educational research to the foundations and development of health professional education and practice;
  2. Demonstrate a sound knowledge-base related to the research process including the ability to critique education and practice;
  3. Critically examine and select methods for educational research in the health professions;
  4. Design appropriate qualitative and quantitative research methods to explore and evaluate education in the health professions;
  5. Articulate key theoretical issues relevant to research in health professional education;
  6. Describe key strategies to promote rigour in research in health professional education;
  7. Develop a submission to gain ethics approval from a university Ethics Committee for an educational research proposal.

Assessment

Systematic literature review (30%)
Ethics application (20%)
Research proposal (40%)
Research portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill Second semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Margaret Bearman

Synopsis

Simulation is now a widely used teaching and learning strategy in health professional
education. This unit will provide you with the opportunity to explore the use of simulation as a means of learning professional and clinical skills. You will have the opportunity to examine the theoretical basis, design, planning and implementation features, and evaluation processes related to the implementation of simulation. A full range of simulated methods will be examined including case based learning, professional and clinical skills acquisition using simulated patients, authentic e-learning environments and low, medium to high fidelity clinical simulators. You will be required to critically evaluate the feasibility, usability and 'fit for purpose' characteristics of a range of simulated educational experiences. You will also
have the opportunity to 'showcase' an example of simulation related to your own teaching practice.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit participants will be able to:

  1. discuss the historical and theoretical basis that underpins the use of simulation;
  2. compare and contrast the different types of simulations used in health professional education;
  3. critically evaluate the educational efficacy of the use of simulation;
  4. describe and analyse simulation debriefing methods;
  5. design a simulated learning experience or program in a specific health professional context based on best evidence practice and with links to curricula and outcomes;
  6. construct an evaluation plan of the simulated learning experience or programme.

Assessment

Simulated program design and evaluation plan (3,000 words)(50%)
Written assignment (2,500-3,000 words)(40%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus with compulsory study days.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill First semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Notting Hill Second semester (extended) 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Liz Molloy

Synopsis

MEU9013 will provide participants with the opportunity to integrate their knowledge
of educational theory, assessment and evaluation while developing, with constructive feedback, educational initiatives appropriate to their own educational roles e.g. new ways of bedside teaching, lecture delivery, initiating small group work, redeveloping an examination or assessment package. Each participant's project will be individually supervised.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit participants will be able to:

  1. complete a reflective analysis of their educational practice in a specific context;
  2. review their own practice in light of the educational literature in the field;
  3. identify and describe an educational initiative related to their own practice, through

critical analysis of course documentation, course evaluation, or through student feedback or assessment data;

  1. design and evaluate a new, or modify an existing course or educational programme

based on current educational theory;

  1. create a report based on the initiative to address all elements of the curriculum

innovation and its evaluation in relation to the literature.

Assessment

Individual project (90%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off-campus students:
Ten (10) hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitHealth Professions Education and Educational Research Team
OfferedNotting Hill Term 2 2013 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Margaret Bearman

Synopsis

This unit will provide participants with the theoretical, practical and technical knowledge and skills related to working within a range of simulation environments. It will introduce participants to the practical strategies related to planning, designing and delivering simulation-based learning. Specific detail of the unit will include clinical skills and simulation scenario development, planning and designing simulation activities, equipment familiarity and implementation methods and logistics.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, course participants will be able to:

  1. Describe the simulation modalities used in healthcare along with their rationale;
  2. Describe levels of fidelity in a simulation context;
  3. Demonstrate familiarity with a range of simulation tools and technologies
  4. Differentiate between theories and models of psychomotor skills development;
  5. Demonstrate effective planning, preparation and delivery for teaching a procedural skill;
  6. Describe the phases of a simulation scenario and the different impact each phase has on the learning experience;
  7. Design a simulation session according to best practice, inclusive of preparation, delivery and debriefing components.

Assessment

Teaching practical and plan (30%)
Development of a clinical simulation scenario plan (40%)
Annotated bibliography (20%)
Teaching portfolio (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off campus with compulsory study days


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Henry Taub

Synopsis

This unit is a compulsory core unit for the Grad.Dip.Family Medicine and MFM(Clin) and covers the following content: medicine as a science, the science and art of medicine, the technology and craft of medicine, health and illness, sickness and disease, aetiology, diagnosis and prognosis, concepts of healing, history and philosophy of general practice, conceptual framework of general practice, roles and tasks of the general practitioner, general practice in the community and community health, future directions of general practice and the academic general practice: general practitioners in the university setting.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Accurately define and describe the nature of the discipline of general practice including its history, philosophy and practice;
  2. Compare and contrast general practice with other medical specialities;
  3. Appreciate the significance of patient centredness in differentiating general practice from other disciplines;
  4. Understand the role of the general practitioner as the gatekeeper of the health care system and the implications of this role in providing cost effective primary medical care to the community;
  5. Recognise the potential for growth in the academic aspects of general practice in the future and the contribution that graduates from this course can make to this growth;
  6. Appreciate the nature and scope of general practice research including similarities and differences to research in other medical disciplines;
  7. Acquire knowledge and skills in a number of chosen areas of special interest as defined in the elective units of this course.

Assessment

Journals (P/F), Assignment 1 (35%), Assignment 2 (25%), Assignment 3 (40%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Peter Schattner

Synopsis

This is a compulsory core unit for the Grad.Dip in Family Medicine and MFM(Clin) courses. Students are expected to explore the following areas; introduction to methodology, history of general practice, scope and nature of general practice research, study designs, qualitative versus quantitative research, the epidemiology basis of general practice research, descriptive, observational and experimental studies, getting started, including literature surveys, critical appraisal of journal articles, research protocols, descriptive and inferential statistics, data analysis, questionnaire construction and survey techniques and writing papers and giving presentations on research.
The unit is designed to take a logical path from framing a researchable question to developing a plan, implementing it, obtaining and then analysisng results, and finally writing the project up. Introductory concepts of statistical analysis will be included, but students will not be expected to have a detailed working knowledge of this difficulty subject area.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. understand the nature and scope of research in general practice;
  2. understand and be able to implement the methods used in answering questions that arise out of general practice;
  3. critically appraise the medical literature;
  4. develop an enthusiasm for doing your own research;
  5. gain some practical experience in doing research projects.

Assessment

Students will be expected to complete 4 written assignments plus an MCQ

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Michal Schneider-Kolsky

Synopsis

This is a compulsory core unit for the Master of Medical Ultrasound course. Students are expected to explore the following areas; introduction to methodology, scope and nature of research in medical imaging, study designs, qualitative versus quantitative research, descriptive, observational and experimental studies, getting started, including literature surveys, critical appraisal of journal articles, research protocols, descriptive and inferential statistics, data analysis, questionnaire construction and survey techniques and writing papers and giving presentations on research.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students should be able to:

  1. Understand the nature and scope of research in Medical Ultrasound;
  2. Understand and be able to implement the methods using in answering questions that arise out of Medical Ultrasound;
  3. Critically appraise the medical literature;
  4. Develop an enthusiasm for doing individual research;
  5. Gain some practical experience in doing research projects.

Assessment

1 x 3000 word Qualitative research project assignment: 20%
1 x 2000 word Critical appraisal assignment: 15%
1 x 2000 word Research protocol assignment: 15%
1 x Statistics assignment: 10%
1 x 4000 word Questionnaire survey assignment: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Completion of the Graduate Diploma in Medical Ultrasound or equivalent


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Allocated Supervisor

Synopsis

This unit forms a compulsory core unit for the MFM course and aims to provide students with the following: demonstrate critical appraisal and organisational skills required of academic general practitioners with respect to research in general practice, carry out independent and collaborative research in general practice at a level expected of a Masters graduate, contribute to body of knowledge of general practice through its literature and publications and ultimately supervise research projects of a nature comparable to those required of Masters graduates.

Outcomes

This unit forms a compulsory core unit for the MFM course and aims to provide students with the following:

  1. The ability to demonstrate critical appraisal and organisational skills required of academic general practitioners with respect to research in general practice;
  2. The ability to carry out independent and collaborative research in general practice at a level expected of a Masters graduate;
  3. The ability to contribute to a body of knowledge of general practice through its literature and publications and ultimately supervise research projects of a nature comparable to those required of a Masters graduate.

Assessment

Minor thesis (P/F)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter Barton

Synopsis

This unit is a compulsory core unit for the MFM(Clin) course. It discusses the general practitioner as a learner and a teacher, what is learning, what is teaching, instructional design, educational technology, small group process, large group process, assessment and evaluation.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit participants should be able to:

  1. Enhance the knowledge and skills of students in the areas of learning and teaching family medicine;
  2. Enable students to apply these skills in a range of educational settings, including the consultation, groups of lay people, medical undergraduates and postgraduates, peers and allied health professionals;
  3. Recognise the nature of assessment and program evaluation;
  4. Carry out assessment and simple evaluation tasks (Masters students) which indicate that an appreciation of these areas has been achieved;
  5. Demonstrate and record two teaching sessions which reflect an acquisition of the microskills of teaching (all students).

Assessment

Journals (40%), Classroom presentations (60%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of General Practice
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Notting Hill First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Notting Hill Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Peter Schattner

Synopsis

This unit is a compulsory core unit for the MFM course and is designed to assist students in the development of their research project. It covers such issues as starting a project, measurement, project management, funding a research project, statistical planning, data analysis, collaborative research, and research in general practice.

Outcomes

The overall aim of this unit is to give the participant sufficient practical experience and knowledge to enable them to undertake their own research project. The principle objectives are to give the participant an understanding of and experience in:

  1. Practical issues concerned with research e.g. funding, support and logistic issues;
  2. Technical issues, e.g. the role of computers and statistical analysis;
  3. Management issues, e.g. managing a research team, administering a project;
  4. Conducting a project from the development of an idea to publishing the results. This last objective is in reference to working through several stages of a project which could become the basis of a Master's thesis in the final year of the course.

Assessment

Literature Review (15%), Reliability and Validity Study (10%) Funding Application (20%), Ethics Application (20%), Pilot Study (35%)

Chief examiner(s)


8 points, SCA Band 1, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)TBC

Synopsis

Students will undertake the first of three 42-day placements in a health organisation under the supervision of a health psychologist who is a member of the APS College of Health Psychologists. Placement seminars, which will be held at the residential schools, will cover topics relevant to the professional practice of health psychology. No more than 42 days of the total placement requirement can be undertaken at the student's current employment. Students will be required to register as a probationary psychologist with the Victorian Psychologist Registration Board before they commence this placement.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this placement unit students will:

  1. appreciate the role of health psychologists working in rural and remote health organisations and the interface between health psychology and other health professions;
  2. have learned assessment and treatment skills and the preparation and delivery of health promotion programs.

Assessment

Three placement reports (500 words each): 30%
Case study (1500 words): 20%
Supervisor's reports : 50%
Student logbook: hurdle requirement

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Five-day on-campus workshop

Prerequisites

MHP5011, MHP5032, MHP5051,

Co-requisites

MHP5072

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


8 points, SCA Band 1, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)TBC

Synopsis

Students will undertake the second of three 42-day placements in a health organisation under the supervision of a health psychologist who is a member of the APS College of Health Psychologists. Placement seminars, which will be held at the residential schools, will cover topics relevant to the professional practice of health psychology. No more than 42 days of the total placement requirement can be undertaken at the student's current employment.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this placement unit students will:

  1. appreciate the role of health psychologists working in rural and remote health organisations and the interface between health psychology and other health professions;
  2. have learnt assessment and treatment skills and the preparation and delivery of health promotion programs.

Assessment

Three placement reports (500 words each): 30%
One case study (1500 words): 20%
Supervisor's reports: 50%
Student logbook: hurdle requirement

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Five-day on-campus workshop

Prerequisites

MHP5011, MHP5032, MHP5051, MHP5072, MHP5102

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


8 points, SCA Band 1, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)TBC

Synopsis

Students will undertake the third of three 42-day placements in a health organisation under the supervision of a health psychologist who is a member of the APS College of Health Psychologists. Placement seminars, which will be held at the residential schools, will cover topics relevant to the professional practice of health psychology. No more than 42 days of the total placement requirement can be undertaken at the student's current employment.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this placement unit students will:

  1. appreciate the role of health psychologists working in rural and remote health organisations and the interface between health psychology and other health professions;
  2. have learnt assessment and treatment skills and the preparation and delivery of health promotion programs.

Assessment

Three placement reports (500 words each): 30%
One case study (1500 words): 20%
Supervisor's reports: 50%
Student logbook: hurdle requirement

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Five-day on-campus workshop

Prerequisites

MHP5011, MHP5032, MHP5051, MHP5072, MHP5102, MHP5081, MHP5112

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Penny Hasking

Synopsis

This is the third, and final, unit in the formal requirements for completion of the Research Thesis - Master of Psychology (Health). Students will be required to recruit participants and collect data in accordance with their initial research design and proposed analysis. Students will continue to work closely with their research supervisor to collect and analyse data. Students will complete and submit their Research Report for evaluation. Students are also required to submit a poster which summarises their research. The poster will be displayed at an appropriate on-campus school. Supervision will continue until the report is submitted and students will be encouraged to consider both the strengths and limitations of their research as well as to address any directions for future research in their chosen research area.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate their ability to manage data collection and analysis
  2. Work collaboratively with a research supervisor to achieve research milestones
  3. Write to an appropriate academic standard by incorporating existing research findings and supervisor feedback
  4. Have experienced and responded appropriately to the realities of research project issues (e.g., ethical and practical issues surrounding confidentiality, data management)
  5. Demonstrate the capacity to write in a format and style appropriate to an academic publication
  6. Analyse and present data in a clear, concise and systematic manner
  7. Recognise the strengths and limitations of their research design
  8. Suggest directions for future research in their specialist area
  9. Experience the practicalities of research project management

Assessment

Progress report (hurdle requirement)
Poster presentation (hurdle requirement)
Research report. (5,000-7,000 words)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

MHP5011, MHP5051, MHP5032, MHP5052, MHP5062 or MHP5071, MHP5082, MHP5072, MHP5191, MHP5081, MHP5192

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick First semester 2013 (Day)
Berwick First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick Second semester 2013 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is the first of the formal requirements of the project or minor thesis component of many of the Masters degrees in the faculty. Students will identify a research project, develop the research question and protocol including the conduct of a literature review. This is a core unit and must be undertaken as part of a minor thesis or project enrolment.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit student's will be able to:

  1. Describe the theoretical basis behind their topic and research design
  2. Develop a research question
  3. Demonstrate a collaborative and critical approach to research
  4. Identify the issues related to the conduct of the proposed research

Assessment

Literature review up to 4000-5000 words (hurdle requirement)
Research proposal up to 1500-2000 words (hurdle requirement)
Contact with supervisor (hurdle requirement)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

12 hours or 156 hours per semester.

Prerequisites

Pre-requisites may be applicable depending on the course you are enrolled in. Please contact to your department course administrator who will be able to assist.

Prohibitions

MFM2001, Any MRU unit.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick First semester 2013 (Day)
Berwick First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick Second semester 2013 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This is the second unit in the formal requirement for the completion of either a project or minor thesis, as part of a Masters degree in the Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences. . Students will be required to complete an ethics application and to finalise specific issues surrounding their choice of research design, data collection methods and participant recruitment procedures. Students will work closely with a research supervisor to decide upon an appropriate site and source of data and to secure appropriate approvals from any relevant organisation (e.g., multiple ethics applications may be required). Satisfactory progress in relation to the research is a prerequisite for enrolment in the next unit in the research thesis sequence.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate their awareness of ethical and privacy issues as they apply to their research proposal;
  2. Work collaboratively with a research supervisor to achieve research milestones (e.g., submission of ethics proposal);
  3. Write to an appropriate academic standard by incorporating existing research findings and supervisor feedback;
  4. Respond appropriately to the realities of research project issues including identification of a research site (or sites) and recruitment of participants.

Assessment

Students will be required to submit Progress Report 2 (100%)
Complete and submit a Monash SCERH ethical application (hurdle requirement).

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

12 hours or 156 hours per semester.

Prohibitions

MFM2001, Any MRU unit.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick First semester 2013 (Day)
Berwick First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick Second semester 2013 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This is the third unit in the formal requirements for completion of the research thesis/project. Students will be required to recruit participants and collect data in accordance with their initial research design and proposed analysis. Students will continue to work closely with their research supervisor to collect data and to begin to analyse preliminary results. Satisfactory progress in relation to the research is a prerequisite for enrolment into the final unit in this research sequence.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate their ability to manage data collection and analysis;
  2. Work collaboratively with a research supervisor to achieve research milestones;
  3. Write to an appropriate academic standard by incorporating existing research findings and supervisor feedback;
  4. Have experienced and responded appropriately to the realities of research project issues (e.g. ethical and practical issues surrounding confidentiality, data management, etc).

Assessment

Students will be required to submit Progress Report 3 (hurdle requirement) (100%).

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

12 hours per week or 156 hours per semester.

Prohibitions

MFM2001, Any MRU unit


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick First semester 2013 (Day)
Berwick First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick Second semester 2013 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Berwick Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Hong Kong Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This is the fourth unit in the formal requirements for completion of the research thesis/project. Students will complete and submit their Research Report for evaluation. Supervision will continue until the report is submitted and students will be encouraged to consider both the strengths and limitations of their research as well as to address any directions for future research in their chosen research area.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate the capacity to write in a format and style appropriate to an academic publication;
  2. Analyse and present data in a clear, concise and systematic manner;
  3. Recognise the strengths and limitations of their research design;
  4. Suggest directions for future research in their specialist area;
  5. Be experienced in addressing the practicalities of research project management.

Assessment

Research report (5,000 - 7,000 words)
Post presentations (hurdle requirement)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

12 hours per week or 156 per semester.

Prohibitions

MFM2001, Any MRU unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pam Snow

Synopsis

Modules include psychological development, the sociology of childhood and adolescence, and principles of communication, intervention & referral.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit students will have a significant grounding in theoretical perspectives of child and adolescent development; a knowledge of developmental stages and transitions; an understanding of the impact of development on a child's sense of self, relationship with family and others and with educationalists.

Students will:

  1. Gain knowledge about the classification, aetiology, natural history and main treatment approaches to the most serious and prevalent mental disorders in school aged children;
  2. Develop skills in the detection of significant mental disorders;
  3. Have an overall conception of the relationship of infant, child and adolescent in the structure of family, school and community, their place in their predominant culture and their role and responsibilities in relationship to the community at large;
  4. Develop a clear notion of the prevailing conceptions of infancy, childhood and adolescence in the fields of anthropology, sociology and psychoanalysis;
  5. Gain an understanding of the infant, child and adolescent in the structure of the family with particular reference to the formative experiences that take place within that structure;
  6. Gain an understanding of critical examination of the position and needs of the child and adolescent as perceived by educational policies and institutions:
  7. Be able to analyse some typical problems of the child and the adolescent face, vis a vis the family, the school system and the community, including particular problems that arise in a multicultural society such as racial intolerance and racism.

Assessment

Three written assignments approx. 2,000 words each (30% each)
Participation in threaded discussion groups (10%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pam Snow

Synopsis

Modules include specific psychiatric & psychological syndromes, interventions in the classroom and school, and a case study discussion of classroom difficulties.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit students will:

  1. have a grounding in and an understanding of practical measures that can be adopted in the school in response to perceived emotional difficulties in the individual child.
  2. be able to differentiate between difficulties that can be managed within the school setting and those that require further referral.
  3. have a working knowledge of procedures that they can adopt to effect such referrals.

They will therefore:

  1. have increased their practical understanding and recognition of mental distress exhibited in the school setting;
  2. be able to differentiate between minor emotional difficulties and more serious mental disturbances;
  3. develop an understanding of measure that they can themselves adopt within the classroom of school to ease the emotional distress of their students;
  4. have an appropriate understanding of how and to whom referrals should be made in more serious cases.

Assessment

Three written assignments approx. 2,000 words each (90%) (30% each)+ Participation in threaded discussion groups (10%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pamela Snow

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students will have acquired a knowledge of practical counselling skills and had some experience in practicing them. They will also learn about the phases of change which individuals go through in the process of first becoming aware of a problem to its resolution. Since the counselling of students raises questions related to development, students will gain some knowledge of personality development and how different personal styles affect counselling.

Outcomes

  1. To increase knowledge about the nature of counselling and its applications in educational settings;
  2. To develop skills in conceptualising presentations;
  3. To improve basic skills in engaging and counselling troubled people in acute and chronic situations;
  4. To develop a plan to evaluate interventions and develop plans for future counselling.

Assessment

Written case presentation, with a case formulation (20%)
Oral case presentation, with recommendations, description of intervention and its evaluation (30%)
Essay on one aspect of counselling, the nature of anxiety, depression, anger; and aggression or a process of counselling such as the counselling relationship, empathy, evaluation of counselling or a topic to be approved by the convenor (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

2 day on-campus workshop

Prerequisites

MHT4001 (MHT0001) and MHT4002 (MHT0002)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Pamela Snow

Synopsis

Upon completion of this unit, students will have significant grounding in observation method and the role of participant observer; increased capacity to reflect upon and to manage in their own roles at school; a capacity to understand and analyse group dynamics in the class-room, the school, and the wider educational system; and knowledge of factors that foster a learning environment at school.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. gain skills in observation method in the role of participant observer, and a capacity for self reflection;
  2. gain knowledge and understanding of the parameters of their own roles as teachers, including matters of responsibility, accountability and authority to act, and physical and psychological boundaries related to roles and territories in a school;
  3. develop an understanding of dynamics of relationships between teachers and other members of a school community, from the perspective of psychoanalytic systems and sociological conceptual frameworks;
  4. increase awareness of their own responses and behaviours in small and large groups;
  5. develop a capacity to analyse group dynamics in school systems, including differences in small and large groups, from the perspective of established conceptual frameworks; 6. develop an increased understanding of typical fears within a school community, and a capacity to identify work practices that function to defend against associated anxieties;
  6. gain knowledge of factors that help to create a learning environment in class-rooms and the wider school community;
  7. demonstrate a capacity to observe and to analyse group dynamics in the field, and to communicate findings orally and in a written report.

Assessment

Report - 50%
Presentation and process notes - 40%
Participation in online discussion forum - 10%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Two day on-campus workshop

Prerequisites

MHT4001 (MHT0001) and MHT4002 (MHT0002)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biro (Clayton), Ms Maureen Miles(Gippsland)

Synopsis

An introduction to normal pregnancy and childbirth and the role of the midwife in providing care for women.
This unit will provide the foundational knowledge to enable midwifery students to provide safe and effective midwifery care to healthy mothers and babies across the childbearing continuum, incorporating anatomy and physiology and the evidence basis for maternity care.
The focus will be on the role of the midwife as a primary carer and working in partnership with women.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. describe in detail the anatomy & physiology of the human reproductive system, including; pre-conception, pregnancy, fetal development, birth, lactation and the baby;
  2. appreciate the boundaries of care in midwifery including legal, ethical and professional standards and competencies;
  3. appreciate the concepts of with woman, in partnership, and continuity of care;
  4. employ reflective practice and implement evidence based care for women, babies and their families across the childbearing continuum;
  5. articulate a beginning philosophy of midwifery;
  6. demonstrate developing skills necessary to provide women-centred midwifery care;
  7. demonstrate beginning skills in physical assessment of women and their babies across the childbearing continuum
  8. demonstrate midwifery competency based upon the ANMC National Competency Standards for the Midwife (2006).

Assessment

Written assignment (2500 words) 30%
Reflective exercises (2 x 400 words each) 10%
Guided study activities (online participation) 10%
Examination (compulsory pass required) 50%
Assessment of midwifery practice skills pass/fail

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at study blocks held on-campus at Gippsland and Clayton


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biro (Clayton), Ms Maureen Miles (Gippsland )

Synopsis

An introduction to complex pregnancy and childbirth and the role of the midwife in providing care for women experiencing problems.
Students will develop their existing knowledge/skills by working with women and other members of the healthcare team when problems arise during pregnancy, labour & birth, and the first weeks after birth.

The students will also acquire foundational knowledge of the care of babies with special needs. Students will have the opportunity to study the circumstances that commonly result in a baby being admitted to a Level Two Nursery. The issues confronting the infant and family during this period will be explored and the role of the midwife in facilitating health and wellbeing of the family. Students will reflect upon and debate the ethico-legal issues involved in care of the baby with special needs. Emphasis is given to the collaborative role of the midwife, consultation and referral, use of medical technology & intervention, and the implications for women, their babies, and midwives themselves.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to: -

  1. utilise knowledge from the biosciences applicable to woman experiencing complex pregnancy and childbirth;
  2. describe and identify common embryological and fetal developments that give rise to abnormalities;
  3. examine specific medical and obstetric conditions that affect childbearing;
  4. evaluate the implications of obstetric interventions for the woman and midwifery practice;
  5. demonstrate skills in the management of emergencies in childbearing;
  6. demonstrate understanding of the circumstances that may necessitate admission of a baby to a Level Two nursery;
  7. evaluate the Level Two Nursery environment and its impact upon the baby and family;
  8. utilise the clinical decision making process to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the care required by the baby and the family;
  9. demonstrate an appreciation of the family's need for privacy, dignity and respect, as well as their right to be informed and to make decision regarding care of their baby;
  10. demonstrate the ability to practice within a multidisciplinary team in an environment of complexity;
  11. facilitate woman's access to appropriate community resources; and
  12. demonstrate midwifery competency based upon the ACMI Competency

Standards.

Assessment

Written assignment (2500 words) 30%
Guided study activities 20%
Exam (Compulsory pass required) 50%
Assessment of midwifery practice skills Pass/Fail

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at study blocks held on-campus at Gippsland and Clayton

Prerequisites

MID5001 Woman midwife partnerships and normal childbearing


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedGippsland First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anne Biro (Clayton), Ms Maureen Miles (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit addresses the need for students to adequately understand what it means to be a professional midwife through exploring issues that impact upon the role of the midwife. These issues include socio-cultural, historical, political, regulatory, legal, ethical and institutional factors that affect midwifery and maternity service delivery at local, national and international levels. Against these factors the role of midwifery as primary health care will be explored in relation to health promotion and education in pregnancy, birth, parenting and lactation, and fertility regulation. This unit works to put into context for the student, the nature and scope of midwifery practice, its interaction and relationships with powerful others in the maternity service milieu, its relationship to consumer activist and advocacy groups, and its role in the community.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Describe the development of the midwifery profession, from historical and current perspectives;
  2. Define the scope of midwifery practice and provide a critique of this scope against the International Definition of a Midwife (ICM WHO);
  3. Develop a critique of maternity service delivery in Australia informed by professional literature, government reports and observation and experience;
  4. Debate legal and ethical considerations for midwifery practice, including the statutes and regulations that govern and regulate midwifery, especially where they limit midwifery from reaching its espoused scope of practice;
  5. Analyse the roles and functions of professional organisations, locally, nationally, and globally, that have an impact on the delivery of midwifery services and the health and well-being of women and babies;
  6. Describe the various models of midwifery care available for the childbearing woman and analyse the factors that limit or facilitate the choices they might make;
  7. Critique the role and ability of research to inform social policy and professional attitudes in relation to the availability of maternity care choices;
  8. Examine and debate micro and macro political, social and cultural and ethico-legal factors that impact on birthing women and midwives;
  9. Debate the ability of midwifery as a profession to advocate for women and to work with women for improvement in maternity services;
  10. Demonstrate theoretical understanding and skills development in education and counselling for health promotion in relation to breastfeeding and fertility regulation, and preparation for childbirth and parenting;
  11. Discuss the role of the midwife as primary health provider; and
  12. Demonstrate midwifery competency based upon the ACMI Competency Standards.

Assessment

Abstract and poster presentation 30%
written assignment 40%
guided study activities 30%
Assessment of midwifery practice skills Pass/Fail

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held on campus at Gippsland. (Gippsland only)

Prerequisites

MID5001 Woman midwife partnerships + MID5002 Extending midwifery partnerships.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen Miles

Synopsis

Consolidation of midwifery practice is required for students to be able to effectively function as registered midwives on completion of their course. This unit provides students with a comprehensive and clinically focused preparation and assessment for transition to practice as competent registered midwives. Students will have the opportunity to apply the theory explored throughout the course to extend and develop confidence in their practice. It is required that students will be employed in midwifery practice for a minimum of 4 days per fortnight in addition to their studies. Individual learning objectives will enable students to undertake a critique of institutional practices, policies, procedures and protocols whilst engaged in remediation, consolidation or extension of midwifery practice skills.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate comprehensive evidence-based knowledge for midwifery practice;
  2. Critique the suitability of application of levels of evidence to particular aspects of maternity care;
  3. Debate the usefulness and suitability of specific evidence based practice and best practice standards in their application in maternity care;
  4. Demonstrate ability to research, collate and present evidence for improvement of midwifery care;
  5. Demonstrate sound clinical decision making skills based on evidence, experience and collaboration and consultation;
  6. Provide individualized, holistic midwifery care that meets psychosocial and physical needs;
  7. Demonstrate individualized socio-cultural sensitivity (women-centred midwifery) in midwifery;
  8. Demonstrate competence in the provision of discerning, discriminating, safe midwifery care in a variety of contexts and complexity of environment;
  9. Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the legal and ethical issues for midwifery practice;
  10. Critique self as an agent of change in maternity care;
  11. Demonstrate a critique of self as an emerging midwife and as a life-long learner;
  12. Function in accordance with the Australian College of Midwives Inc. Competency Standards for Midwives.

Assessment

A written portfolio demonstrating the attainment of objectives that form a learning contract will assess student's readiness for the transition to midwifery practice. Students will present their completed work in an individualised portfolio comprising of Research Project 60%
Presentation to peers in a conference format 20% and Written Assignment (155 words) 20%.
Assessment of midwifery practice skills pass/fail.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held oncampus at Gippsland.

Prerequisites

MID5001 Woman midwife partnerships + MID5002 Extending midwifery partnerships + MID5003 Midwifery and maternity in context .


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Ms Carole Gilmour

Synopsis

Advancing Midwifery Practice is a 12 Credit Point theory and practice unit designed to meet the needs of students wishing to develop advanced midwifery skills and knowledge within particular contexts. Midwifery practice in Australia and overseas is increasingly faced with women requiring technological solutions to complex clinical situations. Obstetrics as a profession is shrinking in numbers, and the impact of a lack of professional indemnity insurance has forced the reordering of maternity services. Government policies and reports advocate for an increased role for midwifery in the provision of maternity services at all levels of risk. In many countries around the world midwifery is at the forefront of a range of complexity of maternity care, but the preparation of midwives for complex practice is ad hoc and poorly realised.

This Unit aims to prepare midwives with the knowledge for skills development in complex clinical situations. The unit is structured to allow flexibility and individualisation of the content to better meet the needs of individual practitioners and their practice settings. Theoretical knowledge will include pathophysiology, technology, evidence and practice issues related to skills clusters. These clusters include: Prenatal, Perinatal, Postnatal and High Risk.

Opportunities will be given for students to gain experience in high-level maternity services in order to complete clinical competencies. Students will understand the requirement and processes necessary for evidence based practice and will gain skills for its implementation in an environment that might be resistant. Students will have the opportunity to critique self and context in relation to evidence in practice. Students will also identify potential for developing collegial and collaborative relationships to other maternity service providers within a practice setting (eg medical practitioners, allied health professionals, nurses and community groups). Portfolio of work, tutorial presentations and participation

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit students will be expected to:

  1. Demonstrate knowledge and skills for advanced midwifery practice in collaborative and/or autonomous roles;
  2. Demonstrate sound clinical decision making skills based on evidence, experience and collaboration and consultation;
  3. Provide individualised, holistic midwifery care that meets complex psychosocial and physical needs;
  4. Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the legal and ethical issues for midwifery practice;
  5. Demonstrate ability to identify skills and knowledge deficits in self and others within the student's own maternity context;
  6. Demonstrate ability to critique and promote the role of the midwife in contemporary maternity services;
  7. Demonstrate sophisticated interdisciplinary communication and negotiation skills for the advancement of quality in maternity care; and
  8. Demonstrate ability to monitor and improve own practice in accordance with Australian College of Midwives Competency Standards for Midwifery Practice and the Nurses Board of Victoria Code of Practice for Midwives.

Assessment

Written Assignment (60%)
Tutorial Presentation (20%)
Participation in online discussion (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Mary Anne BiroMs Maureen Miles (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the interrelationship of midwifery practice, maternity care and public health. The impact of maternity care on maternal and infant health will be discussed within the context of its social determinants. The role of midwifery and maternity care in improving perinatal outcomes for disadvantaged women and families will be discussed and debated. Against these factors the role of midwifery as primary health care will be explored in relation to health promotion and education in pregnancy, birth, parenting and lactation, and fertility regulation. This unit works to put into context for the student, the nature and scope of midwifery practice and places it as central to securing improved maternal and infant health outcomes.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Examine women's experiences as recipients of health and maternity care, paying particular attention to socio-economic and cultural difference;
  2. Examine the particular health and cultural needs of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander childbearing women and families in historical context;
  3. Develop an understanding of their own values and beliefs, and the challenge presented when working with women who are different from themselves;
  4. Analyze the concept of cultural safety and the implications for midwifery practice;
  5. Discuss the social determinants of health and ill health in relation to childbearing and their impact on perinatal outcomes;
  6. Demonstrate theoretical understanding and skills development in education and counselling for health promotion in relation to breastfeeding and fertility regulation, and preparation for childbirth and parenting;
  7. Critically examine the role of the midwife as primary health care provider for women of diverse cultures and ethnic backgrounds;
  8. Describe the various models of midwifery care available for the childbearing woman and analyse the factors that limit or facilitate the choices they might make;
  9. Critically examine screening in pregnancy in its public health context and the ramifications for maternal and infant health;
  10. Explore the impact of contemporary living and lifestyle factors on maternal and infant health during the childbearing year and beyond;
  11. Discuss maternity care and its impact on long term maternal and infant health;
  12. Critique the role of midwifery in the broader context of public and primary health care provision;
  13. Demonstrate competence in the provision of discerning, discriminating, safe midwifery care in a variety of contexts and complexity of environment based upon the ANMC National Competency Standards for the Midwife (2006).

Assessment

Written assignment (3000 words) 30%
Guided questions (2 x 1000) 30%
Abstract and poster presentation (public health issue) 40%
Assessment of midwifery practice skills Pass/Fail

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24 hours per week

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at study blocks held on-campus at Gippsland and Clayton

Prerequisites

MID5001 Woman midwife partnerships and normal childbearing + MID5002
Woman midwife partnerships and complex childbearing


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Mary Anne BiroMs Maureen Miles) (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit addresses the need for students to understand what it means to be a midwife by exploring a range of contextual and professional issues. These will include socio-cultural, historical, political, regulatory, legal, ethical and institutional factors that affect midwifery and maternity services at local, national and international levels. This unit also provides students with a consolidation of midwifery clinical practice to support the transition to registered midwife. Individual learning objectives will enable students to undertake a critique of institutional practices, policies, procedures and protocols.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Describe the development of the midwifery profession, from historical and current perspectives;
  2. Discuss historical and contemporary issues in the development of maternity services in Australia and internationally
  3. Define the scope of midwifery practice in contemporary Australian maternity care and provide a critique of this scope against the International Definition of a Midwife (ICM);
  4. Analyse the roles and functions of professional organisations, locally, nationally, and globally, that have an impact on the delivery of maternity services and the health and wellbeing of women and babies;
  5. Examine the politics of childbirth and develop a critique of maternity service delivery in Australia informed by professional literature, government reports and observation and experience;
  6. Discuss the legal and ethical requirements related to maternity practice;
  7. Debate the ability of midwifery as a profession to advocate for women and to work with women for improvement in maternity services;
  8. Critically examine midwifery practice and identify issues where evidence is required;
  9. Develop the ability to appraise a systematic review of the literature on an aspect of midwifery clinical practice;
  10. Demonstrate comprehensive evidence-based knowledge for midwifery practice;
  11. Demonstrate competence in the provision of discerning, discriminating, safe midwifery care in a variety of contexts and complexity of environment based upon the ANMC National Competency Standards for the Midwife (2006).

Assessment

Essay (2500 words) 20%
Clinical Practice project 60%
Presentation to Peers 20%
Assessment of midwifery practice skills Pass/Fail
Completion of midwifery portfolio Pass/Fail

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Attendance at residential schools held on-campus at Gippsland and block schools oncampus at Clayton

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held on-campus at Gippsland and block schools on-campus at Clayton

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Assessment

Major thesis
minor coursework as specified by the enrolling department.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Catherine Kealley and Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit will cover the physical principles and properties of ionising and non-ionising radiation; the production of ionising and non-ionising radiation; interaction of ionising and non-ionising radiation with matter. Introduction to medical radiations instrumentation, image and data formation and principles of quality assurance.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will:

  1. Explain in detail the scientific concepts and properties of ionising and non-ionising radiation.
  2. Categorise and describe the various types and sources of ionising and non-ionising radiation;
  3. Explain the production of ionising and non-ionising radiation.
  4. Describe the physical processes involved in the interaction of ionising and non-ionising radiation with matter;
  5. Recognise and describe the basic design features and operating principles of medical radiation equipment;
  6. Outline the quality assurance principles and techniques applicable to medical radiation equipment.

Assessment

One written examination (three hours)(70%)
Two assignments (1500 words each)(30%)
Hurdle requirement:
Hurdle: All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Catherine Osborne and Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

This is the first of three units dealing specifically with the principles and applications of medical radiations in the assessment and treatment of disease and injury. The unit will cover protocols and operating procedures, radiation safety, occupational health and safety, infection control, documentation procedures, sectional anatomy and pathophysiology.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe and explain a range of medical radiations applications;
  2. Define the positive patient identification technique and explain its application;
  3. Describe procedural techniques, including rationale, patient preparation and care, patient positioning, optimization of equipment and materials, images and/or data obtained, documentation and results;
  4. Explain how patient images and data are acquired and optimized for diagnosis and therapy;
  5. Recognise anatomic structures and pathophysiology in multiple planes on medical images;
  6. Describe relevant radiation & occupational health and safety standards;
  7. Describe the theories of communication and reflective practice in relation to the professional role of the medical radiation science practitioner.

Assessment

Three hour examination (50%)
One hour image recognition examination (20%)
Two, 3000 word assignments (30%)
Hurdle requirements:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit: and
Successful completion of the Clinical Orientation Workbook.

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Brad Cassels and Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit will cover the biological effects of ionizing and non-ionising radiation on cells & tissues; mechanisms of repair to biological damage, systemic & total body responses to early/late effects of radiation, hereditary effects and effects on the embryo & foetus; principles of dose reduction and the relative potential hazards present in different procedures; estimation of risk assessment using accepted theories of dose vs. response; modifications to procedural techniques to maximise the information produced from a particular dose of ionising or non-ionising radiation.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe the major bio-effects of ionising and non-ionising radiation and explain the severity and risks associated with these bio-effects;
  2. Describe the known biological effects of ionising and non-ionising radiation on cells and tissues;
  3. Calculate the radiation dose in a variety of medical radiation scenarios;
  4. Appraise the current scientific theories relating to the risk associated with radiation dose;
  5. Explain the principles of radiation safety and protection.
  6. Explain the rationale used to determine the most appropriate procedure with regard to biological effects
  7. Describe the modifications to procedural technique, required to maximise the benefit from a particular dose of ionising or non-ionising radiation: and
  8. Explain the principles of ALARA and justify the medical use of ionising and non-ionising radiations.

Assessment

Written examination (three hours)(70%)
Two x 1500 word assignments (30%)
Hurdle requirements:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with an overview of professional issues that relate to the practice of medical radiations. Topics include theories related to health psychology and how disease and injury affect patients and their carers; the effects of working in a health care environment on practitioners; medico-legal and ethical issues; communication, cultural competence and working with patients with special needs; reflective practice and professional portfolio development.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe relevant theories of health psychology and health behaviour and their application in the delivery of medical radiation services;
  2. Explain the medico-legal and ethical principles relevant to the practice of medical radiations science;
  3. Discuss communication theories and describe how these apply to professional practice;
  4. Explain cultural competence and describe its relevance to professional practice;
  5. Discuss the issues related to dealing with patients with special needs;

Assessment

Examination (2 hours)(50%)
Two written word assignments (2000 words each)(50%)
Hurdle requirement:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Catherine Kealley and Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit covers advanced medical radiations physics and instrumentation concepts including future forms; digital image processing and advanced image and data optimisation; instrument performance and quality assurance.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe the structure, performance characteristics and future forms of medical radiations instrumentation
  2. Assess the relative advantages and disadvantages of different medical radiations systems
  3. Critically discuss the principles of digital image processing and image reconstruction, including advanced concepts
  4. Demonstrate problem solving skills in relation to digital image processing and describe how images may be optimised and corrupted
  5. Discuss the application of PACS and other information technology systems used in medical radiations
  6. Define and implement quality assurance measures in clinical practice

Assessment

Written examination (three hours)(70%)
Two assignments (1500 words each)(30%)
Hurdle requirement:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Catherine Osborne, Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

This is an integrated unit based on two themes of the medical radiations science curriculum. Theme 1 - continues the study of the principles and applications of medical radiations in the assessment and treatment of disease and injury. This theme builds on the Medical Radiations Science 2 unit and introduces more clinical applications. The unit will cover protocols and operating procedures, radiation safety, occupational health and safety, infection control, documentation procedures, sectional anatomy and pathophysiology. Theme 2 - is a five week clinical placement that will allow students to develop further clinical and professional skills to intermediate beginner level.

Outcomes

Theme 1:

On successful completion of this theme students will be able to:

  1. Describe and explain a range of medical radiations applications.
  2. Define the positive patient identification technique and explain its application.
  3. Describe procedural techniques, including rationale, patient preparation and care, patient positioning, optimization of equipment and materials, images and/or data obtained, documentation and results.
  4. Explain how patient images and data are acquired and optimized for diagnosis and therapy
  5. Recognise anatomic structures and pathophysiology in multiple planes on medical images
  6. Describe relevant radiation & occupational health and safety standards.

Theme 2:

On successful completion of this theme students will be able to:

  1. Apply the principles of anatomy and pathophysiology in the clinical environment;
  2. Use human communication theories when dealing with patients and staff;
  3. Employ clinical departmental protocols for patient identification, preparation and positioning;
  4. Apply the principles of radiation safety to practice;
  5. Apply the principles of infection control and occupational health and safety to practice;
  6. Operate within a multi-disciplinary team;
  7. Modify patient interactions in light cultural and religious differences;
  8. Implement administrative work practices, including the management of resources;
  9. Begin to integrate knowledge from previous clinical experience;
  10. Demonstrate the characteristics of an intermediate beginner reflective practitioner.

Assessment

Examination (3 hours)(50%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour)(10%)
Two assignments (3000 words each)(30%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)
Hurdle requirement:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Summer semester A 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright and Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

This clinical placement unit of 10 weeks will allow students to begin developing both their technical and professional skills within the field of Medical Radiation Science. This unit will also provide students with the opportunity to practice infection control, occupational health and safety, radiation safety; communication and administrative skills. Students will demonstrate the characteristics of a beginning reflective practitioner.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Apply the principles of anatomy and pathophysiology in the clinical environment;
  2. Use human communication theories when dealing with patients and staff;
  3. Employ clinical departmental protocols for patient identification, preparation and positioning;
  4. Apply the principles of radiation safety to practice;
  5. Apply the principles of infection control and occupational health and safety to practice;
  6. Operate within a multi-disciplinary team;
  7. Demonstrate the characteristics of a beginning reflective practitioner;
  8. Modify patient interactions in light cultural and religious differences;
  9. Implement administrative work practices, including the management of resources.

Assessment

Five case reports (50%)
Clinical Skills Assessment (10%)
Written Assignment (2000 words)(40%)

Hurdle requirements:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit; and
Successful completion of Professional Practice Portfolio.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

10 weeks clinical placement

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Catherine Osborne

Synopsis

This is the third and final unit dealing with the principles and applications of medical radiations in the assessment and treatment of disease and injury. It aims to utilise the knowledge and understanding gained in the previous two units to further develop the student's understanding of more clinical applications. The unit will cover protocols and operating procedures, radiation safety, occupational health and safety, infection control, documentation procedures, sectional anatomy and pathophysiology.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe and explain a range of medical radiations applications;
  2. Define the positive patient identification technique and explain its application;
  3. Describe procedural techniques, including rationale, patient preparation and care, patient positioning, optimization of equipment and materials, images and/or data obtained, documentation and results;
  4. Explain how patient images and data are acquired and optimized for diagnosis and therapy;
  5. Recognise anatomic structures and pathophysiology in multiple planes on medical images;
  6. Describe relevant radiation & occupational health and safety standards.

Assessment

Examination (3 hours)(50%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour)(20%)
Two assignments (3000 words each)(30%)

Hurdle requirement:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kellie Knight and Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the principles and practice of scientific research. A range of research methodologies will be explored together with the collection, analysis and interpretation of data, methods of communication and subsequent critique of the findings. The unit will also introduce the evidence based practice paradigm and how research findings can influence patient care and management. Practical experience in evidence based practice will be gained through the completion of a review of the literature, relevant to the student's professional discipline.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe the role of research in medical radiations science;
  2. Appraise the scope of research conducted in medical radiations science;
  3. Evaluate different methods of knowledge acquisition and synthesis and be aware of the moral, ethical and legal responsibilities of scientific investigation;
  4. Explain basic research concepts and methodology and the different approaches in research in both qualitative and quantitative experimental design;
  5. Collect and appraise evidence and research findings relevant to their professional discipline;
  6. Define evidence based practice, and discuss its implications for health care delivery in medical radiations science and patient care;

Assessment

One 2000 word research plan (40%)
One 4000 word evidence based literature review (60%)

Hurdle requirement:
All elements of assessment must be passed to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Caroline Wright

Synopsis

This unit is a period of professional clinical experience undertaken in the workplace to enable students to develop competency. Students will practice under the supervision of qualified staff, and a clinical workbook will be provided to enable students to document their professional and technical development.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Apply their knowledge to the practice of Medical Radiations;
  2. Demonstrate initiative, problem solving and decision making skills;
  3. Act in a responsible, safe and ethical manner and apply these principles to practice;
  4. Complete specified tasks and procedures within appropriate time frames;
  5. Demonstrate effective communication skills with patients, carers and members of the health care team;
  6. Incorporate the evidence based paradigm into their practice ;
  7. Recognise the limitations of their knowledge and experience and seek advice when required;
  8. Practice their profession at the level of the competent practitioner.

Assessment

Hurdle requirements:
1. Pass each end-of-semester final clinical skills assessment and portfolio submission
2. Pass the end of year clinical moderation in planning, treatment and professional reflection.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

47 weeks of continuous clinical placement

Prerequisites

Co-requisites


3 points, SCA Band 2, 0.0625 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


8 points, SCA Band 2, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


24 points, SCA Band 2, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is an extension of the minor thesis unit enrolled in to gain extra time to complete minor thesis work.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Simon Albrecht

Synopsis

This is a non-assessable unit designed for students to be enrolled in whilst completing their thesis

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Simon Albrecht

Synopsis

Students are required to conduct a research project based on the research proposal. This will involve collecting data and analysing it in an appropriate manner. Students will be required to submit written progress reports to their supervisors at regular intervals throughout the year. Students will write up the research in the form of a research report.

Assessment

Thesis -research paper (5-7,000 words) - will be examined by two internal examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr D Magliano / Prof F Cicuttini

Synopsis

To be taken concurrently with MPH5041 together they are prerequisites for clinical epidemiology elective units. Contents: rates, sources of data, descriptive & analytical epidemiology, epidemiological study designs, critical appraisal of literature, screening, prevention, exposure assessment, outbreak investigation, confounding & bias.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Understand the differences between descriptive and analytical epidemiology;
  2. Explain the concepts of study question, study population, sampling strategy, exposure assessment, bias and confounding;
  3. Understand the strengths and weaknesses of different epidemiological study designs and apply this knowledge to the selection of appropriate study designs;
  4. Critically analyse epidemiological papers from the medical research literature in order to identify the main study question/s, study design, study populations and sampling strategy using epidemiological principles;
  5. Evaluate the inadequacy of exposure assessment in epidemiological studies and appreciate the consequences of poor exposure assessment;
  6. Interpret the results of epidemiological studies, solve problems relating to the use of the epidemiological concepts, parameters and study designs and calculative relative risks, incidence rates and odds ratios from simple data.

Assessment

Assignments (25%)
Examination (75%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 contact hours per week for on-campus students.

Off-campus attendance requirements

2 day compulsory on-campus block for off-campus students.

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr B Billah

Synopsis

This unit is taken concurrently with MPH5040. Together they are prerequisites for clinical epidemiology elective units. Contents includes: classification of medical data; summarizing data using simple statistical methods and graphical presentation; sampling distribution, quantifying uncertainty in the sample results and statistical distributions; comparing two/more groups/methods using hypothesis test or p-value and 95% confidence interval; assessing the association between outcome and exposure using chi-squared test; risk comparison (RR & OR); prediction of an event or identifying risk factors for an event of interest where the event is measured in continuous scale; prediction of an event or identifying risk factors for an event of interest where the event is recorded in binary scale (yes/no); sample size calculation.

Students are required to have access to a calculator equipped with elementary scientific functions (e.g. Casio FX-100) and a statistical package for data analysis e.g. SPSS, PRISM, STATA (help will be available with SPSS only. Note: Students don't have provision to borrow SPSS CD from Monash; they may have to lease/buy it from SPSS.

Outcomes

On the completion of this unit, students will have developed the ability to:

  1. Describe, summarise, and graph data appropriately;
  2. Analyse elementary data using a statistical computer package;
  3. Identify different probability distributions and their parameters;
  4. Quantify uncertainty in research results using biostatistical methods;
  5. Apply the appropriate statistical methods to basic research questions;
  6. Perform simple statistical analyses, report their findings and interpret their results;
  7. Critically appraise the statistical aspects of research publications in health care.

Assessment

Written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 contact hours per week for on-campus students.

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 day on-campus block for off-campus students.

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Professor J Ibrahim

Synopsis

This unit will examine the health impacts of climate change, and the relevance of this to the principles and practices of public health. Informed by an understanding of the fundamental role of climate stability for sustained population health, and of evidence for anthropogenic global warming, the focus of the unit will be on direct and indirect mechanisms through which climate change could impact on health, including extreme weather events, changing patterns of vector-borne disease, water-borne infections, food quality and availability, air quality, and social disruption. There will be an emphasis on evidence for past and predicted health effects, health burden magnitude and distribution, and the complex interplay between population and environmental factors that influence vulnerability. Students will apply this knowledge to critically appraise adaptation and mitigation initiatives from a public health perspective, and will be expected to engage with current climate change issues and communicate their ideas clearly and effectively.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this subject students will be able to:

  1. Articulate the fundamental role of climate stability as a prerequisite for sustained population health.
  2. Distinguish between concepts of climate, climate variability and long-term climate change.
  3. Critically appraise evidence for anthropogenic global warming and climate change, and demonstrate an understanding of predicted climate scenarios.
  4. Outline the basic principles and tools of public health practice, and discuss their application to minimise the health impacts of climate change.
  5. Identify the potential mechanisms through which climate change could impact directly and indirectly on health, and of the complex interactions between these and other population and environmental factors.
  6. Discuss the magnitude and distribution of the health burden of climate change.
  7. Outline factors that influence the vulnerability of populations to the health impact of climate change, and apply this knowledge to critically appraise public health preparedness and response initiatives.
  8. Discuss adaptation and mitigation initiatives to minimise the health impact of climate change, using a public health prevention framework.
  9. Clearly and effectively communicate fundamental concepts of climate change science, climate change health impacts, and public health responses.

Assessment

Critical appraisal assignment: (500 words) (20%)
Reflective essay: (2000 words)30%
Participation: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 hours over 2 block days.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)A/Professor R Wolfe

Synopsis

Confounding and effect modification, logistic regression, conditional logistic regression for matched case-control studies, linear regression, diagnostics to assess model fit, model estimation methods, Poisson regression for rates, Stata statistical software.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will have:

  1. learnt regression methods as applied to epidemiological data.
  2. gained an understanding of regression methods in terms of the epidemiological concepts of confounding and effect modification.
  3. the skills to apply regression methods to example datasets using statistical software on a laptop computer.
  4. gained an understanding and the skills to interpret regression methods in published articles on epidemiological research studies.

Assessment

Two written assignments (50% each)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 x 2 Block days.

Prerequisites

Both MPH5040 and MPH5041

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor M Abramson

Synopsis

The unit will cover applications of epidemiological techniques to clinical research including discussions of evidence, therapy, causation, variation and agreement, the normal range, diagnostic test selection, validation and interpretation, natural history and prognosis, bias, generalisability, systematic reviews and clinical guidelines.

Outcomes

On completion of this subject students should be able to critically appraise evidence relating to the causation, diagnosis, natural history, treatment and prognosis of disease.

Assessment

Written / online weekly assessment tasks 50%
Final assignment 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 days

Prerequisites

Both MPH5040 and MPH5041

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr E MacFarlane

Synopsis

Environmental influences on health including physical, chemical and biological hazards as well as principles of assessment, management and control of environmental health risks.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Nominate the important chemical, physical and biological factors in the environment and the risks to health from environmental factors in Australia.
  2. Demonstrate fluency with the terminology used to describe chemical, physical, and microbiological hazards encountered in the community.
  3. Critically appraise epidemiological literature related to environmental health risks.
  4. Relate methods to identify common hazards in environmental media such as water, air and food, and methods to assess the degree of risk presented by these hazards.
  5. Nominate common interventions used to control environmental health risks and prevent injury, including standard setting, and the key personal, social and economic factors that inhibit, control or lessen their impact.
  6. Effectively and sensitively communicate information and principles about environmental hazards and risks.

Assessment

Written assignments (70%)
Online discussion (10%)
Online exam (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

OCL plus 3 day block

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr R Hall

Synopsis

Epidemiology and control of chronic diseases. Overview of important chronic diseases in Australia in 2011, and strategies for their prevention and control. Measurement of disease and burden of disease; concept of risk factors and risk factors for important chronic diseases; the effect of social and economic factors on the epidemiology of chronic diseases; impact of chronic diseases on society and the economy; smoking, nutrition and physical activity as risk factors for important chronic diseases; cardiovascular diseases and their prevention; oral diseases and their prevention; injuries and their prevention; respiratory diseases and their prevention; cancers and their prevention; screening as a public health tool; health promotion as a public health tool; use of evidence in public health programmes to prevent chronic diseases.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, the successful student will:

  1. be able to describe the epidemiology and burden of chronic diseases in Australia
  2. understand the causal pathways leading to important chronic diseases
  3. be able to describe strategies for the public health control of chronic diseases
  4. understand the role of public health evidence in the control of chronic diseases

Assessment

Online class tasks (50%) and written assignments (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 days

Co-requisites

Both MPH5040 and MPH5041

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr A Wluka

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the research methods used in observational studies and is designed to help the student develop the practical skills required in the design and assessment of a research project. It covers issues in protocol design, including study type selection, introduction to questionnaire design, sampling methods, and ethics approval. This introduces the student to planning data management and statistical analysis and developing a study budget. An introduction to the role of qualitative research is also covered.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student should be able to:

  1. Pose a research question answerable by observational study methods used in public health research
  2. Design, present and assess a research protocol to answer the stated question using observational study designs
  3. Describe how information may be collected from people and transformed into usable data for scientific study
  4. Identify when qualitative methodologies may be useful
  5. Demonstrate the ability to participate in a group.

Assessment

Assignments (40%)
Examination (50%)
Participation (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

For Option 1: 2 hours per week;
For Option 2: 15 contact hours over 2 days
OCL
Note: these options are not interchangeable midway through semester.

Prerequisites

Both MPH5040 and MPH5041

Prohibitions

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor K Leder, Dr R Hall

Synopsis

Importance of transmission source, host and organism factors in infectious disease epidemiology. Outbreak investigation, surveillance of infectious diseases, prevention/control strategies, mathematical modelling of infectious diseases and of impact of immunity. Includes discussion of infection control, vaccines, exotic and emerging diseases.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit participants will be able to:

  1. Identify the unique aspects of infectious disease epidemiology and understand relevant terminology;
  2. Recall and apply strategies used in the prediction, detection and control of infectious disease outbreaks;
  3. Understand the epidemiologic principles underlying surveillance programs and evaluate surveillance systems;
  4. Understand the epidemiologic principles underlying disease control and prevention strategies;
  5. Recognise the potential role of mathematical modelling in relation to infectious diseases.

Assessment

Online participation (60%)
Class presentation (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 Block days

Prerequisites

Both MPH5040 and MPH5041

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr D Glass

Synopsis

How to recognise, evaluate and control hazards in workplaces arising from substances, sound, radiation and micro-organisms. Principles and practice of occupational hygiene including the use of simple instruments, ventilation, personal protective equipment and workplace substances laws. Hygienic standards and their various forms and notations. The difficulties of assessing prior exposures for medico-legal and epidemiological purposes

Outcomes

  1. nominate the important hazards and risks to health from work in Australia;
  2. demonstrate fluency with the terminology used to describe chemical, physical and microbiological hazards;
  3. identify common hazards and describe the measurement of exposure from these hazards;
  4. nominate common interventions used to control workplace risks; and
  5. effectively communicate information about occupational hazards and risks.

Assessment

Multiple choice tests (50%)
Web-based tasks (20%)
Workbook (5%)
Written assignment (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

20 hours contact over 3 days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor C Reid

Synopsis

This unit will equip students with the skills for the design, implementation and analysis of randomised controlled clinical trials. It will enable student to formulate research question, select and recruit study subjects, compare groups, conduct randomisation, interpret findings, manage outcomes and consider issues of ethics, budget and quality assurance.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. design a protocol for a randomised controlled clinical trial;
  2. appraise a protocol of a randomised controlled clinical trial;
  3. describe the ethical and regulatory process required for the conduct of a clinical trial.

Assessment

Written assignments (80%)
Online assessment (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 days.

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days

Prerequisites

MPH5213
This unit assumes a basic understanding of the principles of informed consent

Co-requisites

Both MPH5040 and MPH5041

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Helen Ackland and Assoc Prof Alistair Nichol

Synopsis

An overview of measures and issues in clinical research; sampling and inference; selecting items, reducing items and creating aggregate scores; inter-rater and intra-rater reliability; reliability and interval consistency of responses; assessing the validity of measures; responsiveness of measures to significant clinical change; strategies for gathering data; wording of questions and design of response categories; data entry and management and handling of missing data.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. apply measurement principles and methods in the critical assessment;
  2. develop measures employed in clinical and epidemiological research.

Assessment

Written/online weekly assessment tasks 50%
Final assignment 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 Contact hours over 2 days

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 contact hours over 2 days

Co-requisites

Both MPH5040 and MPH5041

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Prof R Buchbinder

Synopsis

Critical appraisal of literature reviews; problem formulation and protocol development; intra-rater agreement for assessment of relevance; validity assessments; data collection forms; variation between study findings, combining the findings of independent studies, inferences based upon overviews; statistics of meta analysis, Cochrane Collaboration.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. critically appraise literature reviews;
  2. perform a systematic review of randomized controlled trials.

Assessment

Group presentation of a systematic review (70%)
Individual critical appraisal of a published literature review (20%)
Online participation (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Both MPH5040 and MPH5041

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr R Stuckey

Synopsis

The effects and human cost of occupational disease and injury, occupational health and safety law, worker's compensation, negligence, occupational rehabilitation, historical achievements and challenges, international and national organisations.

Outcomes

This unit aims to provide an introduction to occupational health and safety. On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. describe the human and economic cost and causes of workplace injury and death;
  2. explain the intent and structure of the legal framework of OHS, including the roles of:
    1. Robens type legislation;
    2. OHS representatives;
    3. OHS committees;
    4. worker's compensation;
    5. common law;
    6. unions;
  3. describe various injury models;
  4. demonstrate an understanding of OHS and rehabilitation program and service management;
  5. describe the impact on OHS of contemporary work patterns in Australia and internationally.
  6. discuss some of the achievements and future challenges of OHS.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (15%)
Assignments (45%)
Examination (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 block days

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a Postgraduate course

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr D Goddard

Synopsis

The psycho-social effects of work on individuals is explained from a preventive viewpoint. Mental illness and its effect on employment is considered. Also disability discrimination and equal employment opportunity legislation, employee assistance programs and workplace health promotion.

Outcomes

  1. demonstrate knowledge of the concepts of stress and how it can be managed;
  2. discuss the causes and management of absenteeism;
  3. demonstrate knowledge of disability and equal employment legislation;
  4. develop, implement, and evaluate a health promotion program;
  5. describe the principles of managing a drug and alcohol program;
  6. discuss the health effects of shift work and the design of rosters to minimise adverse effects; and
  7. describe the concepts underlying organisational psychology.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (20%)
Assignments (40%)
Online test (10%)
Examination (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 Block days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr D Glass

Synopsis

Prevention of human disease resulting from workplace exposures to chemical and biological hazards. Covering toxicological principles, health effects of the major groups of chemical substances, as well as biological hazards from blood and bodily secretions, water, food, animals and travelling abroad.

Outcomes

On completion of this subject students should be able to:

  1. nominate groups of commonly encountered substances, giving examples of each;
  2. relate the principles of toxicokinetics and the metabolism of foreign substances by the human body;
  3. describe the common and well-known adverse effects from substances and biological agents;
  4. access and interpret information about the health effects of substances and biological agents;
  5. describe the common and important infections spread by water, food, air, blood and animal secretions;
  6. describe methods to control the spread of such infections;
  7. describe what is meant by immunity, allergy and vaccination;
  8. effectively and sensitively communicate information about risks due to substances and biological agents

Assessment

Multiple choice test and short answer test (10% each);
Web based tasks (20%)
Short essay (15%)
Written assignment (25%)
Presentation (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

18 contact over 4 days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr R Stuckey

Synopsis

Introduction to principles & practice of ergonomics. Occupational hygiene as applied to physical hazards: noise, radiation, thermal environments & pressure effects.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. describe the properties and effects of common physical hazards;
  2. conduct simple measurements related to ergonomic and physical hazards and interpret the results;
  3. demonstrate the use of an hierarchical approach to controlling hazards and risk;
  4. conduct an workplace risk assessment using a systems model;

Assessment

Web-based tasks (10%)
Written assignments (45%)
Examination (30%)
Multiple Choice tests (15%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 block days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Trimester 2 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms B Laidlaw

Synopsis

Aspects and influences on child and adolescent public health from a local and international perspective. History and development of public health as it relates to children, mental health, public health policies, injury prevention, disability, indigenous and cross-cultural issues, the impact of poverty and disadvantage, oral health, health screening and surveillance, genetic testing, nutrition, health promotion, international health, families, and health lifestyles.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. have a detailed understanding of the philosophies, principles, and practices of child public health;
  2. be able to confidently research, plan, and evaluate a program designed to meet the health needs of children and young people in the community, with an emphasis on those with a particular disorder or disability;
  3. understand the differing and similar issues facing children and young people across developing/developed countries and the dynamics that impact within the contrasting environments;
  4. understand the special impact of children and young people as they interface with legal issues, such as violence, maltreatment, varying legislation, human rights and advocacy;
  5. be familiar with health screening and surveillance issues for children and young people, and the particular issues for pertinent age groups;
  6. demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of the nutritional determinants of health and disease in children and young people both within Australia and internationally;
  7. have an understanding of the physical, social and cognitive stages of growth and development and the differing ways of assessing them in infants and children;
  8. demonstrate use of the range of tools and instruments available to assess the health status, well-being, health outcomes, and quality of life of children.

Assessment

Written assignments 70%
Oral presentation 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

5 day intensive block at Melbourne University

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Term 3 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr C Morgan / Ms E Kennedy

Synopsis

This subject will provide an overview of the history, principles and practice of primary health care in developing countries, as well as the interaction between primary healthcare and current trends in global health and international development.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Describe the principles and elements of primary health care;
  2. Explain how primary health care has evolved and the issues that have shaped its development;
  3. Outline important cross-cutting issues in PHC and the role of primary healthcare in health systems strengthening;
  4. Describe the importance, variety and roles of community health workers and peripheral service delivery in primary health care;
  5. Describe the strategies taken to maximise the likelihood of PHC succeeding as a health care system at community, district and country levels;
  6. Explain the role of global agencies; aid programs and other international health interventions in primary health care services;
  7. Outline the role of community knowledge, attitudes and practices and health care seeking behaviours in primary health care;
  8. Summarise important issues in the financing of primary health care;
  9. Demonstrate how PHC principles and practices may apply to current global health issues including control of communicable diseases (including HIV infection), urbanisation, ageing and chronic diseases.

Assessment

Written task (3,00 - 4,000 words) 60%
Group presentation (20%), Individual reflection (1,000 words) on group work (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

6 x 4 weekday contact hours
1 x 7 weekend contact hour
5 day block

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 2 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Alfred Hospital Term 3 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr B Coghlan; Mr C Hagarty

Synopsis

Rapid appraisal of community health needs; public health surveillance; population surveys; survey sampling methods; measuring mortality; measurement of the burden of disease; program monitoring; quality assurance in primary healthcare; using health data for decision making; participatory evaluation of health programs; and applied health research.
This unit aims to develop students' competence in the basic quantitative and qualitative tools used to manage community-based primary health care programs, including needs assessments, planning and evaluation, health information collection, and operations research in a developing country setting.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:
Develop competence in the basic qualitative tools used to manage community-based primary health care programs, including assessments, planning and evaluation, health information collection, and operations research in a developing country setting.

Assessment

Written assignments: 1 x (40%)
1 x (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

5 day intensive block

Prerequisites

Either MPH5040 and MPH5041 or ECX9720

Prohibitions

Students completing MPH5249 cannot undertake MPH5213

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 2 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr N Gray

Synopsis

This unit provides an overview of women's and children's health in resource poor settings using a life cycle approach. It explores the current health status of women and children; analyses the determinants of women's and children's health in poor communities; provides an introduction to program planning, implementation, management and the evaluation of effective strategies; and includes specific sessions on reproductive health; maternal, newborn and child health; adolescent health; children's rights; gender; disability; and healthy ageing.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should:

  1. Understand the place of women's and children's health on the international health agenda, and the primary influences on policy development in this area;
  2. Have increased knowledge and understanding of the determinants of women's and children's health in low income settings;
  3. Understand the evidence base for effective interventions to improve women's and children's health and to increase access to, and the quality of, women's and children's health services.

Assessment

Written assignments (45%)
Group Presentation (15%)
Short answer examination (40% ).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

6 day intensive block (weekdays only)

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr E Kennedy

Synopsis

The unit will cover the epidemiology and burden of disease of existing and emerging communicable diseases of public health importance in developing countries. The Unit introduces students to a comprehensive evidence based approach to communicable disease control at both the individual and population level, including health promotion, disease prevention and case management. Drawing on practical examples and case studies, students will gain an appreciation of the challenges and approaches to the control of communicable diseases in resource-constrained settings.

Outcomes

This Unit aims to equip students with an understanding of the key principles and practice of communicable disease control and an appreciation of the challenges and effective approaches in resource-constrained settings. By the end of this Unit students should be able to:

  • Identify the main communicable diseases of public health importance in developing countries and demonstrate an understanding of their epidemiology, burden of disease and determinants;
  • Demonstrate an understanding of the principles of disease control at both an individual and population level;
  • Describe evidence-based interventions for the control of major communicable diseases; and
  • Demonstrate an understanding of the challenges and approaches to communicable disease control in resource-constrained settings.

Assessment

Exercise 15%
Essay 45%
Short-answer examination 40%.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

8 x 4 weekday contact hours

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 1 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor M Toole

Synopsis

Public health consequences of complex humanitarian emergencies involving armed conflict, population displacement, food scarcity and an outline of the critical public health interventions in these settings.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. To analyse the casual factors of public health emergencies related to conflict and population displacement;
  2. To identify the major public health and nutrition priorities in humanitarian crises;
  3. To develop relevant public health assessment and response skills in emergency settings;
  4. To recognise the need for a multisectoral approach to reducing the health impact of emergencies.

Assessment

Short answer examination 50%
Written assignment 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

7 day intensive block

Prerequisites

Either MPH5040 and MPH5041 or ECX9720

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor M Toole

Synopsis

Food security & nutritional issues in developing countries, emphasising causal factors, field programs addressing famine & under nutrition.

Outcomes

On completion of this subject, students will be able to:

  1. identify and classify the major nutrients required for good human health and well-being;
  2. analyse the major global and local determinants of adequate human nutrition;
  3. assess the nutritional status of individuals and populations;
  4. diagnose and manage acute malnutrition in children and adults;
  5. identify the causative factors in the evolution of population nutrition emergencies;
  6. plan programs to rehabilitate malnourished communities and to maintain and strengthen household food security;
  7. understand the impact of rapid social, economic, and behavioural change on human nutrition in the form of chronic, non-communicable diseases.

Assessment

Short answer examination (50%)
Written assignment (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 x 2 weekday contact hours and 3 x 7 weekend contact hours

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr B Crammond and Dr L Bishop

Synopsis

The interrelationship between public health, human rights and ethics. Includes discussion of aboriginal health, women's health, HIV/AIDS, intellectual property and access to pharmaceuticals, refugee health, complex humanitarian crises amongst other topics analysed from a human rights perspective.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Appreciate the strengths and weaknesses of rights from an ethical perspective and a rights based approach to international law;
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of how such a framework might be applied in analysing health concerns;
  3. Critically evaluate the worth of this framework to contributing to the improvement of human well being.

Assessment

Written assignments mid-semester (30%)
Written assignments end-semester (70%) - on campus students.
Written assignments (60%)
Contribution to online discussion forum (40%) - off campus students.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 contact hours per week for on-campus students.

Off-campus attendance requirements

Weekly reading as required and contribution to online discussion forum

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor B Gabbe

Synopsis

Epidemiology of injury in Australia and Victoria and data and research that underpins current knowledge of major causes, risk factors and vulnerable population groups. Current initiatives (both government and non-government) to address major injury problems in Victoria, including a creative and critical focus on effective countermeasures, prevention programs, strategies and evaluation.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will have an understanding of:

  1. The concept of injury as a preventable health condition.
  2. The burden of injury.
  3. Principles of injury prevention and control.
  4. Data requirements and injury surveilance.
  5. The strengths and limitations of research methods used to define the nature and extent of injury.
  6. Development of injury prevention programs, frameworks for countermeasure development and their evaluation.
  7. Approaches to injury policy and legislation.
  8. Issues in the measurement of injury severity, definition, burden and outcome.

Assessment

Written assignments
Oral presentation

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

5 day intensive block.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)TBC

Synopsis

An overview of Aboriginal health, especially in Victoria. The study of Aboriginal health in Australia often focuses on the health of communities in the remote northern and western areas of the continent. Provide an understanding of the historical, socio-economic and cultural contexts of ill-health in the Aboriginal community; more about learning appropriate questions to ask and appropriate ways of asking them, than trying to only provide solutions. Will also introduce participants to the major health issues and provide practical information about the delivery of appropriate health care and the role of Aboriginal community controlled health services. Participants will be provided with sources of further information and expertise about Victorian Aboriginal community health with a reflection on that in other parts of Australia.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Have an understanding of the social, economic, cultural and political context of health, past and present, in Aboriginal communities.
  2. Have a good understanding of the importance of cultural awareness and cultural safety in working with and for Aboriginal communities.
  3. Be introduced to a brief epidemiology of the public health issues in Aboriginal health.
  4. Understand the model of Aboriginal community controlled health services and a brief history of the Victorian experience.
  5. Have a good understanding of current national and state initiatives and reforms in Aboriginal health, the health sector and their impact on Victorian Aboriginal Community Controlled Health Organisations and services.
  6. Have an understanding of the role of Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal professionals in Aboriginal health.
  7. Have an understanding of the place of appropriate and ethical research concerned with Aboriginal health issues.

Assessment

Case study (15%), Written assignment 3,500-4,000 words (85%).

Chief examiner(s)

TBC

Contact hours

5 day intensive block

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Trimester 2 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms L Renkin

Synopsis

The unit is designed to enhance participants' understanding of HIV, the impact of HIV epidemics throughout the developing world, and the evidence underpinning appropriate programmatic responses to HIV. The unit presents analysis of the risk and vulnerability of individuals and communities to HIV infection, explores the latest evidence and policy developments relevant to prevention, care/support and treatment approaches, and aims to expand participants' skills in developing appropriate evidence-based responses to HIV. Recent shifts in global policy are presented along with a number of case studies drawn from 'real-world' programs to facilitate students' learning

Outcomes

The unit aims to assist participants to:

  1. enhance their knowledge and understanding about HIV virology, epidemiology and the global evidence base;
  2. enhance their understanding of the impact HIV has upon individuals and communities;
  3. understand the relationship between HIV and development, including global influences on policy and implementation of programs, and the link with health systems strengthening;
  4. identify essential elements of effective strategies for preventing HIV transmission and providing treatment, care and support for people infected and affected by HIV, including the integral role of people living with HIV in these strategies.

Assessment

Short-answer examination (40%) Essay 4,000 words (60%).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

7 day intensive block

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr F Hanna / Professor B Oldenburg

Synopsis

This unit will examine policy and systemic approaches to disease prevention and health promotion at the level of individuals and populations in a global world. The major global causes of disease burden, their risk factors and more upstream influences will be examined with respect to policy and system-level approaches. Students will reflect on the complex interplay among evidence, policy and practice in relation to prevention. Case studies from both developed and resource poor countries will be considered. This unit is one of a group of policy units that also include MPH2069 and MPH2072.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of policy development, disease prevention and health promotion and the importance of population-based approached;
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of the different policy approaches to disease prevention and health promotion;
  3. Demonstrate an understanding of the complex interplay between evidence, policy and practice;
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of investment in relation to prevention and the need for sustainable resource allocation;
  5. Describe and evaluate different approaches to prevention and how these impact differentially on populations and their health outcomes; and on populations and their health outcomes; and
  6. Demonstrate an understanding of the different global forces and other dynamics that are both threats and opportunities for disease prevention and health promotion.

Assessment

Written assignments (70%)
Online participation (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 Block days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs E Kennedy

Synopsis

Review of legal management principles related to health care by examining common law principles and statutes. Examination of the Australian legal system, including the Coroner's court, with an emphasis on Victorian and Commonwealth cases and statutes. Focus on key areas of medical and health law such as negligence consent, privacy of health information, clinical research, abortion, euthanasia, mental health, infectious diseases, health complaints and law for health facilities such as hospitals.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of the sources of law and of the legal systems of Victoria and the Commonwealth;
  2. Describe the breadth of law impacting upon the delivery of health services;
  3. Demonstrate an understanding of some key areas of medical law, such as negligence, informed consent, confidentiality, clinical research, abortion, euthanasia, health service law, mental health law, infectious diseases law, health complaints law and coronial law;
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of other areas of law and legal policy as they apply to the health care system including trade practices, contract law, professional registration and malpractice, drugs and poisons law and therapeutic goods law;
  5. Examine the current means of resolving consumer dissatisfaction and debate the merits of alternative methods;
  6. Describe current risk management processes and their implementation;
  7. Demonstrate basic skills in legal argument; and
  8. Demonstrate basic skills in working in a team for the advancement of a legal argument.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (50%)
Written assignments (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 block days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Prof J Stoelwinder

Synopsis

Reviews key management, organisation theory & its application to healthcare settings. The role of the manager, leadership skills, staffing issues including performance management, managing change, structuring organisations for patient care, developing strategy, and designing business plans.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of key management and organisational theories and an understanding of the interface between theory and practice in the management of clinical health care systems;
  2. describe the components of human resource management;
  3. describe sources of power and influence;
  4. describe techniques for managing organisational change and for building effective and adaptive clinical health care systems;
  5. describe the elements of strategic planning;
  6. demonstrate an understanding of the difference between management and leadership;
  7. demonstrate skills in leadership, team building and conflict management;
  8. describe the development and management of networks and strategic alliances;
  9. describe the industrial, technological, political, social and economic factors which impact on the organisation of work in clinical health systems.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (50%)
Written assignments (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 block days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

Historical, political & social factors impacting on quality measurement in health care. Relationship of industrial & health care quality monitoring. Epidemiological & statistical quality measurement principles. Strength & limitations of current monitoring techniques & different sources of health care quality data. Principles of clinical indicator programs, adverse event monitoring, satisfaction surveys & benchmarking. Relationship between evidence based medicine, clinical practice guidelines & quality improvement. Design, implementation & evaluation of quality improvement programs in clinical settings. The content builds on other management units in the program such as MPH5266 and Biostatistics and Epidemiology. It is a core unit of the Graduate Diploma and Master of Health Services Management.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit student should be able to:

  1. Describe the factors that have led to a greater emphasis on quality measurement and improvement in health care.
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of the tools that are used in quality measurement and improvement, including:
    • Clinical indicator programs
    • Adverse event monitoring
    • Satisfaction surveys
    • Benchmarking
    • Evidence based medicine
    • Clinical guidelines
    • Quality improvement programs
    • Accreditation programs
    • Risk management
  3. Apply a knowledge of international quality improvement programs.
  4. Contribute to the debate on quality improvement issues - such as public disclosure of quality measures.
  5. Design and implement quality improvement programs in the clinical setting.

Assessment

Web-based tasks 50%
Written assignments 50%.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 block days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms K Makarounas-Kirchmann / Mr R Cornick

Synopsis

An introduction to basic accounting principles for non-accountants. Financial issues confronting clinical managers including the understanding and interpretation of common accounting reports, budgeting and financial analysis. An introduction to basic economic theory relevant to clinicians and clinical managers, including funding health care services and economics evaluations that guide health care policy and decision making.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

Part 1

  1. Recognise key accounting terms and language.
  2. Illustrate how transactions that affect the economic position of a health care organisation are recorded.
  3. Explain the construction of basic financial statements including balance sheets, income statements, and statements of cash flows.
  4. Analyse and interpret the information contained in basic financial statements.

Part 2

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of different models for financing health services and the cost containment incentives and disincentives associated with each type of payment method.
  2. Relate the principles of management control systems to financial issues in health care.
  3. Demonstrate skills in building, analysing and using a budget.
  4. Explain how to best optimise resource use, and appreciate the role of cost containment strategies.
  5. Evaluate and appreciate the use of health economics as a tool for rational decision-making.
  6. Critically appraise an economic analysis.
  7. Identify the robustness of a pharmacoeconomic evaluation as viewed by Australian decision makers.

Assessment

Web-based tasks 50%
Written assignments 25%
Multiple-choice examination 25%.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 block days


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr C Joyce, Prof B Oldenburg

Synopsis

Delivery of health services is underpinned by a framework of health policies and other health system elements. Health professional leaders and managers, and those who aspire to these roles, need to know about these policies and about the process of policy making so that they can understand why a policy is what it is, and how to engage in the policy making process.

This unit involves a structured review of policy making processes, via WebCT based modules, readings and online tasks, supplemented by workshops with senior health policy practitioners. It considers key challenges and major issues confronting governments and health systems around the world, and how policy can help address these. The unit presents foundation concepts in health policy, which can be extended with further study of health care delivery policies (MPH5272) and/or global health and primary prevention policies (MPH5260).

Outcomes

  1. Understand the policy process
  2. Identify and analyse stakeholder interests
  3. Recognise key current issues on the Australian and global health policy agendas
  4. Locate sources of information guiding health policy content and process.
  5. Critically analyse policies
  6. Evaluate the implications of the political context of policy development
  7. Draw out the policy implications of research evidence and other forms of evidence
  8. Present well-informed, clear, and well-reasoned arguments on policy-relevant questions
  9. Critically reflect on their learning about health systems policy and its application and/or future development

Assessment

Web-based tasks (40%)
Written assignments (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 block days

Prohibitions

MPH5231

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor R Wolfe

Synopsis

Statistical methods for clinical trials data, including design considerations, sequential analysis, bioequivalence and analysis of repeated measures data. Methods for measuring agreement between raters or instruments including kappa statistics and intraclass correlation coefficients. Analysis of survival time data with Cox proportional hazards regression models. Methods for process control. Combination of lectures and data analysis sessions on laptop computers using Stata statistical software.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should have:

  1. learnt statistical analysis methods for the analysis of clinical research data.
  2. gained the skills to apply statistical methods to example datasets using statistical software on a laptop computer.
  3. gained an understanding of the implications of statistical considerations for the design of clinical research studies.
  4. gained an understanding of and the ability to interpret statistical methods in published articles on clinical research studies.

Assessment

Two written assignments (100%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 Block days

Prerequisites

Credit grades in MPH5040 and MPH5041; familiarity with Stata statistical software and MPH5200

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:

://www.med.monash.edu.au/epidemiology/pgrad


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor A Mahal

Synopsis

This unit will examine reform and development in health services from an international, national and local perspective. The focus of the unit will explore the implementation of health policy reform and the multitude of issues, drivers, demands, complexities and consequent impacts related to reform. Areas of concentration include international and national governing entities, the Australian health care system, developed and developing country health systems, roles of institutions (hospitals), an various applications of reform movements/models in care delivery.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of some of the drivers of reform at the 'system', 'institution' and 'care delivery' levels;
  2. Demonstrate an understanding of some of the mechanisms or approaches used in health service reform at the 'system', 'institution' and 'care delivery' levels;
  3. Describe some of the international and national agencies and entities that influence health service reform;
  4. Apply a knowledge of the structure, function and management of the Australian health care system;
  5. Compare and contrast the reform agenda in a sample of developed countries and contrast those with the Australian agenda;
  6. Apply an understanding of the role of hospitals in health service reform;
  7. Reflect on the complexities and challenges involved in implementing reform;
  8. Think critically about the application of various reform movements/models at the 'care delivery' level.

Assessment

Web-based tasks (50%)
Written assignments (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

15 contact hours over 2 block days

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Full year 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Alfred Hospital Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Prof J Stoelwinder and Professor F Cicuttini

Synopsis

The unit is designed to consolidate the theoretical and practical skills acquired in the Master of Health Services Management or the Masters of Public Health by exploring in detail a complex problem within their workplace or within a health care setting.

Alternatively, subject to the approval of the course coordinator, students may seek a limited placement in a health service to explore a particular issue for their case-study. This may include an overseas placement.

The case-study is not intended to be original research. In some instances, this case study might be suitable for submission as the case-study for the Royal Australasian College of Medical Administrators (RACMA) Fellowship.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. identify an issue or a problem of health service management importance;
  2. critically review and evaluate the literature related to an important health service management issue in their workplace;
  3. integrate theory, knowledge and practice in their examination and appraisal of an important health service management issue in their workplace;
  4. demonstrate an ability to reflect on issues and alternative management actions;
  5. describe and justify appropriate health services management action;
  6. demonstrate skills in writing up an assessment of an important health service management issue in a professional report.

Assessment

Written report 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr N Betts

Synopsis

Concepts & practice of Occupational health and safety management systems within work environments, including the conduct of an audit are examined. Includes accident/incident causation theories and models, investigative techniques, reporting & statistics, safety systems, fire prevention & control. Incident causation and accident types, including slips, trips and falls are also examined.

Outcomes

  1. Demonstrate knowledge of the various approaches to providing for the application of Safety Management Systems' and a 'Safety Management Plan' in the workplace;
  2. Demonstrate knowledge of the essential elements required of any 'Safety Management System' for providing safety in the workplace and how each element may be affected by relevant legislation and the role adopted by regulators; and
  3. Advise a company or other organisation on its obligations regarding the selection and introduction of a 'Safety Management System'.

Assessment

Assessment:
Web-based tasks (20%)
Assignments (40%)
Block study participation (40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 day block

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms L Shiel / Prof C Reid

Synopsis

This unit is aimed at research professionals who manage clinical trial data or researchers who wish to develop skills in this area. Students will be given guidance to enable them to develop standards of best practice, be able to assess new technologies to ensure data quality and efficient data processing. Students will be given guidance on accepted practices for clinical data management and for data capture system design and development. Practical skills will be developed through the completion of weekly data management tasks for a hypothetical study, with a database developed using Microsoft Access. Note: Students will require access to Microsoft Access to complete most weekly tasks.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will:

  1. understand good practices in data collection and form design;
  2. be skilled in the practical creation and use databases and statistical packages;
  3. understand techniques in ensuring quality control of data;
  4. understand data storage, backup and archiving procedures;
  5. understand concepts of data confidentiality, access and security.

Assessment

Online discussion participation and questions (10%)
written assignments (60%)
take-home examination (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

2 block days

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Trimester 3 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms C Murphy

Synopsis

Overview of communications and training skills needed for community health work in developing countries. Training strategies for community health work including adult learning principles, theory and application, design and program establishment options, facilitation skills and Participatory methods. Communication strategies for health promotion. Communication skills for effective health management, report writing and cross-cultural communication. Practical approach to design and implementation of training programs and health promotion strategies.

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit fall into three main categories:

  1. Training strategies for community health work:
    1. to gain knowledge of the principles , theory and application of adult learning in relation to participatory training of health workers in developing countries, competency based training, distance learning, training of trainer methods;
    2. to develop skills in the design and establishment of training programs; and
    3. to increase knowledge and gain skills in a range of participatory training methods and facilitation methods.
  2. Communication strategies for health promotion:
    1. to gain knowledge of principles, theory and application of communication strategies for health promotion;
    2. to develop skills in the design and establishment of communication strategies for health promotion; and
    3. to increase knowledge and gain skills in a range of participatory methods for development and delivery of communication strategies for health promotion.
  3. Communication skills for effective health program management;
    1. to further develop skills in report writing and presenting; and
    2. to further develop skills in cross-cultural communication.

Assessment

Assignment (75%), Group Presentation (25%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

6 day intensive block

Prerequisites

Basic computer proficiency

Prohibitions

MPH5216

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr L Bishop

Synopsis

This unit will provide students with the practical knowledge required to plan and undertake a clinical research project with close attention to the highest standards of ethics and Good Research Practice. Students will also gain detailed knowledge in planning, and organizing their knowledge using methods of clinical research in a written and oral format.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, the student will be able to:

  1. Design clinical research projects in a manner that takes account of common ethical issues and proposes satisfactory solutions to overcome them.
  2. Develop an application for approval by an ethics committee and understand the process and requirements of ethical approval.
  3. Develop an understanding of the modus operandi of major funding bodies and the manner by which applications for funding are made.
  4. Develop an in-depth understanding of the proper management of a clinical research project and the steps needed to ensure maintenance of the highest levels of good clinical research practice.
  5. Develop knowledge and appreciation of the main areas of risk involving clinical research and the steps that should be taken to reduce these risks.
  6. Develop skills in the presentation of data in oral and written format and appropriate methods for promoting research funding.

Assessment

Written assignments (70%)
Online posting (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 hours over 2 day block.

Co-requisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr S Jeffcott

Synopsis

This unit provides students with skills and knowledge in the new and exciting field of ''human factors'' and, in particular, how this relates to health and what opportunities exist for patient safety efforts.

Outcomes

By completion of the unit, the student will have:

  1. In-depth understanding of common human factors issues impacting in healthcare settings, what their effect on human performance are hand how other domains can provide lessons for health;
  2. An understanding of human error theories and an appreciation of barriers and safeguards to error and the factors that degrade these in healthcare;
  3. An awareness of the concept of resilience and how people offer a layer of protection, in spite of the high cognitive and physical workload demands that healthcare places on its workers;
  4. An in depth understanding of risk perception and safety culture and their impact on frontline behaviours in healthcare settings;
  5. A knowledge and appreciation of the risks involved in poorly planned technology innovation in high-risk domains like healthcare and the role of design and risk assessment;
  6. An appreciation of the current systems of accountability (or lack thereof) that exist in healthcare and their impact on both incident investigation and organisational learning.

Assessment

Critical appraisal (2000 words)(35%)
Reflective assignment (2000 words)(35%)
Class participation (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Off-campus students:
12 hours per week, broken down into (on average) 4 hours per week for reading core material, 4 hours per week completing exercises (manual, computer-based, or online), 2 hours per week for online communication via MUSO discussions, and 2 hours per week for assignment preparation.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a Postgraduate course

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor J Ibrahim

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the skills and knowledge to apply tools, techniques, programs or strategies to improve the quality of care and patient safety.

Outcomes

By completion of the unit, the student will have:

  1. An in-depth knowledge and ability to compare the key approaches to measuring, monitoring and managing health care for improving quality of care and patient safety;
  2. An in-depth knowledge of the tools, techniques, programs and strategies currently used for improving quality of care and patient safety;
  3. Demonstrate the skills to objectively critique the strengths and limitations of the different tool, technique, programs or strategy for improving quality of care and patient safety;
  4. Demonstrate the ability to select an appropriate tool, technique, program or strategy for a:
    1. particular dimension of quality (i.e. safety, efficacy, timelines, patient-centre-ed)
    2. clinical setting
    3. patient population
    4. is logistically feasible
  5. Demonstrate the skills to modify, implement and evaluate a tool, technique, program or strategy for improving quality of care and patient safety in the workplace;
  6. Understand and manage the factors that impact on the selection, acceptance and sustainability of initiative for improving quality of care and patient safety. These factors include clinician behaviour, organisational and health system structures.

Assessment

Letter to the editor (500 words)(20%)
Reflective assignment ( 2000 words)(30%)
Class participation (50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

12 hours per week, broken down into (on average) 4 hours per week for reading core material, 4 hours per week completing exercises (manual, computer-based, or online), 2 hours per week for online communication via MUSO discussions, and 2 hours per week for assignment preparation.

Off-campus attendance requirements

15 hours over 2 block days.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in a Postgraduate course

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Epidemiology and Preventive Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Term 2 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr P Higgs

Synopsis

This unit is designed as a contemporary analysis of drug use in modern societies and will enhance participants' knowledge about the risk and vulnerability of individuals and communities to licit and illicit drug use.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Outline the sources, characteristics, routes of administration and effects of key drugs;
  2. Analyse patterns of drug use in Australia, across the Asia-Pacific region, and worldwide;
  3. Understand the specific health outcomes associated with the use of the most important licit and illicit drugs, including implications for the development of community-based responses;
  4. Explain how use of licit and illicit drugs is linked to poverty, criminality and other social problems;
  5. Critique the policies and practical responses to drug use implemented in differed countries;
  6. Explain the interactions between illicit drug use and blood-borne viruses (BBV);
  7. Examine the social and policy contexts of harm reduction practice employed in Australia and Asia;
  8. Critique the various responses to HIV and other BBV's among drug users concurrently in operation;
  9. Reflective on practice and communicate effectively.

Assessment

Formative feedback on small group work and reflective practice and presentation skills
Letter to editor or critique of a peer reviewed article (30%)
Abstract (400 words)(10%)
Written essay (3600 words)(60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr T Chong

Synopsis

The aim of this subject is to provide students with an introduction to the perspectives, underpinnings and practice of psychiatry.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge of the biomedical, psychological and social sciences which inform psychiatric practice;
  2. understand the principals of adult learning and continuing professional development;
  3. demonstrate the ability to access and critically review the psychiatric literature;
  4. discuss the ethics of psychiatric practice and relate this to clinical cases;
  5. conduct and write up a comprehensive psychiatric assessment and formulation;
  6. demonstrate knowledge of psychiatric research methodologies;
  7. demonstrate knowledge of the impact of mental illness on families and carers and basic family interventions;
  8. demonstrate knowledge of systems of service delivery and the role of psychiatry in relation to other clinical disciplines.

Assessment

A 1.5 hour examination at the end of the unit
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Approximately 3.5 hours of lectures per week


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Sandra Radovini

Synopsis

A developmental perspective on the evolution of human behaviour through the lifecycle. Developmental issues such as continuities and discontinuities between childhood and adulthood in health and psychopathology; the extent to which normality merges with pathology; facilitating and inhibiting factors influencing transitions between developmental phases; age-appropriate, accelerated and delayed development; the effect of individual differences on developmental processes; and the clinical applications of these principles to psychiatric conditions in childhood, adolescence and adulthood.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. describe key developmental life stages through childhood and adolescence;
  2. to describe key developmental psychological, social and biological factors involved in normal and abnormal development through childhood and adolescence;
  3. to describe key developmental psychological, social and biological factors involved in the onset, progression, natural history and treatment options in specific common child and adolescent psychiatric disorders;
  4. to describe key continuities and discontinuities between adult and child and adolescent psychiatric practice;
  5. to outline and discuss the developmental context within which the bio-psycho-social approach is used for the assessment and treatment of child and adolescent psychiatry disorders;
  6. to describe the influences of chronic illness, impairment, disability and handicap on development at an individual, interpersonal, family and social level.

Assessment

Oral Presentation (50%)
Essay 2000 words (50%)
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Approximately 3.5 hours of lectures per week


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor D Clarke

Synopsis

This unit aims to explore the relationship between physical and psychological health and illness. The key components of this relationship will be explored from both a theoretical and clinical perspective. These concepts include how psychological factors affect physical health, how physical illness can lead to psychological disturbance and the nature of somatisation. Common medical conditions with psychological associations will also be reviewed.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. examine the relationship between physical health and psychological states;
  2. describe how psychological factors may affect physical health and illness;
  3. describe common organic psychiatric disorders;
  4. describe the major psychiatric disorders in which physical symptoms are a major component;
  5. appraise the roles of psychiatry within the general hospital setting; and
  6. examine how C-L interventions may affect physical and psychological outcomes.

Assessment

One 1.5 hour written examination (100%).
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Approximately 3.5 hours of lectures per week.


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Professor P Fitzgerald and Associate Professor S Sundram

Synopsis

The contribution of the neurosciences to psychiatry. Biological perspectives on psychiatry including genetics, neuroanatomy including brain dissection, neuropharmacology, neurochemistry, neuroendocrinology, brain imaging and recording and immunology. Some sessions are devoted to the clinical application of recent advances in biological psychiatry.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Define the major principles of knowledge in each of the branches of the neurosciences and to integrate this knowledge to improve our conception and treatment of the major psychiatric disorders;
  2. Discuss how this knowledge is acquired and developed through research;
  3. Critically evaluate this knowledge;
  4. Define psychiatric disorders according to their underlying neurobiological basis;
  5. Understand how this knowledge is acquired;
  6. Critically appraise this knowledge.

Assessment

Essay 3000 words (100%)
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Approximately 3.5 hours of lectures per week


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr L Rodriguez and Dr F Minson

Synopsis

Topics include the concept of personality, different theoretical approaches to the conceptualisation of personality and psychological functioning and the relationship between these approaches and the empirical study of personality. Relevance of theory to the clinical situation, especially psychotherapeutic implications.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Formulate a person's internal and interpersonal psychological world in terms of relevant theories of personality and psychological functioning;
  2. Critically appraise these theoretical approaches in terms of their commonalities and differences;
  3. Recognise how research into this subject is conceptualised and carried out;
  4. Critically analyse the literature in this field;
  5. Relate the role of these approaches in the psychotherapies and clinical psychiatry overall.

Assessment

Essay on an assigned topic (approx. 4,000 words)
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Approximately 3.5 hours of lectures per week


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr T Chong

Synopsis

This core unit will provide an introduction into the adolescence through to the adult phase of life, concepts of mental illness and the impact of one on the other. Topics will include adolescent psychiatry, parenthood and mental illness, mid-life and late life issues. Phenomenology will be covered in detail with several sessions devoted to disorders of thought and perception. The practice of adult psychiatry in special settings such as primary and community care, hospital in-patient and forensic institutions will also be examined.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should:

  1. have a clear understanding of the signs and symptoms of many adult psychiatric disorders;
  2. be able to manage these disorders;
  3. better understand the issues of adulthood as a life phase cycle.

Specific objectives of the unit are:

  1. Knowledge - this unit aims to combine theoretical perspectives on some of the main physiological functions of life with teaching about clinical disease states, when some functions are impaired. In this way, the student will be expected to acquire knowledge about common psychiatric disorders of adulthood and their theoretical underpinnings.
  2. Skills - the course will provide skills in the assessment , diagnosis and management of several common psychiatric illnesses in adults. Successful candidates should also be able to develop skills in integrating theoretical knowledge with the recognition and treatment of clinical disorders.
  3. Attitude - the course will attempt to influence the attitudes of those enrolled with regard to the problems of adulthood and the social contexts in which common mental illnesses arise.

Assessment

One short answer examination paper (100%)
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Approximately 3.5 hours per week attending lectures.


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor D Ames

Synopsis

The unit is a continuation of Adult Psychiatry

  1. The initial 4 sessions will be devoted to topics outlined in the curriculum for Adult Psychiatry
  2. The remaining 8 sessions will focus on psychiatry of old age. Session 1 will examine the interaction of ageing and mental health. Epidemiological and demographical aspects of ageing in Australia and worldwide will be discussed. Included are the social construction of ageing, individual experiences of ageing and death and dying. The remaining sessions will focus on common cognitive and functional disorders in the elderly, physical health, pharmacology and ageing and service provisions to the elderly with mental illness. The sessions on cognitive disorders will examine the types and classification of cognitive disorders including the dementias, the underlying pathophysiological basis of these disorders, epidemiology, assessment of patients and management-pharmacological and non-pharmacological. A similar approach will be adopted for the sessions on affective, anxiety and psychotic disorders in the elderly. The session on physical health, pharmacology and ageing will deal with the interface between old age psychiatry, geriatric medicine and primary care. Some of the commoner physical disorders that affect the elderly will be considered as well as their impact on psychological health and well-being i.e. stroke, fractured neck of femur. The last session on Services and Training in Old Age Psychiatry will address various service models in Victoria and other Australian states, as well as the private versus public health dichotomy. Issues needing considerations in the setting up of services in a developing country or a developed country with a newly ageing population will be discussed. Lastly, currently RANZCP guidelines for advanced training in old age psychiatry will be sent out.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able:

  1. to describe the common psychiatric syndromes which affect older people, their presentation, differential diagnosis, assessment, basic management and outcomes;
  2. to demonstrate the skills to interview older persons effectively and to assess their mental state with particular reference to cognitive function;
  3. to demonstrate the skills necessary to manage the common psychiatric disorders affecting older persons with psychiatric disorders;
  4. to discuss the range of services available to assist older people with mental health problems in Australia and the way these services are likely to develop in the future;
  5. to describe the experience of ageing as lived in Australia together with the social, societal and personal implications of the ageing process; and
  6. to utilise appropriate referral to other specialists and services (both medical and social) for older people.

Assessment

The assessment will be based a case presentation during one of the sessions (50%)and an essay 2000 words (50%)
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Attendance of approximately 3.5 hours per week at lectures/tutorials.

Prerequisites

MPM5006 (MPM1202)


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof David Barton and Dr Scott Blair-West

Synopsis

This unit is intended to give a brief introduction into the theoretical underpinnings of the main forms of Cognitive Behaviour Therapy (CBT) and provide a solid background in the practical applications of CBT in relation to common psychiatric disorders for which CBT is an appropriate treatment.

The introductory two seminars will cover the historical background of how CBT evolved, starting with the early work on classical and operant conditioning to the more sophisticated cognitive models and the integration of behavioural and cognitive approaches. The basic theories of personality and psychopathology as outlined in Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy e.g. Albert Ellis, Behaviour Therapy e.g. Skinner, and Cognitive Therapy e.g. Beck will be discussed. General principles of CBT assessment and formulation will be covered.

Subsequent seminars will focus on the use of commonly used CBT techniques such as:

  1. behavioural interventions e.g. graded exposure in phobias and obsessive disorders, token economy in the chronically mentally ill, skills training
  2. cognitive interventions e.g. automatic thoughts in depression, in psychiatric disorders.

The seminars will be run in a workshop format to allow active involvement of students who will be expected to present and formulate cases according to CBT principles. These last four seminars will focus on applications of CBT in the management of four common psychiatric disorders - obsessive compulsive disorder, panic disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder and depression.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Describe the empirical foundations of CBT approaches, the theories of personality and psycopathology according to the major CBT approaches.
  2. Have the skills to be confident in the assessment, formulation and management of common psychiatric disorders according to CBT principles.
  3. To recognise which common psychiatric disorders for which CBT is an appropriate management strategy.
  4. To recognise the limitations of CBT
  5. To compare CBT with other forms of psychotherapy and choose the most appropriate form of therapy for patients.

Assessment

Clinical case presentation or role play exercise (40%) Case study and management plan 1500 words (60%)
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3.5 hours attendance at seminars.


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/ Prof Carol Harvey & A/Prof Sean Jespersen

Synopsis

This selective will examine the theory and practice of the provision of mental health services to the population in primary care and community settings. Seminar 1 and 2 will address issues related to the primary care setting. The first seminar will address the scope of mental health issues and service delivery in primary care. The topics will include:

  1. primary care in the international and Australian context - with the opportunities and challenges presented by the Australian Primary Health Care system
  2. classification and diagnostic issues in primary mental health care
  3. epidemiology of common disorders treated in general practice settings
  4. models of service delivery by public and private psychiatrists and other mental health professionals in primary care.

The 2nd seminar will focus on biological, psychological and social treatments for common psychiatric disorders in a primary care with particular emphasis on psychosocial treatment interventions. Illustrative examples will include the management of recurrent and relapsing depression and somatisation in general practice. Specific details about psychosocial treatment strategies relevant to primary care will be provided. Consideration will be given to the evidence base about the delivery of high quality mental health care in general practice.

The remaining seminars will focus on the mental health issues and service delivery in community settings. Seminar 3 will address the historical, socio-economic, cultural and political issues of relevance to the provision of community mental health care. Topics will include:

  1. deinstitutionalisation
  2. public health issues including community attitudes and responses to mental illness and the impact of stigma
  3. the scope of community mental health (both internationally and in Australia) giving examples of service models in community psychiatry.

Seminar 4 will cover rehabilitation and recovery in serious mental illness. Topics will include: the importance of functioning and definitions of disability; the traditional rehabilitation approach and current functioning and definitions of disability; the traditional rehabilitation approach and current understandings of the recovery process; consumer and carer perspectives with respect to rehabilitation and recovery; rehabilitation outcomes such as employment and social relationships as well as subjective experiences such as self-esteem and quality of life. The final two seminars in community mental health will review selected psychosocial treatment strategies, with an emphasis on enhancing students' skills. Strategies will include: ways to optimise the treatment alliance; goal setting; relapse management and identification of early warning signs; CBT for delusions and hallucinations; working with 'chronicity'; and family intervention techniques for lowering expressed emotion and improving problem solving.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able:

  1. To describe the incidence, prevalence, distinct and common presentations of psychiatric disorders in primary care and in general practice.
  2. To describe the factors which affect treatment outcome and the influences of lifestyle, social, cultural and environmental factors in promoting health and preventing disease.
  3. To apply the various biological, psychological, social and cultural models to the understanding and treatment of psychiatric disorders in primary care and the community. This will include acknowledgement and respect of the role and contribution of significant others (relatives, general practitioners, other professionals) to the assessment, treatment and recovery of people with mental illness in the community. Students should be able to develop and implement a clear plan of care that integrates biological, psychological and social interventions according to the needs of each individual patient and takes account of the context in which the person is treated.
  4. To describe and apply the principles and practice of providing effective mental health treatments including modern rehabilitation techniques in diverse settings ranging from primary care and the community, hospital and outpatient clinics to long-term care, rehabilitation and recovery for those people with well-established psychiatric disorders living in the community.
  5. To appraise the various ethical, cultural, socio-economic, practical and political factors which influence the health care and social welfare systems when providing services for the individual. This includes sensitivity to the impact of illness on patients, families or carers and the wider community, and to strive to balance the needs of the patients with those of the family or carers and the community.
  6. To demonstrate the confidence to interpret and disseminate relevant scientific information in relation to public debate on psychosocial and public health issues relevant to mental health and mental illness.

Assessment

Presentation 40%, Written review 1500 words 60%.
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3.5 hours per week attending seminars x 6 weeks


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Enrico Cementon

Synopsis

This unit covers substance abuse definitions, classification systems, epidemiology, prevalence & risk factors, major substances of abuse i.e. alcohol, other central nervous system depressants, stimulants & hallucinogens. Features of substance abuse disorder (SAD), assessment, long term effects/complications, family issues, medical/ psychosocial management, the interface between substance abuse disorder & mental health - "Dual Diagnosis", (where serious mental illness & SAD occur in one person) are examined as is the impact of substance abuse in the community, prevention & health promotion, public education, the media, political, economic & social issues related to availability of substances.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Describe the epidemiology, aetiology, psychopathology, clinical features, complications and natural history of substance abuse disorders and the issues specific to "Dual Diagnosis" field.

  1. Describe the organisations involved in the delivery of drug treatment services.

  1. Demonstrate the clinical skills and knowledge needed to assess and develop treatment interventions for patients with substance abuse disorders.

  1. Demonstrate the skills required to communicate clearly with colleagues especially in relation to the implications of psychiatric issues with colleagues, patients and carers including the specific interpersonal skills required in the management of patients with substance use disorders and to effectively liaise with medical and non-medical colleagues in non-psychiatric settings.

Assessment

Case history 1500 words (40%), Presentation (30%), and Log book (30%).
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Sid Bloch

Synopsis

Themes and topics will extend over a wide terrain but cover ethical aspects of the psychiatrist - patient relationship, diagnosis, confidentiality, treatment in psychiatry, resource allocation and justice, child and adolescent psychiatry, women's mental health, psychogeriatrics, forensic psychiatry. Moral theory and its applications will also be a central feature.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able:

  1. To discuss the history of moral philosophy as it pertains to the discipline of psychiatry, including the salient concepts in moral philosophy which constitute a basis for ethical reasoning and are relevant to clinical practice.
  2. To discuss the many complex ethical problems that can be analysed in a systematic and disciplined manner and to demonstrate an understanding of the essence of ethical reasoning and analysis.
  3. To demonstrate the ability to learn to deal with ethical decision-making by logic and argument and to reach balanced ethical judgements through critical appraisal of competing theories.
  4. To demonstrate the ability to promote one's moral imagination, moral sensitivity and self-awareness in clinical practice and to become sensitised to ethical aspects of issues that might otherwise be regarded as purely scientific or technical.
  5. To demonstrate the confidence to face and cope with anxiety regarding difficult-to-resolve ethical dilemmas in clinical psychiatry and to become sensitive to the myriad intricate ethical problems facing psychiatrists. This selective intends the student to be guided by a sound understanding of psychiatric ethics and a sense of moral obligation, and to bring rigorous thinking to bear when faced with an ethical quandary.
  6. To demonstrate an appreciation of the value (and limitations) of codes of ethics, codes of practice and clinical guidelines.

Assessment

1500 word essay (100%)
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3.5 hours attendance at seminars


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Colin Reiss

Synopsis

This unit covers family based approaches in mental health management and treatment. Understanding theory; development of practice skills and exploring practical applications of systems; and narrative based work with families are emphasized. Seminars cover development and application of family work in mental health systems, the central and fundamental issue of engagement of families in management and therapy, conceptual framework of the various family therapy approaches, post structural approaches, narrative therapy and solution focus.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able:

  1. To recognise the complex role that the family and other carers play in the life of individuals with a mental illness develop and apply family sensitive practice principles in the context of mental health services and management.
  2. To describe the history of 'family-based' approaches in psychiatric management and psychotherapy, the principles of general systems theory, the major structural practice models and theories in family therapy, 'post structural' theory and the derivation of narrative and solution focus practice models in family therapy, the legislation concerning confidentiality and its impact on family and carer involvement and outcome research regarding family involvement in mental health treatment approaches and family therapy.
  3. To recognise the influence of therapist's personal, ethnic, gender, professional and work contexts in the shaping of any therapeutic encounter with individuals and families including their own personal values and belief systems as they arose from their own families of origin.
  4. To describe and apply the principles of conducting conjoint family sessions in regard to joining engagement, assessment, interventions and recognise the factors which affect engagement and treatment outcome.
  5. To demonstrate the ability to work to assimilate and integrate the various modalities of family based work covered in this series with the rest of their psychiatric training and knowledge and be able to use the skills necessary using approaches based on systematic and post structural principals in family therapy to implement family based interventions as a part of total patient management and treatment.

Assessment

Critical literature review 1500 words (60%) and linked oral presentation (40%).
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Seminars and practice clinical sessions


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jenny Torr

Synopsis

Historical, philosophical, ethical, humanitarian and legal issues in the lives and care of people with intellectual/developmental disabilities; epidemiology of intellectual/developmental disabilities; intellectual/developmental disability within the family life cycle, in society and across the lifespan are covered. Psychiatric disorder in intellectual/developmental disability is also examined in detail.

Outcomes

At the conclusion of this selective candidates will be able to:

  1. Understand, define and differentiate the terms Intellectual Disability and Developmental Disability.
  2. Appreciate ethical, humanitarian and legal issues regarding people with intellectual/development disabilities and incorporate this understanding into psychiatric practice.
  3. Identify biopsychosocial risk factors for psychiatric disorders in people with intellectual/developmental disabilities.
  4. Understand and minimise the barriers to diagnosis of psychiatric disorder in people with developmental disabilities.
  5. Appreciate the importance of identifying the cause of a developmental disability and recognise common syndromes and behavioural phenotypes.
  6. Understand and describe how psychiatric disorders present in people with intellectual/developmental disabilities.
  7. Differentiate and assess the causes of challenging behaviour.
  8. Conduct a modified psychiatric assessment and formulate a diagnostic hypothesis and management plan.
  9. Give an appraisal of various service models for delivering psychiatric services to people with intellectual/developmental disabilities.

Assessment

1.Satisfactory participation in either face to face or on-line tutorials:
A) Participation in group discussion
B) Completion of learning activities
2. 1,500 word written assignment
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The unit presented as a series of interactive seminars based upon learning modules.


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Professor T Norman

Synopsis

A revision of basic pharmacological principles of pharmacokinetics & pharmacodynamics covering the relevance of age, gender, ethnicity, common drug interactions, environmental influences, and route of administration. The unit covers major drug types commonly used in psychiatric practice including the underlying neurochemical basis for use in specific disorders and specified primary target syndromes & symptoms. Students are taught identification and measurement of psychotropic-induced common side effects, use of specific antidotes for common conditions, and use of instruments used to rate side effects. Prescribing patterns in Australia and prescribing guidelines/pitfalls are also discussed.

Outcomes

During this selective students will:

  1. Develop knowledge of the basic pharmacological principles and their relevance to clinical prescribing.
  2. Gain a deeper understanding of the theoretical underpinnings of the common psychiatric disorders such as depression and psychoses, and the underlying basis for the use of specific psychotropic medications.
  3. Learn to critically analyse the literature on drug trials.
  4. Learn a rational and practical approach to prescribing psychotropics including the management of side effects, the drug-resistant patient, use in the medically unwell and elderly patient.

Assessment

Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance
1500 word essay (100%) divided into 4 tasks that will be assessed during the term

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 hour lecture weekly and 3 hours studying prepared course material.


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor T Trauer

Synopsis

Students will develop research skills in the area of study design, methodology and analysis.
Week 1. 'Foundations of statistical inference' will cover the techniques used to make statistical inferences, The nature of 'statistical significance' will be the focus. Threats to the validity of inference will be discussed.
Week 2. 'Qualitative research methods' will explore the methods for the analysis of narrative data and case studies. Verstehen and hermeneutics will be explained. Grounded theory will be introduced. Practical steps involved in the conduct of qualitative studies will be presented.
Week 3 'Epidemiological methods' will examine the methods for the assessment of the presence of disorders at the population level and the detection and measurement of risk factors. Prevalence and incidence will be defined. Methods of case ascertainment classification systems and diagnostic tools will be explored. Research designs and methods for the assessment of risk factors for disease will be surveyed. Sources of bias in epidemiological studies will be discussed.
Week 4. 'Intervention Trials' will focus on the design and analysis of studies that examine the efficacy of drug and psychotherapeutic treatments for psychiatric disorders. Topics will include randomised clinical trial (RCT), choice and definition of intervention and control groups, designs, administration and maintenance of intervention, choice of outcome measures and assessment procedures, dropouts and the intention to treat model.
Week 5. 'Meta-analysis' will be an introduction to the various methods for the combination of the outcome of individual studies. Topics to be covered include the discovery and selection of studies, the 'file draw' problem, effect sizes and statistical methods for analysis. Advanced hypothesis formulation and analysis of meta-analytic data will be introduced. Problems and limitations associated with this technique will be discussed. The Cochrane Collaboration will be presented.
Week 6 'Longitudinal methods' will examine the relative strengths and weaknesses of studies that compare the different classes of individuals at one time (cross-sectional studies) and studies that observe the same individual over time (longitudinal studies). Topics will include the design of longitudinal studies, statistical methods, the determination of causality, attrition and other problems.

Outcomes

  1. The course is designed to equip students with the skills necessary to evaluate empirical studies as published in the psychiatric literature. The course also aims to provide students with an introduction to the information necessary to design and initiate their own research.
  2. Students will gain statistical and methodological knowledge. It must be realised that given the time constraints much of the knowledge imparted will be at a basic or introductory level. However the course has been designed to cover a broad range of relevant topics. The course will also give students information about 'next steps' that is, approaches and sources of information that will allow them to bring their skills up to a mature level in specific areas when they have a need for this.
  3. The overarching attitude to be developed is one of 'constructive critical doubt'. This transcends the ability to be able to simply enumerate flaws and limitations in a piece of research. It is the aim of this course that students will develop an appreciation of the factors that are critical in either engendering confidence in the research or invalidating it.

Assessment

Essay 2000 words (100%).
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 hours attending lectures and 3 hours studying prepared course materials per week


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Prem Chopra

Synopsis

Transcultural psychiatry is concerned with the nature of mental illness, causes and distribution of mental illness in different populations, culture and clinical practice, including the clinician-patient relationship; and the design of mental health services in multicultural societies. The role of culture in the development and treatment of mental illness is examined, and an introduction to the education of mental health professionals and construction/operations of health systems are provided. Students will develop knowledge and skills in cultural assessment, cross-cultural diagnosis and treatment.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Describe the cultural diversity of Australian Society, and the mental health implications of this diversity.
  2. Differentiate new ways of thinking about concepts of culture, and concept of psychiatric illness across different cultures, and to apply these concepts in day-to-day clinical work.
  3. Describe the differing patterns of mental health service utilisation by different ethnic communities in Victoria, and the factors that may be responsible for these different patterns of service use such as the epidemiology of mental illness across cultures.
  4. Discuss the frameworks for thinking about public mental health policy, and service design and evaluation, in relation to people from different cultural backgrounds.
  5. Demonstrate skills in cross-cultural assessment and treatment of mental illness and cross-cultural diagnosis.

Assessment

Oral presentation (40%), 1500 word case report (60%)
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3.5 hours per week seminars, 3 hours seminar preparation and reading.


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr A Carroll

Synopsis

The initial two sessions will focus on the nature and extent of the relationship between violent and offending behaviours and mental disorder. This will draw heavily on Australian research but will also make use of studies overseas which examine this interaction. Following this there will be two sessions on current thinking in the area of the assessment and management of the risk of violence in those with mental disorder. Further sessions will consider specific types of criminal behaviour which have a particular importance to those managing the mentally disordered. These will include stalking, sexual offending, making threats and homicide.

Outcomes

Each seminar in the selective will be designed to provide the knowledge necessary for general mental health professionals approaching issues of a forensic psychiatric nature.

Assessment

75% based on attendance, 1500 word essay 25%
Hurdle requirement: 75% attendance

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 hours attendance of lectures per week, 3 hours study


4 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0833333 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Assoc Prof Mark Hedger

Synopsis

Topics include physiology of human and animal; role of growth factors; statistics used to analyse data in reproductive endocrinology; hormones produced by the pituitary, hypothalamus, ovary and testis and their interactions, regulation and mode of action.

Outcomes

The objectives of this unit are to provide students with an understanding of the science of reproduction with particular emphasis on the molecular and cellular endocrinology of reproduction. Much research in the reproductive sciences requires an understanding of hormonal function and growth factors. This series of lectures thus provides students with the theoretical background for a more intensive study of various areas of reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (50%)
Practical Reports (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


2 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0416667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Prof Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Topics include physiology of human and animal reproduction; development and differentiation of the male and female reproductive systems; oocyte and follicular development; ovarian cycles; testicular function and cell/cell interactions in the testis.

Outcomes

The objective of this unit is to provide students with an understanding of the theory of reproduction with detailed study of female reproductive anatomy and physiology and the fertilisation process. This series of lectures provides students with the theoretical background for more intensive study of particular areas of the reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (50%)
Oral Presentation (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


2 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0416667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Jansen & A/Prof Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Topics include implantation and placentation, the foetus, the mother, and the politics of pregnancy; neonates - foetal and neonatal monitoring and neonatal intensive care.

Outcomes

The objective of this unit is to provide students with an understanding of the theory of reproduction with detailed study of male reproductive anatomy and the human sexuality. This series of lectures provides students with the theoretical background for more intensive study of particular areas of the reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (50%)
3000 word Literature Review (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


2 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0416667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Jansen & A/Prof Peter Temple-Smith

Synopsis

Topics include disorders of sexual development; sexually transmitted disease and the HIV pandemic; reproductive toxicology; reproductive cancers, menstrual disorders, infertility and erectile dysfunction.

Outcomes

The objective of this unit is to provide students with an understanding of the theory of reproduction with detailed study of infertility management, pregnancy, parturition, neonatal monitoring and reproductive toxicology. This series of lectures thus provides students with the theoretical background for more intensive study of particular areas of the reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (50%)
5,000 word Literature Review (50%)

Chief examiner(s)


2 points, SCA Band 3, 0.0416667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sarah Meachem & Dr Kristy Brown

Synopsis

Topics include current trends in population growth and the policies introduced in some countries to regulate this growth; fertilisation and its manipulation; regulation of fertility; legal and ethical aspects of controlling fertility and overcoming infertility.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should have an understanding of the theory of reproduction with detailed study of male reproductive anatomy and the human sexuality. This series of lectures thus provides students with the theoretical background for more intensive study of particular areas of the reproductive sciences.

Assessment

Exam (100%)

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Anaesthesiology is the study of the medical specialisation concerned with the administration of drugs and other substances to achieve lack of sensation with or without loss of consciousness. This detailed field may include administering anaesthetics, principles and practices of anaesthesiology, regional analgesia, and remedial action to counter adverse reactions and complications. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Biochemistry and Cell Biology is the study of the chemistry of living organisms and the structure and function of cells. Examples include biosynthesis, cellular regulation, cytology, molecular biology, and metabolism. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Community Health is the study of health practices in the community which support and assist the management of disabilities and illness. This detailed field may include current issues in Australian community health, and disabilities and illnesses as community issues. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Environmental health is the study of the health impact of the interaction between humans and the environment. This detailed field may include the effect of environmental pollution on health. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Epidemiology is the study of the incidence, distribution and possible control of infectious and chronic diseases as they affect groups of people. This detailed field may include disease and injury evaluation and surveillance, and infectious and chronic diseases and their prevention. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Southbank Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Southbank Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Southbank Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Southbank Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Southbank Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Southbank Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Southbank Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Southbank Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Forensic Science is the study of the use of scientific techniques to solve criminal cases. This detailed field may include ballistics, blood splash pattern analysis, crime scene investigation, trace evidence, and fingerprint enhancement and identification. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedBendigo Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Bendigo Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

General Practice is the study of providing primary and continuing medical care to patients in a community setting. It is particularly concerned with providing family and community oriented health care. This detailed field may include carrying out simple surgical procedures and dealing with medical emergencies, early diagnosing, prescribing and administering medication, and primary, personal and continuing medical care. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis examined by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Genetics is the study of heredity and of the units of biological inheritance. This detailed field may include cytogenetics, genotypes, higher eukaryotes, microbial genetics, molecular genetics, monohybrids, and phenotypes. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis examined by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Health Promotion is the study of promoting a healthy lifestyle and influencing behaviour to improve health. This detailed field may include contribution of lifestyle to morbidity and mortality, health program planning, and health promotion principles, goals and concepts. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis examined by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Human Biology is the study of human physiology and anatomy. This detailed field may include biological anthropology, human anatomy and histology, human evolution and variation, primatology, and human growth, development and reproduction. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Indigenous Health is the study of the health of the Indigenous population within the broader context of socio-economic development of aboriginal communities. This detailed field may include approaches to Indigenous health care delivery and management, Indigenous caring and healing practices, Indigenous child health, Indigenous community health, and Indigenous primary health care. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Phi Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Phi Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Phi Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Phi Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Medical Science is the study of physics, biology and chemistry as applied to medicine. This detailed field may include biomedical sciences, clinical and medical biochemistry, medical biotechnology, medical microbiology, medical physics, and biology and chemistry associated with medicine. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

General medicine is the study of the clinical presentation and treatment of diseases. This detailed field may include clinical diagnosis, and diseases affecting humans. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Microbiology is the study of microscopic forms of life such as bacteria, viruses, and protozoa. This detailed field may include food microbiology, industrial microbiology, microbial cell structure and function, microbial physiology, microbial growth, microbial taxonomy, micro-organisms, and virology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedBerwick Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Berwick Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Hong Kong Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Macau Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Berwick Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Berwick Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Hong Kong Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Macau Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Berwick Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Berwick Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Hong Kong Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Macau Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Berwick Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Berwick Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Hong Kong Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Macau Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Malaysia Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Nursing is the study of the principles and practices of providing preventative, curative and rehabilitative care to individuals and groups. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Obstetrics and Gynaecology is the study of the medical specialisation concerned with the care of women during pregnancy, labour and after childbirth and the prevention, diagnosis and treatment of diseases of the female reproductive system. This detailed field may include monitoring foetal development, and treating gynaecological and obstetric conditions. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Occupational Health and Safety is the study of recognising, evaluating and controlling environmental factors associated with the interaction of individuals and the workplace. This detailed field may include health and safety in the workplace, national occupational health and safety standards, and principles of establishing and maintaining safe premises. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Paediatrics is the medical specialisation concerned with normal physical and emotional growth and development from birth through to late adolescence. It involves preventing, diagnosing and treating diseases and uncommon disorders in children and adolescents. This detail field may include child growth and development, child and adolescent diseases, and neonatology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peter-mac Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Wehi Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peter-mac Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Wehi Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peter-mac Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Wehi Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Murdoch Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peter-mac Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Wehi Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This detailed field includes all biological sciences not elsewhere classified, including immunology. Examples include biogeography, bioinformatics, biophysics, mycology, neuroscience, and parasitology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Pharmacology is the study of the development, uses and effects of drugs. Examples include clinical drug trials, drug analysis, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, and toxicology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Psychological Medicine and Psychiatry are the study of the medical specialisation concerned with diagnosing, preventing and treating diseases and disorders of the mind. This detailed field may include assessing patients' psychiatric states, child psychiatry, developmental psychiatry, and psychotherapy. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedBox Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Notting Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Psychology is the study of the science of human nature and of mental states and processes. It includes the study of human and animal behaviour. This detailed field may include abnormal psychology, behaviourism, clinical psychology, cognitive processes, developmental psychology, neuropsychology, personality theory and assessment, physiological psychology, and social psychology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Radiography and medical imaging is the study of technologies which use ionising and non-ionising (e.g. ultrasound) radiation to diagnose, treat and follow the course of disease and its response to treatment. This detailed field may include interpreting and evaluating medical images, ultrasound and x-ray equipment, nuclear medicine, and preparing radioactive materials. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Surgery is the study of the medical specialisation concerned with the principles and practices for treating diseases, injuries, defects and deformities by manual operation and manipulation, and by using instruments and appliances. This detailed field may include monitoring post operative progress of patients, surgical diagnosis, and surgical procedures and techniques. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Moe Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Rural Health is the study of health care and services, and their impact on people in rural and remote communities. This detailed field may include rural health workforce issues, models of health services in rural and remote areas, rural medical health education and support, rural community development and capacity building, and rural health policy and program evaluation. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Public and health care administration is the study of planning and directing the functions and operations of organisations whose primary objective is the provision of services for the public good. This detailed field may include identifying and evaluating the role of public organisations and institutions in society, relating organisational and behavioural theory to public and private institutions/organisations, and analysing government policy and planning, and developing strategies for its implementation and administration. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Human reproductive biology is the study of reproductive biology and medicine as it applies to the human body. This detailed field may include physiology of human reproduction, fertilisation and its manipulation, embryology, regulation of fertility, infertility diagnosis and treatment, sexually transmitted diseases, pregnancy and parturition, assisted reproductive technologies, and reproductive toxicology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Animal reproductive biology is the study of reproductive biology and medicine as it applies to animals. This detailed field may include physiology of animal reproduction, fertilisation and its manipulation, embryology, regulation of fertility, pregnancy and parturition, and reproductive toxicology. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Baker Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Public health is the study of public health practice. This detailed field may include advanced epidemiology, statistical methods for public health, health leadership and management, and quantitative methods of population-based health sciences and their problem-solving application for primary care provision. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Moe Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Health services research is the study of the provision of health services and tools used to measure and assess these services. This detailed field may include health informatics, health technology assessment, clinical effectiveness, implementation research, systematic reviews, sociological perspectives on health, and gender and the clinical workforce. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Pathology is the study of the medical specialisation concerned with the causes and effects of diseases, including the structural and functional changes of body organs, tissues and fluids, and the systematic methods of detecting these changes. This detailed field may include examining specimens to determine the origin, nature and course of any disease present, histopathology, interpreting and evaluating pathology tests, and post-mortem examination. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Baker Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Box Hill Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Burnet Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Monash Medical Centre Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Epidemiology is the study of the incidence, distribution and possible control of infectious and chronic diseases as they affect groups of people. This detailed field may include disease and injury evaluation and surveillance, and infectious and chronic diseases and their prevention. This high-cost unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 1, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Social work is the study of social justice and redressing the social and economic disadvantage in the community. This detailed field may include community services, child abuse and protection, corrections and interventions, policy development, and casework with individuals, families, groups and communities. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedAlfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Alfred Hospital Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Ambulance and paramedic studies investigate emergency medical services, pre-hospital medical care and paramedic education. This detailed field may include aeromedical retrieval, emergency preparedness and disaster medicine, and mobile intensive care ambulance paramedic studies.This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedPeninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Physiotherapy is the study of therapeutic uses of physical means to relieve pain, regain range of movement, restore muscle strength and return patients to normal activities of daily living. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Occupational Therapy is the study of treating physical, cognitive and psychiatric conditions through activities in order to optimise functioning and independence in daily life. Examples include patient's independence level assessment; tailoring treatment programmes; occupational rehabilitation; and occupational role development. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedSunway Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Sunway Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Sunway Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Sunway Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Sunway Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Sunway Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Sunway Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Medicine and health sciences is the study of medical and health-related fields, conducted on the Malaysia Campus. This unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Research quarter 1 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 1 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 2 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 3 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (Day)
Clayton Research quarter 4 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Radiography and medical imaging is the study of technologies which use ionising and non-ionising (e.g. ultrasound) radiation to diagnose, treat and follow the course of disease and its response to treatment. This detailed field may include interpreting and evaluating medical images, ultrasound and x-ray equipment, nuclear medicine, and preparing radioactive materials. This high-cost unit is 100% research with a view to producing a thesis.

Assessment

Thesis assessed by two external examiners.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Tasmin Jones

Synopsis

This unit focuses on enabling the student to develop proficiency in the management of critically ill clients/patients from all social, cultural and economic backgrounds with life threatening illnesses requiring the interventions of mechanical ventilation and / or haemodynamic monitoring. The student will develop an understanding of and clinical proficiency in the therapeutic interventions essential in caring for these clients/patients within acute/critical care settings. This unit also focuses on the principles and practices necessary to provide nursing care to clients/patients experiencing cardiovascular and respiratory problems.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be expected to be able to:

  1. Demonstrate the application of an in-depth knowledge of alterations in normal physiologically function in the management of critical care clients/patients experiencing alterations in these systems.
  2. Plan and implement appropriate, age specific, culturally relevant nursing interventions for critically ill patients.
  3. Demonstrate the competent implementation of related advanced, technologically based, critical care nursing skills.
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of the legal, ethical, medical, and nursing issues related to the management of the following groups of clients/patients within the critical care environment
  5. Apply bioscientific knowledge and evidence based practice in the assessment, implementation and evaluation of care for the critically ill client/patient.
  6. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge base specific to interventional cardiology procedures.
  7. Critically evaluate the socio-cultural, legal and ethical issues related to the nursing management of the critically ill client/patient.
  8. Demonstrate an in-depth knowledge of the critical health breakdown of clients/patients requiring life support measures.
  9. Plan and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic nursing interventions related to the management of clients/patients requiring mechanical ventilation and haemodynamic monitoring.
  10. Demonstrate a knowledge of the theoretical concepts that underpin mechanical ventilation & haemodynamic monitoring.
  11. Demonstrate effective interpersonal skills in the management of clients/patients, families, and significant others who are experiencing grief, loss, or what they perceive to be a crisis situation.

Assessment

Clinical Performance Appraisal (Pass/ Fail)
Written Assignment (40%)
Exam (60%)
Clinical Hurdles (Pass/Fail)
Students must achieve a pass in the final examination, Clinical performance appraisal and Clinical Hurdles to achieve a pass in the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ms Julia Morphet (Peninsula campus)

Synopsis

The emergency nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to appropriately and effectively assess and manage patients in the emergency department. This unit focuses on enabling the student to develop proficiency in the assessment and management of patients from all age groups, socio/ cultural and economic groups who present to the emergency department. The unit also encompasses the development of skills which will enable the student to provide support for patient's families and significant others in the emergency department.

Outcomes

  1. Describe and implement assessment of the emergency patient through the primary and secondary survey approach.
  2. Plan and implement appropriate, age specific, culturally relevant, therapeutic interventions for clients/patients experiencing cardiovascular and respiratory health emergency.
  3. Demonstrate effective interpersonal skills in caring for the emergency patient, their families and members of the multi-disciplinary team.
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of the principles used to manage a medical emergency crisis in all age groups within an emergency department.
  5. Able to demonstrate an understanding of the disease process behind a medical crisis and to be able to explain the rationale for the nursing care provided.
  6. Discuss and demonstrate planning and management of the trauma patient based on primary and secondary survey assessment for a range of traumatic injuries.
  7. Demonstrate a knowledge of and implement the Australian Triage Scale to all patients presenting to the emergency department
  8. Identify appropriate age specific, socio-culturally relevant, nursing interventions for patients in the above groups.
  9. Identify the needs of the patients family and significant others in the emergency department and plan appropriate nursing interventions to address these needs.
  10. Identify and discuss the application of interpersonal skills in the management of patients, families and significant others who are experiencing grief, loss or what they perceive to be a crisis.
  11. Explore and evaluate the clinical application of nursing research and theoretical literature to selected problems related to the above groups in emergency care.
  12. Critically evaluate the socio-cultural, legal and ethical issues related to the nursing management of the critically ill client/patient.

Assessment

Clinical Performance Appraisal (Pass/ Fail)
Examination (60%)
Assignment (40%)
Clinical Hurdles (Pass/ Fail)
Clinical Performance Appraisal (Pass/Fail)
Students must achieve a pass in the final examination, Clinical performance appraisal and Clinical Hurdles to achieve a pass in the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held oncampus at Gippsland.

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Mosley, Ms Kelli Innes, Grace Stankewicz (Peninsula)

Synopsis

The advance practice general nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to appropriately and effectively assess and manage clients/patients in a hospital environment. This unit has a conceptual framework of education, advanced practice issues, clinical risk management and outcome resolution. The unit enables the student to develop proficiency in the holistic management of patients in a variety of hospital settings.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be expected to be able to:

  1. Analyse the clinical issues supporting and complicating advanced practice in medical/ surgical nursing.
  2. Plan and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic nursing interventions related to the management of medical and surgical patients.
  3. Plan and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic nursing interventions related to the management of medical and surgical patients who also experience psychological and behavioural management dysfunction.
  4. Apply effective interpersonal skills in caring for the patient, their families and members of the multi-disciplinary team.
  5. Identify and analyse situational issues that support advance practice.
  6. Demonstrate an understanding of the socio-cultural, legal, ethical, and age related issues associated with the nursing management of medical and surgical patients.

Assessment

Clinical Performance Appraisal (Pass/ Fail)
Examination (60%)
Assignment (40%)
Clinical Hurdles (Pass/ Fail)

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master of Nursing (1250)
NUR5703 Advanced pathophysiology and health assessment


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Kelli Innes

Synopsis

This unit builds upon NUR5111 Contemporary Nursing Practice 1. It is a clinically-based unit that introduces students to medical-surgical nursing practice. Students will explore pathophysiology, clinical diagnosis, pharmacology, associated microbiology and nursing care associated with a range of conditions. Using case-based learning, the unit will take a systems approach to build on concepts from the previous semester's learning. The clinical practice component will provide students with opportunities to incorporate theoretical learning into care provision as well as development of clinical skills learnt in the simulated laboratory environment.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. describe the pathophysiology and microbiology associated with commonly encountered conditions, and their application to nursing care of clients in medical/surgical settings;
  2. describe the basic principles of pharmacology, therapeutic drug administration and monitoring as they relate to nursing;
  3. analyse problems associated with drug administration, including drug interactions and the use of drugs across the life-span;
  4. describe the legal and professional nursing requirements associated with quality use of medications including safe drug administration, storage and handling;
  5. utilise appropriate evidenced based nursing interventions when caring for clients with compromised wound integrity, and pain management;
  6. demonstrate safe evidence based clinical practice in an acute care setting based on the integration of theoretical principles and practical skills;
  7. describe the nursing application of diagnostic, therapeutic and preventative techniques associated with caring for a person with a body system health breakdown;
  8. plan culturally relevant and age specific nursing interventions for acutely ill clients across the lifespan;
  9. critically discuss ethical issues relevant to the nursing care of clients with an alteration in health status;
  10. provide person centred care according to relevant nursing care principles, to clients under the supervision of registered nursing staff and the clinical teacher;
  11. conduct and document comprehensive client assessments utilizing an appropriate assessment tool;
  12. reflect upon, and evaluate self-performance in terms of the delivery of quality nursing care;
  13. practice in accordance with ANMC Competencies for the Registered Nurse and other professional standards.

Assessment

Mid semester test (1 hour, 20%)
Written assignment (Clinical case study)(3,000 words)(30%)
End of semester exam (2 hours)(50%)
Clinical practice assessment (Pass / Fail)
Students must achieve a pass in the clinical placement to pass the unit (100%) Attendance at clinical is mandatory. Calculations hurdle (100% mastery)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The weekly workload requirement for the unit will be: Lectures 5 hours, Tutorials 1 hour, Laboratories 2 hours over a 14 week semester. In addition, students will be required to undertake 280 hours of clinical practice and 26 hours self-directed learning over the semester. Self-directed learning activities will include guided reading and development of formative and summative assessments.

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Georgina Willetts

Synopsis

This unit builds upon NUR5002 Contemporary Nursing Practice 2. It is a clinically-based unit that introduces students to the areas of mental health and aged care nursing as well as preparing them for graduate nursing roles. The unit will provide opportunities for students to develop fundamental knowledge, skills and attitudes relevant to the restoration and maintenance of optimal mental health and recovery from mental illness. Students are expected to learn to assess mental health problems and to identify the coping abilities of individuals and families, and to care for people with selected mental disorders. Emphasis is placed upon empowerment of the individual and caregiver using the stress/vulnerability model and family based management. The unit also encompasses risk assessment, mental health service systems, roles and functions of the multidisciplinary mental health team, and the Victorian Mental Health Act.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. analyse the concepts of mental health and mental illness with reference to historical and contemporary classification systems;
  2. discuss the Victorian Mental Health Act (1986) as amended and implications for nursing practice;
  3. accurately conduct a mental status assessment and a risk assessment;
  4. describe the roles and functions of the members of the multidisciplinary mental health team;
  5. describe the aetiological factors, epidemiology, clinical manifestations and nursing care in a range of mental disorders including anxiety disorders, personality disorders, sexual disorders, mood disorders and schizophrenia; psychotic disorders, dissociative disorders, somatoform disorders, eating disorders, delirium and dementia, and substance-related disorders;
  6. describe a range of psychotherapeutic interventions and therapeutic modalities used in mental health treatment and care;
  7. analyse ethical issues which pertain to psychiatric and mental health nursing;
  8. communicate effectively with people who are experiencing disturbances of thoughts, feelings and behaviour;
  9. employ selected cognitive and behavioural techniques in the care and management of people with mental health problems and mental disorders;
  10. analyse physical, psychological and social aspects of ageing in the context of health and illness in older people in our community;
  11. analyse the impact of ageing and chronic illness on clients, families and carers;
  12. analyse the legal and ethical issues that arise from changes to cognition, chronic and life limiting illness such as challenges to autonomy, protection of patients, quality of life and euthanasia;
  13. differentiate the roles of nurses working in multidisciplinary teams, who care for people with chronic and/ or life limiting illness in different health care environments;
  14. utilise holistic health assessment skills to assess the complex health needs of older adults, people with chronic and life limiting illness in relation to physical, psychosocial and spiritual needs;
  15. analyse a range of evidenced based interventions that support the person experiencing complex care needs;
  16. identify the resources for people with issues related to ageing, chronic and life limiting illness in the community;
  17. utilise health promotion, supportive and palliative approaches to care for people with chronic and life limiting illness in a range of health care settings, and
  18. practice with increasing autonomy in accordance with ANMC Competencies for the Registered Nurse and other professional standards.

Assessment

Mid semester test (1 hour)(20%)
Written assignment (Clinical case study)(3,000 - 4,000 words)(30%)
End of semester exam (2 hours)(50%)
Clinical practice assessment (Pass / Fail)
Students must achieve a pass in the clinical placement to pass the unit (100%) Attendance at clinical is mandatory.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students will be on campus for eight weeks in this semester as five weeks will be spent in clinical practice. The weekly on campus workload requirement for the unit will be Lectures (5 hours), Tutorials (2 hours) over eight weeks. In addition, students will be required to undertake 200 hours of clinical practice and 23 hours self-directed learning over the semester.
Note: Students who complete this unit in the summer semester will be on campus for 5.5 weeks intensive and 5 weeks on clinical.

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester B 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ingrid Brooks (Clayton) TBA (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit provides final preparation of the student for practice as a registered nurse. Adult learning principles are applied to encourage the student to identify specific learning needs and pursue opportunities to achieve tailored educational objectives. The approach to clinical learning featured in this unit enables students to explore an area of specific interest in nursing that will include a three week clinical elective placement in a relevant clinical setting. This area may be a clinical specialization such as aged care, community health, paediatrics or mental health; alternatively students may focus on specific elements of the nursing role, such as managerial or teaching aspects. An additional three week clinical consolidation placement is also included in this unit that will assist students in preparation for professional practice. The increasing importance of professional portfolios for the purpose of maintaining and demonstrating competency will be emphasized in this unit. A focus on principles of leadership, management, therapeutic and professional communication, organisational psychology, multidisciplinary team work, and clinical decision making will enable consolidation and application of prior learning in this course facilitating the transition from student to professional nurse.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, it is expected that the student will be able to:

  1. develop the ability to perform advanced skills in the areas of cardiac and respiratory patient management;
  2. reflect on and identify specific learning needs in preparation for registration as a professional nurse;
  3. utilise adult learning theories, concepts and principles to identify specific learning needs and strategies by which these can be met;
  4. demonstrate critical application of skills in communication, organisation, leadership and management;
  5. employ clinical and critical decision making skills to identify, analyse and resolve problems in the practice environment;
  6. develop and implement patient centered care interventions that encompass patients' cultural, ethical and developmental needs;
  7. reflect critically on their personal and professional development in preparation for practice as a registered nurse;
  8. practice with increasing independence in accordance with the Australian Nursing and Midwifery Council (ANMC) National Competencies for the Registered Nurse, Code of Ethics and Code of Professional Conduct for Nurses, and;
  9. demonstrate evidence of competency through the development of a professional portfolio.

Assessment

Learning contract (10%)
Clinical portfolio (30%)
Conference presentation and supporting documentation (1,000 words)(40%)
Reflective activities (20%)
Clinical placement assessment (Pass/Fail)
Students must achieve a pass in the clinical placement to pass the unit (100%) Attendance at clinical placement is mandatory.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students will have 40 hours of on campus teaching in this semester plus five weeks (200 Hours) spent in clinical practice. In addition, students will be required to undertake 32 hours self-directed learning over the semester. Self-directed learning activities will include guided reading and preparation for clinical practicum and assessment tasks.

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Munro

Synopsis

In this unit students will study cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT) and its techniques used in interaction and counselling of clients with psychological and or mental health disorders. The unit will include analysis of the theoretical underpinnings and major concepts of CBT and its techniques in clinical application. Students will develop a greater self awareness through the development of their own unique approaches to psychotherapeutic interaction using CBT with their clients, within their own clinical and cultural environment.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students are expected to:

  1. Demonstrate acquisition an application of skills and knowledge required for effective psychotherapeutic interaction using cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT);
  2. Plan interventions and establish goals to meet the needs of the client within a CBT framework;
  3. Critically analyse a variety of approaches to CBT;
  4. Develop a greater awareness of self and the ways in which personal attributes affect interaction with clients and others;
  5. Practice the relevant skills of CBT in a variety of clinical settings;
  6. Discuss a range of contemporary issues in CBT and its techniques;
  7. Critically appraise the evidence available regarding the efficacy of CBT in a variety of setting and with a variety of different client groups;
  8. Optimise the opportunity as health professionals to enhance their clinical skills when working with consumers and carers;
  9. Develop an understanding of cultural psychosocial aspects which may influence the use of CBT within the health professionals role;

Assessment

Online discussion (40%)
Written assignment (60%)
Five one day workshops (hurdle requirement)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Rebecca Vanderheide (Clayton), TBA (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit is the first of three units that examines nursing practice from a socio-political framework. In providing an understanding of fundamental concepts of nursing as a discipline, this unit introduces students to the disparate locations of nursing practice globally and allows for in-depth exploration of health care settings in the Australian health care milieu. Students will study health care through a social model of health and will situate nursing care within this model. A history of nursing and the various opportunities and barriers that have influenced the development of nursing as a profession will be explored and debated. The Australian legal system as its relationship to the health care environment will be examined and students will be required to explore the complex legal relationships that nurses have with patients, families and other health care professionals. In addition, professional and ethical codes will be introduced, explored and posited as a basis for professional nursing practice.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. outline the evolution of contemporary nursing practice from both an international and Australian perspective;
  2. describe the multi-faceted health care system in Australia and how nurses practice in these settings;
  3. debate the socio-political influences on the development of nursing as a profession;
  4. identify and appraise ethical dilemmas that arise in health care and strategies for resolving these;
  5. describe the pertinent legal concepts and mechanisms that underpin the practice of nursing;
  6. utilize and incorporate legal and professional standards in the various practice environments.

Assessment

Essay (40%)
Simulation learning (10%)
Exam (40%)
Online activity (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The weekly on campus workload requirement for the unit will be:
Lectures (4 hours)
Tutorials (`1 hours)
Online learning activities (2 hours)
In addition, students will be required to undertake 214 hours of self-directed learning over the semester. These activities will include guided reading and development of formative and summative assessments.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ann Kempe

Synopsis

This unit has a strong focus on the theory and practice underpinning working with organizations, individuals, families, groups and communities. Through discursive lectures, tutorials and interactive online sessions, students will be able to examine the skills in communication for the purpose of enhancing therapeutic relationships across the lifespan and ultimately ensuring quality health care are developed through studies in this unit. The concepts of caring and helping in nursing within a therapeutic relationship, are explored. Students engage in in-depth analysis of the various human growth and development theories. These theoretical concepts provide a foundation for students to explore aspects of the social model of health, with a particular emphasis on the provision of health care to vulnerable populations and nursing in a culturally diverse community. Within this context the concepts of cultural competence and cultural safety are explored. The development of therapeutic engagement with vulnerable groups using these concepts will be central to the learning milieu of this unit.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Examine human growth and development theories that underpin the practice of nursing;
  2. Examine the concepts of helping and caring in nursing practice across the lifespan;
  3. Discuss the theory and practice of an effective therapeutic nurse-patient relationship;
  4. Discuss the impact of cultural diversity on health and illness behaviour;
  5. The meaning of effective therapeutic communication in nursing including working with people from diverse cultural backgrounds;
  6. Identify and overcome barriers and promote opportunities for the development of therapeutic communication across the lifespan;
  7. Explore the issues of cultural safety and culturally competence within nursing practice.
  8. Assess and appropriately intervene to promote and maintain the health of individuals, families, groups and communities, with particular emphasis on the needs of vulnerable populations; and
  9. Critique evidence used to support best nursing practice.

Assessment

Essay - 3500 words (40%)
Tutorial presentation - group activity (15%)
Individual report based on tutorial presentation (25%)
On line reflective activity (20%). Includes an individual reflective submission online (15%) and responding to other student's submissions (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Weekly workload requirement: Lectures (2 hours), Tutorials (2 hour);
In addition, students will be required to 200 hours self-directed learning over the semester.

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Ann Kempe

Synopsis

This unit examines foundations of knowledge for nursing practice. Knowledge generation through research, and the application and dissemination of that knowledge, are central themes of this unit. The development of a research culture as the cornerstone of professional nursing is emphasized. Research processes from various traditions are examined and their specific relevance to nursing in diverse practice settings is explored. The significance of evidence-based nursing in the context of the contemporary health care environment is highlighted. As a key feature of this unit, knowledge transfer and translation is examined in primary, acute and rehabilitative settings. Strategies for health promotion through teaching are developed through exploration of theoretical concepts and practical application in the clinical environment.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. discuss the concept of knowledge generation in professional nursing;
  2. critique theories of learning;
  3. describe methodologies and principles of research relevant to nursing practice;
  4. demonstrate the generation of knowledge through the conduct of research;
  5. recommend strategies for the dissemination of knowledge to facilitate improved health outcomes;
  6. identify strategies for the translation of research evidence to nursing practice;
  7. develop and implement plans for health teaching and promotion;
  8. reflect upon, and evaluate self-performance in terms of the delivery of quality nursing care, and;
  9. develop increasingly autonomous practice in accordance with ANMC Competencies for the Registered Nurse and other professional standards.

Assessment

Literature review integrating critical appraisal of evidence (3,500 words)(50%)
Teaching plan & essay (2,000 words)(20%)
Teaching session (group presentation) (15%) and reflective journal (15%)(1500 words) (overall 30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students will be on campus for eight weeks in this semester as the other five weeks will be spent in clinical practice for NUR5003. The weekly on campus workload requirement for the unit will be: Face-to face and online Lectures (5 hours), Tutorials/ workshops (4 hours), Online learning activities (2 hours) over eight weeks. In addition, students will be required to undertake 195 hours self-directed learning over the semester. Please note: Students who undertake this unit in the summer semester will be on campus for 5.5 weeks intensive mode.

Prerequisites


36 points, SCA Band 1, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedGippsland Full year 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Prof Mibel Aguilar, Associate Dean (Research Degrees), Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 1, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedGippsland Full year 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Prof Mibel Aguilar, Associate Dean (Research Degrees), Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Kelli Innes (Clayton) TBA (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit is the first of four practice units in the graduate entry Master of Nursing Practice. The unit provides students with foundation knowledge and skills for nursing practice with an emphasis on physical health assessment. Knowledge and nursing practice skills are introduced around case scenarios. Each case will use an individualised client centred approach. Content to be covered within each scenario will include physiology, introductory pharmacology, application of the legal and ethical dimensions of care and nursing skills development. Clinical practice experience is an integral component of this unit and concentrates on the attainment of fundamental client care.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  • describe the physical health assessment process;
  • conduct and document a comprehensive health history;
  • conduct a comprehensive physical health assessment in a clinical environment;
  • describe the impact that health problems may have on the individual from the physical, psychological and social perspectives;
  • describe the steps involved in the process of developing appropriate plans for nursing care intervention and the evaluation of that care using standard decision making frameworks;
  • discuss the basic principles of pharmacology, therapeutic drug administration and monitoring as they relate to oral medication administration;
  • implement appropriate evidenced based nursing interventions when caring for peri-operative clients, clients with compromised wound integrity, pain management and the dying client;
  • analyse ethical issues relevant to the nursing care of clients with an alteration in health status;
  • demonstrate safe evidence based clinical practice in an acute care setting with regard to the use of universal precautions for infection control purposes and asepsis;
  • provide person-centred care according to relevant nursing care principles, to clients under the supervision of registered nursing staff and the clinical teacher:
  • reflect upon, and evaluate self-performance in terms of the delivery of quality nursing care, and
  • practice in accordance with ANMC Competencies for the Registered Nurse and other professional standards at a beginning level.

Assessment

Mid semester test (1 hour)(20%)
Written assignment (Clinical case study 3,000 - 4,000 words)(30%)
End of semester exam (2 hours)(50%)
Clinical practice assessment (Pass / Fail)
Students must achieve a pass in the clinical placement to pass the unit (100%) Attendance at clinical placement is mandatory
Calculations hurdle (100% mastery)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The weekly workload requirement for the unit will be: Lectures 5 hours, Tutorials 1 hour, Laboratories 2 hours over a 14 week semester. In addition, students will be required to undertake 160 hours of clinical practice and 40 hours self-directed learning over the semester. Self-directed learning activities will include guided reading and development of formative and summative assessments.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedGippsland Full year 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Prof Mibel Aguilar, Associate Dean (Research Degrees), Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedGippsland Full year 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Prof Mibel Aguilar, Associate Dean (Research Degrees), Faculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedHong Kong First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Bob Ribbons

Synopsis

Relationships between computers, information technologies and the provision of nursing care. Contemporary issues in nursing informatics. Skills in the use of information technologies in health care settings enabling participants to act as a conduits, facilitating and enhancing communication between and among clinicians, technicians, information systems personnel, health care executives and systems vendors. Issues of privacy, ethics, confidentiality and network security.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an in-depth understanding of how specific software application (e.g. word processing, spreadsheet, database, presentation and statistics) may be applied to nursing practice, education, administration and research;
  2. Describe the role of database, communication and network technology in the development, implementation and utilisation of information systems;
  3. Evaluate current trends in communication and network technology and their impact on Health Information Systems;
  4. Analyse and evaluate a number of information sources such as CD-ROM databases and websites related to nursing knowledge in general and specifically to Nursing Informatics;
  5. Demonstrate an ability to competently utilise communication applications such as email, newsgroups, intranet and Internet audio/video technology and evaluate their benefits to health care;
  6. Outline the role of various computer architectures in the provision of Information Systems;
  7. Analyse a number of networking structures and topographies;
  8. Understand issues related to informatics ethics, privacy and confidentiality;
  9. Evaluate the role of network security in maintaining information system integrity;
  10. Analyse a number of information technology implementation strategies and outline their impact on Nursing Informatics;
  11. Discuss the role of data standards and case mix in health informatics;
  12. Demonstrate an understanding of current trends in health care and how they influence the development, implementation and utilisation of information systems.
  13. Analyse a number of Clinical Information Systems and determine their role in improving nursing care.

Assessment

Seminar presentation: 30%
Issues paper: 40%
Tutorial participation: 30%

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Katrina Recoche (Peninsula)

Synopsis

The unit prepares student for the role of a specialist in palliative care. Topics of content include the philosophical and developmental trends of the hospice and palliative care movement, interdisciplinary team roles and the family, cultural and spiritual aspects of death and dying. Medical, nursing and complementary therapies utilised in the care of patients with terminal illnesses are discussed. Assessment and symptom management strategies in mental status, pain control and other common physical symptoms are explored. Activities in the unit include fieldwork, literature review, and computer conferencing for the study of current research in symptom management and palliative care.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. analyse the difficulties faced by persons when they encounter death, dying and bereavement;
  2. critique the philosophies which govern palliative care and the hospice movement as the means for improving care;
  3. develop a personal construct of spirituality and contrast this with the spiritual constructs of others;
  4. analyse the collaborative interdisciplinary team approach to palliative care;
  5. apply the principles of crisis intervention to prevent, identify and alleviate care giver stress and burnout;
  6. critique appropriate patient assessment tools for holistic assessment in palliative care;
  7. discuss the role of the multi disciplinary team in the provision of effective symptom control and prevention;
  8. analyse a range of innovative approaches to palliative care that enhance the quality of life of palliative care clients; and
  9. identify resources for all aspects of palliative care in a range of health care settings.

Assessment

Written assignment: 40%
Fieldwork report: 20%
Literature review: 30%
Contribution to computer conferencing activities: 10%

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

Provides an examination of contemporary issues impacting upon nursing and midwifery education within continually changing tertiary and health care settings. The unit also exposes students to a range of theoretical underpinnings that impact upon the educational process in nursing and midwifery, with emphasis placed on theories from nursing, midwifery and educational theorists. Students will apply classroom learning to teaching practice through participation in practicum that will include both classroom and clinical teaching experience.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. analyse different contexts in which education occurs in nursing and midwifery;
  2. explore the teaching roles undertaken by nurses and midwives within educational and clinical practice settings;
  3. identify the characteristics of specific educational roles including nurse/midwife academic, clinical teacher, preceptor, and mentor;
  4. examine contemporary issues impacting upon education in nursing and midwifery;
  5. apply a range of educational and nursing and midwifery theories to different nursing education contexts through the delivery of classroom and clinical teaching sessions;
  6. plan and implement classroom and clinical teaching sessions;
  7. evaluate a range of resources that may be utilised in the delivery of nursing and midwifery education;
  8. actively participate in the delivery of nursing/midwifery education sessions; and
  9. examine methods by which both clinical and academic education may be evaluated.

Assessment

Essay 40%
Reflective Journal 20%
Practicum 20%
Fieldwork report 20%

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Lisa McKenna

Synopsis

This unit is directed at extending student's knowledge of pharmacology and explores principles covering medication management within advanced nursing practice. The first module seeks to extend students knowledge of fundamental pharmacological principles of medication management which can be adopted and utilized in the advanced practice setting. Students will use the foundational knowledge of pharmokinetics, pharmacodynamics, and therapeutics, in order to critically analyse how medications affect physiological, biochemical and pathophysiological processes. With a greater appreciation of the action of drugs on body processes, students will be able to determine which medications should be administered to particular patients in order to ensure therapeutic effects are optimized and adverse effects are minimized. Students will articulate the key pharmacological characteristics of drug classes, as well as derive an understanding of specific features of individual drugs.
The second module extends students' knowledge of social, political and ethical principles of medication management, and allows the student to explore how these principles are applied in the advanced practice setting. The concepts of pain management, adverse drug reactions and medication use across the lifespan will be considered. Students will individualise the use of the clinical decision making process as the framework for gathering and organizing medication information, planning, prescribing, administering, documenting and evaluation to suit their own practice needs. Students will extend their knowledge of the learning and teaching strategies for patient education and the government policies that are relevant to nurse prescribing. Commonwealth and State laws affecting the control of medication will also be applied to the advanced practice setting. Students will address the socio-cultural and ethical issues that affect the relationship between the nurse practitioner and patient, and will examine the style and required particulars for written prescriptions. Equipped with this knowledge, students will be expected to critically review the application of clinical pharmacology to their specific area of advanced practice.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students are expected to be able to:

  1. Describe fundamental principles of pharmacology;
  2. Describe the processes involved in pharmacokinetics along with factors that influence these processes;
  3. Explain indications, actions, adverse reactions and contraindications for commonly prescribed medication;
  4. Demonstrate clinical decision making ability relating to pharmacology within own specific practice area;
  5. Provide appropriate education for clients based upon individual medication regimes;
  6. Describe medication regimes for discipline-specific clinical conditions in their area of practice;
  7. Critically analyse the implications of medication use across the lifespan;
  8. Describe legal, ethical and professional responsibilities associated with prescription and administration of medications in their jurisdiction;
  9. Critically analyse social and political factors that influence use of medications in their jurisdiction.

Assessment

Mid-semester on-line examination (20%), End of Semester written examination (50%)(must pass exam to achieve a pass in the unit), Portfolio activities (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 hour tutorial per week.

Co-requisites

3565, 3557 and 3900


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedHong Kong First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Meredith McIntyre

Synopsis

Health professionals are employed in a wide variety of workplaces where they are often required to deliver education programs to a wide range of professional and client groups. In many of these workplaces, there is an expectation that health professionals will be able to develop education and training programs that are responsive to local needs. The aim of this unit is to assist the learner to develop skills in the area of education program development. This flexible unit will allow the learner to work through the process of program development. To achieve this the learner will identify a workplace learning need to be addressed, then develop goals and objectives and formulate an education program to address the identified need.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the learner should be able to:

  1. discuss the theoretical underpinnings related to developing an education program;
  2. undertake a training needs analysis in their workplace;
  3. analyse the results and identify the learning need required;
  4. explain the principles of planning cost effective education programs;
  5. develop goals and objectives that will relate to identified learning needs;
  6. explore principles used in designing program content;
  7. design an education program related to the identified learning need; and
  8. develop a program evaluation tool using educationally sound principles.

Assessment

Education needs assessment - 40%
Essay - 30%
Portfolio of program - 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24 hours per week, comprising guided readings, online and other activities and/or tutorials, including self directed learning. (Total 312 hours).

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedHong Kong Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Virginia Plummer

Synopsis

This unit introduces nurses to the role they play in emergency preparedness and disaster management in local and international settings. Areas of focus include the role in planning, partnerships, disaster response, and delivery of services.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe the essential elements of leadership and management for nursing in health services in emergency preparedness and disaster recovery;
  2. Identify resources and strategies to enhance the resilience of the nursing workforce in disaster and emergency settings;
  3. Identify strategies for developing the role/s of nurses from a range of clinical and nonclinical backgrounds, in these settings;
  4. Identify and contribute to directions for education in disaster and emergency nursing;
  5. Identify and contribute to directions for research in disaster and emergency nursing.

Assessment

Written assignment (40%),
Presentation (30%)
On-line discussion (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24 hours per week including contact time (2 hour lecture, 2 hr tutorial/small group classes or team activities), site visits and/or fieldwork, and self-directed learning (reading, worksheets, assignments, database and web-based research, analysis of published articles and case studies, informal study groups and reflective activities); averaged over the 13 week semester - a total of 312 hours.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Virginia Plummer

Synopsis

In this unit the student explores a range of practices and activities derived from integrated primary care, case management and continuous quality improvement concepts. Participants will review and critically evaluate innovative nursing frameworks and the potential for application of specific models, practices, protocols and tools, such as clinical pathways and using patient data for research and management. Students will complete a case management project in the clinical setting.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student should be able to :

  1. Examine a wide range of health care management concepts and their application to coordinated care, case management and continuous quality improvement in a range of primary and other health care settings;
  2. Evaluate patient care delivery systems for their impact on quality improvement and care outcomes;
  3. Examine concepts of managed care and their impact on the health care settings;
  4. Determine ways in which patient focused care is provided, measured, understood and coordinated by nurses and other members of the multi-disciplinary health care team;
  5. Explore the development of new roles for primary care and other health professionals in patient care delivery including running clinics for specific health problems or particular patient groups;
  6. Evaluate the ways in which nurses are restructuring their organisational and clinical operations within the context of multidisciplinary health care teams and the current health care planning environment;
  7. Examine issues surrounding information management and their application to coordinate care,case management and continuous quality improvement;
  8. Develop linkage skills to aid the co-ordination of patient care;
  9. Develop a component of a quality improvement or case management program in a practice-based context;
  10. Compare and contrast methodologies to evaluate program development and implementation.

Assessment

Assignment: 20%
Presentation/on-line activities: 30%
Field-based report: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

1250


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Charanjit Singh

Synopsis

In this unit students will study a variety of psychological interventions and counselling. This will include analysis of the theoretical underpinnings and major concepts of each approach. The students will develop a greater self awareness. Students will be assisted in the development of their own unique approaches to psychological intervention with their clients.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit the students are expected to :

  1. Critically analyse a variety of approaches to psychological interventions;
  2. Develop a greater awareness of self and the ways in which personal attributes affect interaction with clients and others;
  3. Demonstrate acquisition of communication skills required for effective psychotherapeutic interaction;
  4. Plan interventions and establish goals to meet the needs of the client;
  5. Practice the relevant skills for effective counselling in a variety of clinical settings;
  6. Discuss a range of contemporary issues in psychological interventions;
  7. Critically appraise the evidence available regarding the efficacy of the approaches to psychological interventions;
  8. Develop an understanding of cultural psychosocial aspects which influence the development of a therapeutic relationship and counselling role.

Assessment

Computer conferences(40%)
Written assignment (60%)
Clinical assessment (Hurdle requirement)(Pass/Fail)

Chief examiner(s)

Prohibitions

NSG5214 Developing a therapeutic alliance


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedGippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

The nature of mental health and illness; the nursing process in psychiatric nursing; roles and functions of mental health nurses; contexts of care; mental health problems and disorders; therapeutic interventions in mental health care; ethical and legal issues; specialisation in psychiatric/mental health nursing.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:

  1. Conduct comprehensive mental health nursing assessment including risk assessment;

  1. Describe the commonly used diagnostic classification systems in psychiatry and mental health nursing;

  1. Promote consumer participation in all aspects of mental health care;

  1. Demonstrate advanced mental health nursing skills in planning, implementing and evaluating mental health nursing care for people with mental disorders;

  1. Describe the principles underlying contemporary therapeutic interventions for people with mental health disorders;

  1. Demonstrate skills and knowledge in the use of a range of contemporary physical therapies including psychopharmalogical preparations, electroconvulsive therapy, and milieu therapies (e.g. high dependency, seclusion, Snoezelen, etc.);

  1. Describe relevant legislation and policy impacting upon the professional practice of mental health nursing;

  1. Critically analyse ethical issues in nursing people with mental health disorders;

  1. Critically appraise research evidence applicable to mental health nursing practice;

  1. Ensure that mental health nursing practice is culturally appropriate.

Assessment

Written assignment (3000 words): 30%
Online exercises: 30%
Examination: 40%
Clinical skills assessment (hurdle requirement)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Beverley Copnell

Synopsis

The paediatric nurse requires a diverse knowledge and skill base to assess and manage patients in a variety of settings. The unit enables the student to develop proficiency in the holistic management of sick children, beyond the beginning specialist level, and prepares students for leadership roles in their practice area.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be expected to be able to:

  1. describe the aetiology, clinical manifestations and pathophysiology of a range of diseases/conditions observed in children;
  2. plan and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic nursing interventions related to the management of paediatric patients;
  3. plan and implement appropriate, evidence based, therapeutic nursing interventions related to the management of children with complex health needs;
  4. critically analyse the clinical issues supporting and complicating advanced practice in paediatric nursing;
  5. analyse the collaborative interdisciplinary team approach to management of paediatric patients

Assessment

Take home examination (30%)
Written assignment 1 (3000 words)(30%)
Written assignment 2 (5000 words)(40%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Flexible)

Notes

==Fieldwork==
Minimum 1 day per week of supernumerary supervised practice in Nurse Practitioner role

Synopsis

This unit enables integration of advanced knowledge and skills and their application in assessing, diagnosing and managing stable, unpredictable and complex patient conditions. It includes appropriate use of diagnostic tests, prescribing of medications and referral to other health professionals. Use of technology in Nurse Practitioner practice, including information technology and information management, is emphasised. The unit promotes a holistic model of care that includes recognition of and respect for cultural identity and lifestyle choices.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be expected to be able to:

  1. Demonstrate extended skills in diagnostic reasoning
  2. Analyse clinical assessment findings to make decisions about investigative options
  3. Synthesise and interpret findings from clinical assessment and diagnostic tests to plan and implement appropriate, evidence-based preventive and/or therapeutic interventions
  4. Analyse the role of technology in supporting health care in a specific area of practice
  5. Demonstrate a patient-centred approach to the planning and delivery of health care
  6. Analyse the specific health care needs of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples and incorporate their cultural beliefs and practices into all interactions and care planning
  7. Critically analyse the concept of cultural safety in relation to Nurse Practitioner practice.

Assessment

Clinical portfolio - hurdle
Clinical assessment - 40%
Written examination - 40%
Written assignment - 20%

Off-campus attendance requirements

Residential school 1 week
22 hrs per week online activities and self-directed learning

Prerequisites

NUR5703 Advanced pathophysiology and health assessment
NUR5208 Therapeutic medication management

Prohibitions

Not available to students enrolled in other postgraduate programs


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedNot offered in 2013

Notes

==Fieldwork==
Students are required to be employed in an advanced practice role, with support for supervised extended clinical practice

Synopsis

This unit is concerned with the professional efficacy and clinical leadership of Nurse Practitioners. NP practice is structured in a nursing model and enhanced by autonomy and accountability. This unit provides an examination of contemporary issues that impact on Nurse Practitioner practice and inform the scope of the NP role in specific practice areas. It also focuses on the development of communication and leadership skills specific to NP practice.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students will be expected to be able to:

  1. Critically analyse the scope of Nurse Practitioner practice in a specific practice area
  2. Demonstrate understanding of the professional, legal and ethical responsibilities of advanced nursing practice
  3. Critically analyse national, local and clinical issues that support or complicate Nurse Practitioner practice
  4. Critically analyse and implement communication strategies that promote positive multidisciplinary clinical partnerships
  5. Critically analyse the impact of social and cultural factors on the health of individuals and communities, and the implications for Nurse Practitioner practice
  6. Critically reflect on the Nurse Practitioner role and the application of extended practice competencies within a nursing model of practice

Assessment

Clinical portfolio - hurdle
Written assignment - 50%
Presentation - 30%
Reflective essay - 20%

Off-campus attendance requirements

Residential school 1 week
22 hrs per week online activities and self-directed learning

Prerequisites

NUR5411 Advanced clinical assessment and diagnostic reasoning

Prohibitions

Not available to students enrolled in other postgraduate programs


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ian Munro

Synopsis

This unit focuses on key concepts such as models of mental health service delivery, consumer and carer participation and perspectives, and professional issues in mental health nursing. It provides an in-depth analysis of each major component of an integrated mental health service and also covers special populations and transcultural mental health issues.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit it is expected that students will be able to:

  1. Describe the characteristics of an efficient and cost effective comprehensive mental health service;
  2. Critically analyse contemporary approaches to mental health service delivery;
  3. Discuss the importance of consumer and carer perspectives and participation in mental health service delivery;
  4. Describe the mental health nurse's scope of practice in a range of health care contexts;
  5. Demonstrate understanding of the needs of special populations including people from non-English speaking backgrounds, refugees, homeless people;
  6. Discuss the influence of culture, gender and coexisting conditions on the care of people with mental health problems and disorders;
  7. Act as an effective leader, health educator, resource person and catalyst for change to individuals, families, health professionals and the community.

Assessment

Written assignment (3,000 wds) 40%
Written assignment (3,000 wds) 40%
Online exercises 20%
Clinical skills assessment (hurdle requirement)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedGippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sonia Allen (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to prepare students to promote optimal care for older people in acute and continuing health care environments. A primary aim in this regard is to provide a foundation for health assessment and care planning that recognises the key policy issues and the spectrum of models of care relevant to the delivery of nursing care for the older person.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students are expected to be able to:

  1. Describe the components of a comprehensive health assessment for the older person;
  2. Demonstrate a sound understanding of the effects of age-related changes on the structure and function of selected body systems and the implications for health assessment;
  3. Evaluate different biological and psychosocial perspectives on ageing;
  4. Analyse recent and current models of care for acute, rehabilitation, aged care and palliative care nursing that enhance the quality of life and quality of care of older clients;
  5. Discuss the palliative care needs and services for the older people in the context of their family, caregivers and home environment.
  6. Discuss the social construction of ageing, sexuality, spirituality, environments for living and the quality of life of older people and health care .
  7. Critically discuss the impact of sociocultural attitudes, demographic factors, political pressures and economic constraints on the older person and nursing practice, in local and international contexts;
  8. Explore the achievements in health and aged care policy and the social and economic progress that has influenced nurse practice and service delivery in aged care; and
  9. Critically reflect on current and future gerontological nursing practice and the role of the nurse in contemporary health care service delivery.

Assessment

Exam 40%
two written assignments 30% each

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Ian Mosley (Peninsula)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to prepare students to practice at an advanced level within a broad range of clinical practice environments. This unit is offered in recognition that an experienced graduate registered nurse will be able to take a leadership role in promoting improvements to clinical, educational and administrative areas of nursing practice. This is a largely, self-directed unit that enables the student to identify learning needs and to meet those needs in a creative and imaginative way.
The unit lends itself to the application of theory and research to specific interventions encompassed in the spectrum of models of care that support nursing practice. It enables the student to apply topics presented separately in the previous course units and to integrate previous knowledge and skills to support problem identification, specialty knowledge and skill development in areas such as but not confined to, decision-making and problem solving, in the context of advanced practice.

Outcomes

The overall objectives for this unit are broad because each student is expected to negotiate and set their own goals in consultation with their lecturer. In general, it is expected that on completion of this unit students will have gained clinical practice experience in:

  1. Formulating a principles-based nursing practice project in the area of clinical speciality;
  2. Using initiative and independent problem-solving learning skills;
  3. Utilizing interpersonal skills and available resources to implement a nursing practice project;
  4. Consideration of the unique cultural aspects of the context of practice;
  5. Producing a scholarly report on the project.

Assessment

Project Proposal 25%, Progress Report 25%, Final Project Report 50%.

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Postgraduate specialty study or foundation unit.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Beverley Copnell

Synopsis

This unit explores concepts intrinsic to the growing child and family within a framework of family centred care. The specific focus is on perspectives of physical, cognitive and social growth and development of the child set within the context of the evolving family unit. Family life, role relationships, parenting and other family issues are examined in relation to their influence on the development and health of the child and family members. Aspects of health crisis and the impact that this has on the growing child and family are considered.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Locate and critically evaluate appropriate data to support evidence-based family and child-centered nursing care;
  2. Discuss the various theories relating to the physical, psychological, emotional and social development of children from birth to adolescence;
  3. Critically analyse the implications of illness and hospitalisation for children at each stage of development;
  4. Synthesise information in order to identify and deliver nursing interventions to foster normal development (including referral to other members of the healthcare team as appropriate);
  5. Critically appraise family dynamics as they influence the health and well being of a child;
  6. Critically analyse the impact that a health crisis has on the child and family;
  7. Synthesis information in order to identify and deliver appropriate nursing interventions that support the child and family with a health crisis;
  8. Critically reflect on the practice of family-centered care.

Assessment

Formative:
At least 3 contributions to the Moodle discussion site during the semester (hurdle)
Submission of plan for written assignment 1 (hurdle)

Summative:
Written assignment 1 40%; 4000 words
Written assignment 2 40%; 4000 words
Reflective essay 20%; 2000 words

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Gippsland First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Md. Nadim Rahman (Peninsula Campus), Catherine Chung (Gippsland Campus)

Synopsis

The student will develop proficiency in health through the development of skills related to: assessment interviewing; physical appraisal; assessment data analysis; incorporating changes in health assessment related to the age of the client and cultural and ethnic variations; comprehensive, periodic and focused health assessments. All students are required to have clinical support for the duration of course.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of normal physiological processes;
  2. Accurately describe the aetiology, clinical manifestations and pathophysiology of a range of diseases/conditions observed in specialty practice;
  3. Accurately record an in-depth patient health history appropriate to the student's discipline'
  4. Incorporate age related differences, cultural, and ethnic variations relevant to the patient's health history;
  5. Perform and document a systematic physical health assessment utilising health assessment tools and techniques;
  6. Formulate clinical impressions based on an accurate analysis of health assessment data;
  7. Competently evaluate clinical problems and perform comprehensive health assessments in a selected area of health care.

Assessment

Multiple choice and short answer tests (60%)
Health Assessment Clinical Examination (Pass/Fail)
Case study (40%).

** Students must achieve a combined pass grade on the multiple choice/ Short answer tests, including the Health Assessment Clinical Examination.

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Attendance at residential schools held oncampus.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedBerwick First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Suzanne Willey

Synopsis

This unit has been developed in partnership with The Victorian Foundation for Survivors of Torture and the State Wide Refugee Nurse Facilitator and sponsored by the Victorian Government. The unit will assist nurses to work with refugees within a social model of health to identify gaps in health services and advocate for refugees in the context of their community through an analysis of the socio-political aspects of the refugee context and an indepth understanding of the effects of torture and trauma on the health and health care of refugees. The unit includes skill development in refugee health assessment and responding to issues of health literacy, organization and community capacity building and evaluation in refugee health and wellbeing.

Outcomes

This unit will provide opportunities for students to:

  1. Discuss the global and socio-political aspects of refugee and asylum seeker journeys and settlement
  2. Examine primary health care and service co-ordination practices within the refugee context
  3. Analyse and understand the impact of torture and trauma on refugee populations and the Australian health care system
  4. Analyse approaches to cultural responsiveness, health literacy and consumer participation within the refugee context
  5. Identify nursing skills required for refugee health assessment and care within the individual and family context
  6. Recognise and develop professional boundaries and skills to assist the nurse/midwife when working with refugees

Assessment

Essay 3-4000 words: 30%
Case Study Presentation 30 minutes (this will be an online presentation for offcampus students and a face to face discussion for oncampus students during the second workshop): 20%
Fieldwork Project 3-4000 words: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

2 x full day workshops and 6 hours per week online activities


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedGippsland First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)TBA

Synopsis

This unit examines the notion that caring is a central component of nursing theory, research and practice. Theories of caring developed by Watson, Benner, Leininger and others are critically examined. Caring is viewed as linked with socio-cultural values, ethics, spirituality, politics, economics, and, philosophy. Philosophical views are drawn from the existentialists, phenomenologists and feminists. Unit also examines holistic healing modalities, complementary and alternative therapies; individual's accounts of the experience of illness; and caring work in today's health care environment. Students are encouraged to relate caring to human growth as a search for meaning and creativity.

Outcomes

It is anticipated that in undertaking this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Explore the philosophical underpinnings of human caring;
  2. Critically evaluate theories of caring in nursing;
  3. Appreciate how dimensions of holistic caring can enhance practice;
  4. Explain how specific caring-healing modalities can be used to achieve optimal health outcomes;
  5. Discuss issues in caring work in the contemporary health care environment;
  6. Analyse personal accounts of the illness experience and caring;
  7. Evaluate methodologies for researching caring in nursing; and
  8. Critically reflect upon holism, and caring themes and issues in their own area of nursing practice.

Assessment

Essay 3,000 words (30%), Essay 6,00 - 6,500 words (70%).


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Nursing and Midwifery
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Suzanne Willey

Synopsis

This unit identifies the World Health Organisations role in advocating and supporting the global health agenda of health for all. Primary health care as a philosophy and a model of health service provision are described. Health education and promotion as strategies for achieving health for all are examined. Nurses are encourages to develop health education and health promotion skills that can be utilised in our contexts of practice to promote population wellbeing.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students are expected to be able to:

  1. Expand on concepts from previous studies of health and nursing to be able to undertake leadership roles in population health, health promotion and education
  2. Identify, analyse and evaluate national and international frameworks for primary health care and health promotion initiatives with special references to the work of the World Health Organisation (WHO);
  3. Identify major community health needs and issues of clinical relevance, with particular focus on vulnerable communities
  4. Analyse various methods of population-based approaches to data collection
  5. Utilise national and international collaborative health practice models in designing population-based approaches to primary health care
  6. Apply primary health care frameworks and health promotion principles such as equity, community engagement and patrnerships to undertake a health needs assessment

Assessment

Assignment: 70%
Seminar presentation or alternative written work: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

3565 and 1250


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Term 3 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Assoc. Prof Louise Farnworth

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the profession of occupational therapy and key knowledge, skills and attitudes that are essential for professional practice. Theoretical foundations of occupational therapy will include: theoretical concepts and models underpinning health and occupational therapy practice; principles and mechanisms underlying the relationship between the person, their environment and occupations, and how this relates to human health and wellbeing, and the occupational therapist within the interdisciplinary team. Legal, cultural and ethical issues relevant to professional practice will be explored. Students will learn beginning communication and interviewing skills together with other pre-clinical skills, such as safe practice. Students will develop beginning skills in occupational therapy problem solving and clinical reasoning processes. Case scenarios will be used throughout. Students will undertake simulated and practice based learning throughout the semester 2 days per week.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Describe the historical origins of occupation as therapy;
  2. Explain the role of an occupational therapist and how it is similar and different from other health professionals within an interdisciplinary teams;
  3. Describe underpinning principles of occupational therapy practice including what it means to be client-centred and clinical reasoning;
  4. Describe key features of occupational therapy models of practice based on relationships between person, environment and occupation;
  5. Apply skills of self critique and self reflection to group learning tasks;
  6. Understand concepts related to disability and describe challenges and barriers likely to confront a person with a disability and how these affect participation in the community;
  7. Define, compare and contrast biomedical and ecological models of health, including the World Health Organisation International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF) framework, and describe the value of these models in the health care settings.
  8. Identify the behavioural, socio-cultural, environmental, economic and political determinants of health and describe how these may affect care provision in health care settings.
  9. Identify the characteristics that distinguish ideal professional behaviours;
  10. Describe ethical and legal issues pertinent to a practicing occupational therapist;
  11. Examine safety issues in the workplace and outline standard emergency and infection control procedures;
  12. Describe different methods of recording and reporting medical information and the role of professional records for communication;
  13. Demonstrate effective communication and interview skills for practice and professional behaviours;
  14. Describe and apply the clinical reasoning process to the occupational therapy process in a simulated and practice situation;
  15. Identify how key theoretical models of human occupation relate to client-centred occupational therapy practice;
  16. Develop a beginning competency in client handling skills and basic skills in assistive technology equipment prescription and use;
  17. Locate, retrieve and use resources that inform understanding about health and occupational issues.

Assessment

Three x 10 minute class presentations: 5%
Fieldwork reflective journal (1,000 words): 5%
Comparison of two models (2000 words): 20%
Peer reviewer of comparison of two models (500 words): 5%
Written examination (2 hours): 40%
Triple jump (1.5 hours): 25%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

10 hours on-campus per week, 2 days fieldwork per week, and 6 hours on-line lecture material

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Co-requisites

Available only to Master of Occupational Therapy Practice students


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Term 4 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)A/Pro Louise Farnworth

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the relationship between occupation health and well-being that supports occupational therapy practice from a lifespan perspective, and will explore experiences of engaging in occupation from psychological and occupational processes inherent in development. It will examine the progressive cognitive, behavioural, emotional, psychosocial and occupational changes occurring with age and when people's occupations are disrupted through disability, illness or occupational deprivation. Students will engage in experiential activities, self-reflection and interactive teaching and experiential learning and teaching to develop skills in occupational analysis, critical appraisal of literature and research, teamwork, client centered practice and culturally sensitive intentional communication. Case scenarios will be used throughout and students will undertake practice- based learning throughout the semester.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe and explain classifications of human occupation and human use of time.
  2. Describe further how the interaction of person-environment-occupation relates to peoples' health and wellbeing.
  3. Apply skills of self critique and self reflection to group learning tasks;
  4. Articulate and contrast contemporary developmental lifespan concepts, theories and research;
  5. Identify and discuss the physical, cognitive, emotional, behavioural, social and occupational aspects inherent in development across the lifespan, as well as some of the key inherent and external influences on development
  6. Explain challenges common to adolescence and other lifespan transition points that may impact on occupational functioning and psychosocial wellbeing;
  7. Identify and discuss the cognitive and emotional changes that can occur in early and middle adulthood and consider how these impact on occupational functioning and psychosocial wellbeing
  8. Identify and discuss the effects of physiological change and life experience on older adults' cognitive, emotional and occupational functioning and psychosocial wellbeing; and,
  9. Describe and critique literature related to the physical, social, cultural, economic, political and institutional environments of individuals and groups and comment on the validity of this information for occupation-based practices
  10. Observe, describe and analyse typical childhood occupations in relationship to developmental theories;
  11. Demonstrate effective (verbal, non-verbal and written) communication and interview skills for practice and professional behaviours;
  12. Describe and apply the clinical reasoning process to the occupational therapy process in a practice situation;
  13. Identify how key theoretical models of human occupation relate to client-centred occupational therapy practice;
  14. Identify data collection methods, collect and analyse data on the occupational performance of self and others.
  15. Locate, retrieve, analyse and critique resources that inform understanding about health and key occupational issues and concepts for practice.
  16. Identify and describe types of research frameworks and approaches to data analysis applied in contemporary developmental lifespan research.

Assessment

1. Hurdle - Attendance at least 80% of the PBLs and practical sessions including class data collection exercises
2. Hurdle - Self evaluation and reflective group participation in PBLs including class data collection exercise
3. Hurdle - Successful completion of fieldwork including attendance at fieldwork briefing; submission of (i) standard signed fieldwork education forms (ii) Timesheet and (iii) Student review of placement (iv) reflective journal
4. In class presentations 3 x 10 minutes: 5%
5. Essay on the relationship between development, and functioning at specific life stages, 1500 words: 15%
6. Report from observation of a child, 1000 words: 10%
7. Report on a data set that examines the relationship between age and psychosocial functioning and wellbeing, 1500 words: 15%
8. Written examination, 2 hours: 3 0%
9. Triple Jump Part 1 (written exam) and Part 2 (oral exam) 1.5 hours: 20%
10. Oral peer examiner,10 minutes: 5%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

9 weeks of academic/fieldwork (accelerated program). PBL tutorials (5 hours per week on campus), lectures (4-6 hours per week on-line), practicals (4-6 hours per week on campus), fieldwork placement weeks 1-9 (up to 14 hours per week).

This unit applies to the following area(s) of study

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

Available only to Master of Occupational Therapy Practice students


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2013 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Ms Lisa O'Brien

Synopsis

This unit will take a problem solving/ clinical reasoning approach to the management of upper limb injuries encompassing the acute and recovery phases as well as chronic conditions. It will build on existing knowledge of human structure and function and introduce concepts of tissue injury and repair to enable students to identify appropriate therapeutic strategies, depending on the person's stage in recovery from injury. Students should be able to identify the anatomical structures of the upper limb, and describe their specific functions. These will include bones, articular surfaces, joints, muscles, and nerves. Students will have the opportunity to develop skills in the fabrication of thermoplastic splints appropriate to complex clinical scenarios including tendon repair, arthritis, peripheral nerve trauma/repair, tenosynovitis, and fractures. Students will also attend an acute hand therapy clinic on 2 occasions to observe a client's recovery post surgery.

Outcomes

  1. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge of human hand structure and function, and describe the pathology and healing process in common upper limb injuries/conditions;
  2. Develop and describe intervention strategies (which may include an orthotic device/splint) for clients with specific upper limb injuries, supported with sound clinical reasoning;
  3. Demonstrate skill at the standard required for an advanced practitioner in the manufacture, fit and evaluation of specific splints for a variety of conditions which affect the occupational performance of specific clients;
  4. Demonstrate competence in searching, describing, summarizing, and presenting (verbally and in writing) the evidence from scientific literature on a specific topic related to hand therapy.

Assessment

Assessment includes 80% attendance requirements, attendance at an acute hand
therapy clinic, a 20 minute presentation at a seminar, submission and critique of all splints made, as well as one 1000 word and one 2000 word essay. Students must gain at least 50% of available summative assessment task marks and complete all formative assessment in order to pass the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

On Campus: 40 hours lecture/practicums in block mode
4 hours clinic
attendance
16 hours attendance at seminar where students present their project outcomes. 60 hours of private study (including pre-reading for class times, research into and preparation of seminar presentation, preparation of assignments). Students will be required to attend two sessions at a private hand therapy clinic as well.

Prerequisites

Completion of an undergraduate degree or equivalent in occupational therapy or physiotherapy.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rachael McDonald

Synopsis

Assistive technology promotes greater independence for people with disabilities by enabling them to perform tasks that they otherwise would have great difficulty or not be able to accomplish. This unit will involve problem solving and clinical reasoning to help the students to develop into competent assistive technology professionals and providers. The course will consist of information relating to social and political aspects of people with disability and technology. The areas of Seating and Positioning, Mobility, Augmentative and Alternative Communication (AAC), Daily Living Technologies and Assistive Technology Access will be studied in detail. Students will choose one area for their first assignment, and will attend 2 separate clinics each of 4 hours duration to observe clinical practice.

Outcomes

At the completion of this course, students will:

  1. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge of a range of clinical conditions for whom various assistive technologies are applicable;
  2. Demonstrate an advanced understanding of the barriers and enhancers created by using assistive and adaptive technologies for disabled people;
  3. Describe the social and political aspects of disability with reference to assistive and adaptive technologies;
  4. Develop and describe appropriate assistive technology provision for clients with specific conditions, supported with sound clinical reasoning;
  5. Demonstrate advanced skills in assessing, applying for funding and prescribing a range of Assistive Technology Devices for clients in everyday practice;
  6. Understand and implement the principles of adaptive and assistive technology in the areas of: Seating and Positioning, Mobility, Augmentative and Alternative Communication, Daily Living Technologies and Assistive Technology Access;
  7. Display specialist information in one of the areas of Seating and Positioning, Mobility, Augmentative and Alternative Communication, Daily Living Technologies and Assistive Technology Access;
  8. Demonstrate professional competence in searching and summarising (verbally and in writing) the scientific literature on a specific topic related to assistive technology.

Assessment

Seminar presentation (20%)
Essay (1000 words)(20%)
Literature Review (3000 words)(30%)
Exam (30%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

40 hours attendance in lectures/practicums (block mode), 4 hrs clinic
attendance (over 2 separate occasions), 16 hrs seminar attendance (including a 20 minute presentation), 2 written assignments (1000 and 2000 words)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Ted Brown

Synopsis

This unit will provide an in depth overview of the issues related to the assessment of children (ethical, legal, professional, educational, clinical). The unit will start by introducing the reasons, uses, and purposes of assessment. Specific methods (e.g.observation, objective performance, parent-report) related to the assessment of children will be reviewed. Particular attention will be paid to issues related to family-centred practice and assessing children in naturalistic environments. Different contexts (e.g., clinic, community, school, home) where assessment is completed, issues related to the assessment of children at different age levels / developmental levels and the evaluation of children with special needs will be discussed. Ethical, policy and legal issues related to the assessment of children will be presented and critiqued. Specific types of assessment tools, scales, and instruments appropriate for use with children will be presented and reviewed. This will provide a broad base of 7 knowledge and skills for occupational therapy and other health professional students wishing to work with children and families in clinical, educational, home, and community settings.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students will:

  1. Describe the characteristics, types, and methods of assessment best suited for use with children and their families
  2. Develop and describe assessment approaches appropriate for children at different

developmental levels and for children with special needs

  1. Describe the assessment approaches that best fit with naturalistic assessment and family centred practice
  2. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge of ethical, policy, and legal issues related to the assessment of children.
  3. Demonstrate an advanced knowledge of assessment tools, scales, and instruments used to evaluate the skills, interests, roles, and abilities of children
  4. Demonstrate competence in searching, describing, summarising, and presenting (verbally and in writing) the evidence from research literature on a specific topic related to child assessment.

Assessment

Seminar presentation (10%)
Critique (1000 words)(30%)
Class participation (10%)
Essay (3000 words)(50%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

On Campus: 3 hours per week of lectures plus 1 hour per week of
tutorial. 8 hours per week of private study (reading, literature review, practicing skills,
preparation of assignments, and other self-directed learning activities). Averaged over the 12 week semester - a total of 156 hours.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Helen Bourke-Taylor

Synopsis

This unit will comprehensively cover occupational therapy assessment and management options for young children with developmental delays and common diagnoses such as autism spectrum disorder and cerebral palsy. Etiology and epidemiology of conditions and the occupational therapy role in evaluation are described. The impact of accommodating the significant needs of a child with a disability in a family will be described and the impact on both all family member's occupational therapy service delivery explored in depth. Students will learn about occupational therapy methods using the International Classification of Functioning and Disability (ICF) and family centred practice. Key aspects of the child's development, including communication and social skills, self care, motor skills, cognitive skills, and play will be examined. The impact of a child's delayed development or additional care needs on mothers (as primary carers) and other family members, will be described and family centered service delivery emphasized. Co-occupation will be highlighted as the main framework for understanding the child's development of occupational performance within daily childhood occupations and family routines. Interventions will be evaluated via guidelines for evidence based practice. The major frameworks for current early intervention methods will be evaluated. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment and students will examine several case studies in detail.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students will:

  1. Compare the WHO ICF, Social model of disability, the premises of the United Nations Charter on the rights of children and occupational therapy practice for young children with delayed development and additional care needs.
  2. Evaluate the impact of a young child's disability on the occupations of the primary caregiver and the family.
  3. Demonstrate occupational therapy practice that accommodates the needs of the primary carer and other family members.
  4. Explain both typical and atypical childhood occupations and development in the first five years and the impact of major developmental disabilities.
  5. Evaluate the occupational therapy needs of a young child with developmental delay within the home, and community contexts.
  6. Design an occupational therapy program that is family centered and builds the young child's strengths, capabilities and participation in family life.
  7. Design an occupational therapy program that accommodates the needs of the primary caregiver.
  8. Select appropriate occupational therapy intervention applicable to young children with a range of different disabilities (i.e. Autism, cerebral palsy) to improve the development of capabilities in childhood occupations.
  9. Explain evidence based occupational therapy management options that the young child's participation in home, school and community life, as well as the families functioning.
  10. Develop professional report writing skills that aptly describe a child's capabilities, challenges that optimize the child's supports, in preparation for school entry.
  11. Identify evidence-based practice approaches to occupational therapy interventions for young children with delayed development or diagnosis of a lifelong disability.

Assessment

Assessment includes attendance requirements, a 30 minute presentation at a seminar (20%) and submission of a 1,000 word summary (10%), and active participation in online discussion boards, research reviews and proposals and short quizzes (3,500 words total over 8 weeks)(70%).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

60 hrs interaction with online lectures and course material, and participation in online tutorials, communications with other students and tutor (online delivery only), 16 hrs seminar attendance (including one day in the initial week and one in the last week with a 30 minute presentation), 1 written assignments (1000 words), Eight discussion postings (3, 500 words); 88 hours of private study.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2013 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Helen Bourke-Taylor

Synopsis

This unit will comprehensively cover occupational therapy assessment and management options for school aged children with significant neurodevelopmental disabilities. Etiology and epidemiology of conditions will be described. Students will learn about occupational therapy methods using the International Classification of Functioning and Disability (ICF) and family centred practice. The impact that neurodevelopmental disability can have on the child's body structure and function; capabilities in daily occupations and activities will be covered in details. Environmental influences that impact the child such as culture, institutional and attitudinal barriers in the community will be explored and related to occupational therapy interventions. Functional challenges will be examined from the perspective of motor, cognitive, sensory, perceptual and behavioural difficulties experienced by the child. Interventions will emphasize a skill building, strengths based approach. The major frameworks for current intervention methods will be presented including family centred functional therapy; goal directed therapy; conductive education and techniques that recognize sensory processing and environmental or task modification as a major method for creating routines that promote both motor skill development and the child's inclusion within family and community environments. Learning will be experienced in the online classroom environment and students will examine several case studies in detail.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students will:

  1. Compare the WHO ICF, Social model of disability, the premises of the United Nations Charter on the rights of the child and occupational therapy practice for children with neurodevelopmental disability;
  2. Evaluate the impact of culture and environmental influences on the capabilities and participation of school aged children with neurodevelopmental disability;
  3. Accurately describe the most common causes and co-existing conditions that occur with a diagnosis that results in developmental and functional challenges;
  4. Design an occupational therapy program that is appropriate for a specific school aged child, from the perspective of one of the major approaches that facilitates the participation of children with neurodevelopment disabilities in daily life;
  5. Evaluate impairments of body structure and function in school aged children with developmental and functional challenges;
  6. Evaluate a school aged child with a motor challenge who has limitations in self care, leisure and play skills and preschool or school related productive occupations;
  7. Select appropriate occupational therapy intervention to improve a school aged child's capabilities in childhood occupations;
  8. Develop learner centred goals and explain the occupational therapy management options for improving the school aged child's participation in home, school and community life;
  9. Demonstrate creation of family centred occupational therapy goals and home programs, including professional report writing skills appropriate to the needs of parents;
  10. Critique evidence based practice approaches to occupational therapy for students with neurodevelopment disability.

Assessment

Assessment includes attendance requirements, a 30 minute presentation at a seminar (20%) and submission of a 1,000 word summary (10%), and active participation in online discussion boards and short quizzes (3,500 words total over 8 weeks)(70%).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

60 hrs interaction with online lectures and course material, and participation in online tutorials, communications with other students and tutor (online delivery only), 8 hrs seminar attendance (including a 30 minute presentation), 1 written assignment (1000 words), Eight discussion postings (3, 500 words); 88 hours of private study


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Occupational Therapy
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Louise Farnworth & Dr Primrose Lentin

Synopsis

This unit offers students the opportunity to develop knowledge related to contemporary occupational therapy theory and practice that will provide advanced revision of material that may have been covered in an undergraduate curriculum, but also will introduce new developments as well as critique theoretical perspectives and practices in human occupation focused services often undertaken by occupational therapists. The unit will overview and critique literature related to historical and current conceptual understandings of human activity and occupation, and occupation-based, culturally sensitive practices including: definitions and classifications of occupation, time use, occupational balance, person-environment-occupation models of practice, occupational identity and occupational adaptation. It will take a lifespan approach and is relevant to all areas of occupational therapy practice in building healthy communities. Literature will be primarily sourced from occupational therapy and occupational science. In this unit students will also develop the skills required for evidence-based, reflective, client/person-centred practice, critical evaluation of literature and professional verbal and written forms of communication of occupation-based practice concepts.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  • Describe current theories on human activity and occupation from occupational science and occupational therapy literature.
  • Explain perspectives on defining and classifying human activity/occupation.
  • Demonstrate use of concepts related to time use, occupational balance, habit and routine, occupational adaptation and its relationship to a person's health and well-being in case study activities.
  • Explain dimensions of meaning related to occupation, occupational potential, occupational identity and occupational justice.
  • Describe person-environment-occupation interactions models of practice and their relationship to a person's health and well-being, and ethical and culturally sensitive practice
  • Demonstrate competence in searching, describing, critiquing, summarising, and presenting (verbally and in written communication) the evidence from research literature on a specific topic related to occupational-based practice.

Assessment

Participation at 80% of all classes
Self-directed learning
Presentation (15%)
Essay (4,000 words)(70%)
Critique (1000 words)(15%)

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit will explore aeromedical retrieval in Australia and overseas, by describing the role and operational functions of Air Ambulance and other retrieval systems and the role of members of the flight team. Fixed wing and rotary wing aerodynamics are introduced and the unit will emphasise, in detail, specific safety requirements and Civil Aviation Safety Authority regulations. Preparation for flight will cover the on-ground care and pre-flight checks of patients and preparing self for flight. The response of the body to flight will be introduced and form the basis for considering the modifications to practice required for the in-flight management of patients. Processes related to the undertaking of safe and effective patient transfer will also be explored.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. describe the functions and interrelationships of Aeromedical and ground retrieval services in Australia and overseas;
  2. identify the safety requirements for operating with fixed and rotary wing aircraft;
  3. describe relevant Civil Aviation Safety Authority regulations;
  4. describe the characteristics of airport terminals and the transfer environment in aeromedical retrievals;
  5. describe flight team responsibilities, the student's specific role and relevant clinical, administrative and communication requirements;
  6. describe how to undertake a safe and effective patient transfer that incorporates risk analysis and prevention strategies;
  7. explain the aviation concepts of fixed and rotary wing aircraft;
  8. describe some of the key physical and psychological effects of flight on the body;
  9. identify factors that may affect the student's fitness for flight;
  10. identify and describe the operation of medical equipment utilised in the care of patients during flight; and
  11. describe how patient care practice is modified in the aeromedical retrieval environment by taking into consideration the effects of flight on specific medical and surgical problems.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Mr Matt Johnson

Synopsis

Aeromedicine and retrieval work is a multi-disciplinary process to ensure the best outcomes for patient care. This Unit will explore the essentials of professionalism, critical thinking, problem solving, planning, peer review and reflective practices that are essential to health professionals operating in a context of constrained resources, and who, after graduation, may practice on fixed and rotary wing aircraft.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Articulate and effectively demonstrate the principles of practice that constitute professional behaviour.
  2. Apply critical thinking and problem solving skills to any given situation.
  3. Demonstrate advanced communication skills in a range of operational circumstances.
  4. Apply effective and professional leadership skills in complex, stressed and/or time-critical environments both in the team environment or working independently.
  5. Engage effectively and cooperatively with a comprehensive range of co-professional agencies
  6. Integrate effective reflective practice, peer review and other methods of evaluation for the purpose of continued personal and professional growth.
  7. Critically analyse research reports in order to evaluate the evidence and make decisions to implement critical care based on the best available evidence.
  8. Interact with contemporary forms of technology within the operational context.
  9. Demonstrate an awareness and understanding of the agencies and/or professional roles that support their practice.
  10. Recognise hazards, limitations, and/or barriers to effective practice within their operational environment and construct strategies for managing them.
  11. Undertake and/or participate in critical incident debrief.
  12. Work with people of different gender, age, ethnicity, culture, religion and political persuasion.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit will explore the specific modifications to clinical practice required when adapting to the aeromedical environment. This exploration will be based on the affects of altitude on susceptible medical, surgical and traumatic conditions and will emphasise the importance of appropriate in-flight equipment commonly used for patient monitoring and ventilatory and circulatory support. Related clinical management strategies including prediction of potential aeromedical problems so as to ensure the safe and efficient transport of patients will be developed.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, the student should be able to:

  1. describe the specific effects of altitude on susceptible medical, surgical and traumatic conditions;
  2. describe the use of pharmacological agents and techniques for administering drugs and fluids necessary to manage common conditions requiring aeromedical transport and treat potential complications that may arise;
  3. plan patient care appropriate to the professional practice level of the student, that incorporates clinical management strategies including prediction of potential aeromedical problems so as to ensure the safe and efficient transport of the patient;
  4. demonstrate a working knowledge of medical equipment utilised in the care of patients during flight; and
  5. discuss the pivotal role of teamwork in the aeromedical retrieval environment.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Dr Marcus Kennedy

Synopsis

This unit will promote the development of a broad and critical conceptual and practical understanding of Critical Care mission coordination within retrieval systems. The unit will deliver a broad range of systems and process skills for the practitioner, ensuring their knowledge and understanding of the complexities and dependencies within critical care and retrieval systems. It also considers in depth the cognitive skills required in coordination, in order to fully understand and manage complex planning, risk mitigation, mission logistics and communication methods. The unit will also focus on specific standards and guidelines in the delivery of retrieval coordination.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. Describe the functions and relationships of the components of the aeromedical and retrieval system;
  2. Describe the functions and processes related to key coordination interfaces including: operation centres, logistics supervisors (DTM), dispatch systems (CAD & Netcom), 000 systems (ESTA), the ambulance clinician supervisor, state trauma systems, critical care bed access systems, interstate retrieval systems;
  3. Demonstrate capability for complex planning and logistics management tasks;
  4. Describe methods used for planning and execution of complex multi-platform retrieval missions;
  5. Demonstrate skills in prioritisation of resource use in retrieval scenarios particularly in settings of limited resource availability and competing priority for resource;
  6. Describe methods of crew mix selection and transport platform selection;
  7. Discuss the principles of aviation logistics, including flight and duty times, flight planning, weather impacts on flight planning, capabilities and limitations of various aircraft;
  8. Describe the principle features of management of hospital emergency response plans, multivictim incidents and search and rescue;
  9. Demonstrate capability in communication, in particular related to command and control, conflict resolution, crisis resource management, customer relations and team formation.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students are required to spend, on average, 12 hours per week on this unit across the semester (156 hours in total). This includes working through self-directed learning materials, case reviews and discussion forums through MUSO, preparation of unit assessment tasks and attendance at a 2 day (14 hours) on-campus intensive.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit covers the role of the aeromedical team and the use of fixed and rotary wing aircraft in search and rescue. The content related to air search techniques includes search patterns, homing techniques and observer procedures. Rescue techniques focus on the rotary wing aircraft aeromedical rescue team and the specific skill of stabilising and packaging the patient for winching to safety. The safety requirements of search and rescue are emphasised and post impact land survival techniques, water safety and sea survival are discussed.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, the student should be able to:

  1. describe the role of fixed and rotary wing aircraft and the aeromedical team in search and rescue;
  2. describe and explain air search techniques including the role of the observer;
  3. describe and explain the requirements for packaging patients for rescue;
  4. discuss survival techniques on land and in sea;
  5. participate in helicopter winching techniques; and
  6. identify the required elements of aeromedical retrieval rescue pertaining to their professional role.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit will specifically address the requirements of planning, leading and providing complex retrieval and repatriation of sick and injured patients in the specialized aeromedical and also in non-specialized (commercial aircraft) to definitive care.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, the student should be able to:

  1. describe the organisational and communication requirements of international retrieval and the roles of other personnel involved in the retrieval;
  2. describe the facilities and equipment available on non dedicated aeromedical airlines (including commercial airlines) to facilitate care of the patient during flight;
  3. discuss and explain the implications of common international travel conventions and legal requirements related to moving patients, equipment and drugs from port to port to the successful and safe retrieval of the patient;
  4. describe and explain the specific effects of altitude on susceptible medical, surgical and traumatic conditions;
  5. describe and explain the use of pharmacological agents and techniques for administering drugs and fluids necessary to manage common conditions requiring aeromedical transport and treat potential complications that may arise;
  6. demonstrate the ability to plan complex patient care appropriate to the professional practice level of the student, that incorporates clinical management strategies for complex conditions including prediction of potential aeromedical problems so as to ensure the safe and efficient transport of the patient;
  7. demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of medical equipment utilised in the care of patients during flight; and
  8. discuss and explain the pivotal role of teamwork in the aeromedical retrieval environment.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

The purpose of the unit is to allow students to explore a topic that is of personal and professional importance to them in the aeromedical context. This unit will use a negotiated learning contract based on the student's self assessment of learning needs which will be supervised by the unit convenor. An appropriately qualified and experienced industry leader and/or academic will be appointed as co-supervisor with the unit coordinator if required.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. relate the theory of aeromedical retrieval to practice through the development of a relevant project;
  2. critically appraise a topic in aeromedical retrieval practice;
  3. demonstrate independent scholarship through the development of a suitable project; and
  4. demonstrate effective communication skills with academic staff through negotiation of the project brief and learning contract and the presentation of the project portfolio.

Assessment

Project portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)

Synopsis

This unit will assist the student to promote the transfer of theoretical knowledge and skills developed the other core units of the Graduate Certificate in Aeromedical Retrieval to the actual aeromedical work environment. Work place experience will allow highly contextualised knowledge to be constructed through authentic learning experiences and will promote the development of the student as a practitioner. The student will be supervised by a Monash University appointed Clinical Teacher within a structured framework of learning activities.

Outcomes

By the end of this unit, the student should be able to:

  1. Apply the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills learnt in this course to the management of patients undergoing aeromedical retrieval.
  2. Demonstrate the ability to work as part of the aeromedical team, in accordance with their professional practice level.
  3. Reflect on his/her own clinical experience; and
  4. Demonstrate a working knowledge of the operational and safety aspects of aeromedical retrieval systems.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students are required to spend 12 hours per week on this unit working through self-directed learning materials, participating in tutorials on Blackboard and local clinical simulations and tutorials conducted by workplace mentors and in preparation of unit assessment tasks 156 hours total.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit will introduce the student to the underpinning pedagogical framework and themes intensive care paramedicine. To aid familiarisation to a new practice environment, the role requirements and attributes of an intensive care paramedic as an interactive professional within an integrated system of Emergency Medical Services will be explored. Students are expected to use this opportunity to build on their understanding of the range of reactions that patients, family, and co-workers in the health system experience in response to sudden illness and injury. Essential underpinning theoretical knowledge bases will be developed and consolidated.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Describe the theoretical models and themes that support the development of a MICA Paramedic as an interactive professional;
  2. Relate the desired personal and professional attributes of a graduate of Monash University and a MICA Paramedic to their own professional practice;
  3. Discuss the importance of MICA Paramedic practice being evidence based;
  4. Discuss the process by which the MICA Paramedic practice and Clinical Practice Guidelines are developed;
  5. Discuss the ethical and professional frameworks within which MICA Paramedics practice;
  6. Describe the required knowledge base and scope of practice of a MICA Paramedic;
  7. Identify the legislative and supportive frameworks that support the role of the MICA Paramedic;
  8. Describe the social significance of health and illness within society;
  9. Identify the reactions of patients and family to acute illness and injury within a range of cultural contexts;
  10. Discuss the historical evolution of the MICA Paramedic within the integrated Emergency Medical Services environment.

Assessment

Examination 50%
Portfolio 50% (5,000 word equivalent)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

Paramedicine has a growing reliance on drug therapy as the primary intervention for most emergency situations. Patients receiving medication interventions are exposed to potential harm as well as benefits. This Unit will challenge students to have a graduate understanding of the science of pharmacology to ensure that their patients are administered/prescribed the right medication, the correct dose and at the right time to achieve the desired therapeutic effect.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. Describe fundamental principles of pharmacology;
  2. Describe and explain the processes involved in pharmacokinetics along with factors that influence these processes;
  3. Explain indications, actions, adverse reactions and contraindications for commonly prescribed medication;
  4. Demonstrate clinical decision making ability relating to pharmacology within a paramedic context
  5. Provide appropriate education for patient based upon individual medication/drug regimes;
  6. Describe and explain medication regimes for specific clinical conditions in the paramedic's of practice;
  7. Describe legal, ethical and professional responsibilities associated with prescription and administration of drugs/medications in the paramedic's jurisdiction
  8. Critically analyse social and political factors that influence use of medications/drugs in the paramedic's jurisdiction.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings required to develop in the student an appropriate level of knowledge, understanding and skill related to the management of patients with chest pain. Specific topics include cardiac anatomy and physiology, the natural history of ischaemic heart disease, cardiovascular pathology, interpretation of electrocardiographic rhythms and waveforms and pharmacology of drugs used in the treatment of acute myocardial infarction. This unit also provides the student with supervised hospital clinical placements.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. describe the structure and function of the heart through the application of their knowledge of normal cardiac anatomy and physiology;
  2. describe the natural history of ischaemic heart disease and cardiovascular pathology related to acute myocardial infarction;
  3. interpret common electrocardiographic (ECG) rhythms and waveforms;
  4. recall the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of cardiac conditions;
  5. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of cardiac emergencies in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  6. describe the benefits of pre-hospital advanced cardiac life support and the related role of the MICA Paramedic;
  7. discuss the epidemiology of cardiac disease;
  8. describe the role of coronary care units in the management of patients with emergency cardiac conditions;
  9. discuss how community emergency health practitioners might relate to and coordinate with hospital coronary care units;
  10. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with cardiac emergencies; and
  11. implement evidence-based practice to the management of emergency cardiac conditions.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

Respiratory emergencies are considerable burden within Paramedicine and the community generally, consuming large amounts of health resources. This unit teaches Intensive Care Paramedics about the paramedical diagnosis, approaches and care of patients suffering from respiratory illness. Upon completion of this unit students will have an appropriate understanding of the assessment and emergency management of patients with respiratory conditions.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. describe and explain the structure and function of the respiratory system through the application of their knowledge of normal respiratory system anatomy and physiology;;
  2. describe the natural history of respiratory disease and pathology related to acute and chronic respiratory conditions;
  3. explore and apply the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of respiratory conditions;
  4. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of respiratory conditions in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  5. describe and explain the benefits of pre-hospital intensive care and the related role of the Intensive Care Paramedic
  6. discuss the epidemiology of acute and chronic respiratory disease;
  7. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with acute and chronic respiratory disease;
  8. implement evidence-based practice to the management of respiratory conditions

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings required to develop in the student an appropriate level of knowledge, understanding and skill related to the provision of trauma care. Trauma care is approached from the contextual perspective of trauma systems, time critical guidelines and trauma triage criteria. Specific traumatic injuries are discussed in depth and practice in the related trauma skills is provided.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. describe the structure of trauma systems and define the related trauma triage criteria;
  2. recall the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of trauma and environmental conditions
  3. relate the pathophysiology of common traumatic and environmental injuries to their management;
  4. demonstrate advanced trauma life support clinical skills;
  5. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of trauma and environmental emergencies in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  6. describe the benefits of pre-hospital advanced trauma life support and the related role of community emergency health practitioners;
  7. discuss the epidemiology of trauma and environmental injury;
  8. describe the ongoing management of patients with trauma in hospital critical care units within the framework of a trauma system;
  9. discuss how community emergency health practitioners might relate to and coordinate with hospital critical care units;
  10. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with trauma emergencies;
  11. implement evidence-base practice to management of emergency trauma and environmental conditions.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio(5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)

Synopsis

This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings required to develop in the student an appropriate level of knowledge, understanding and skill related to the provision of emergency care to the obstetric patient and the paediatric and neonatal population. The student's previous clinical experience is used as the basis for identifying key differences in the advanced life support measures appropriate to the management of obstetric complications or the pregnant patient who has experienced physical trauma or is suffering from a medical emergency.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage obstetric emergencies and care for the pregnant patient who has experienced physical trauma or is suffering from a medical emergency;
  2. relate the pathophysiology of common paediatric conditions to the identification of those with the potential to result in an emergency presentation;
  3. recall the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of the paediatric and obstetric conditions;
  4. demonstrate the clinical skills required to manage paediatric emergencies;
  5. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of paediatric and neonatal trauma and medical emergencies in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  6. discuss the psychological and physiological responses of children to illness and injury;
  7. identify the common patterns of paediatric and obstetric injury and related emergency management;
  8. discuss the epidemiology of paediatric and obstetric conditions;
  9. describe the ongoing management of patients with emergency obstetric or paediatric conditions;
  10. discuss how community emergency health practitioners might relate to and coordinate with hospital paediatric critical care units and maternity departments;
  11. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with paediatric and obstetric emergencies; and
  12. implement evidence-base practice to the management of emergency paediatric and obstetric conditions.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent):50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This units aims to prepare the student for clinical practice by using simulation-training methods to improve the understanding of human factors and their impact on the quality of team-based clinical care within the specific emergency paramedicial environment. The unit will allow the student to implement key clinical skills and practice clinical judgment, clinical decision making with implementation of management within a broad range of simulated emergencies and objective, structured clinical exams (OSCES).

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Develop and implement a clinical simulation
  2. Rationalise the importance of critical clinical decision making and clinical judgment
  3. Describe and explain the human factors and their impacts on a paramedic team in a crisis situation
  4. Analyse an emergency situation, take charge of the situation and implement appropriate clinical care
  5. Perform high ranging life-saving clinical skills safely and efficiently in a simulated environment
  6. Competently perform a range of paramedic skills including advanced airway management, diagnostics and the administration of pharmaceuticals agents.
  7. Apply theoretic concepts of paramedicine to a simulated clinical setting
  8. Evaluate the outcome of the simulation on their patient care practices

Assessment

Online presentation of a simulation case: 10%
Online peer review of a simulation case: 10%
Participation in online Discussions: 10%
Demonstration of competence in patient simulations: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week prior to engaging in the simulation exercises.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit involves the student operating as an intensive care paramedic under the direct supervision of a suitably qualified and experienced clinical teacher. The student will be supported to develop the skills and attributes of a safe and competent intensive care paramedic. It is expected that the knowledge and skills developed in the course will be applied in the clinical, digital or simulation environment.

Outcomes

By the end of this unit, the student will be able to:

  1. review their own clinical experience and identify and arrange suitable learning experiences to maintain ongoing clinical development as a result of the clinical experience in the field;
  2. demonstrate the development of clinical, professional and leadership capabilities from novice to a safe and clinically competent Intensive Care Paramedic.
  3. respond to real life emergency problems from the initiation of emergency medical services; to assimilate information quickly and to communicate it clearly and unambiguously;
  4. apply theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the emergency management of a broad range of cardiac conditions, medical conditions, trauma and environmental conditions in the adult and paediatric patient using an appropriate intensive care paramedic clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  5. demonstrate a culturally sensitive approach to the recognition and management of the reactions of patients and family to acute illness or injury;
  6. describe and explain the operational and clinical aspects of intensive care paramedicine in the student's clinical context.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit will cover the theoretical underpinnings required to develop in the student an appropriate level of knowledge, understanding and skill related to the provision of care to the adult population in the circumstances of common and less common medical emergencies. The student's previous clinical experience is used as the basis for identifying key differences in the advanced life support measures appropriate to these conditions.

Outcomes

By the completion of this unit the student will be able to:

  1. discuss the anatomical and physiological basis of common emergency medical conditions;
  2. recall the pharmacology of relevant drugs used in the emergency management of adult medical emergency conditions;
  3. relate the pathophysiology of common emergency medical conditions to their management;
  4. demonstrate the required clinical skills to be able to manage the adult medical emergencies and recognise, assess and manage patients with abnormal behaviour;
  5. integrate the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills to the management of the adult patient with an emergency medical condition in 'real time' work simulation using a clinical problem solving and clinical decision making model;
  6. describe the benefits of pre-hospital adult medical emergency life support and the related role of community emergency health practitioners;
  7. discuss the epidemiology of emergency medical conditions;
  8. describe the ongoing management of patients with common emergency medical conditions in hospital emergency departments;
  9. discuss how community emergency health practitioners might relate to and coordinate with hospital emergency departments;
  10. demonstrate the characteristics of an interactional professional within the context of managing patients with emergency medical conditions; and
  11. implement evidence-base practice to management of emergency medical conditions.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio (5,000 word equivalent): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Community Emergency Health and Paramedics
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Flexible)
Alfred Hospital Summer semester A 2013 (Flexible)
Coordinator(s)Matt Johnson

Synopsis

This unit will prepare appropriately qualified practitioners for extended and / or non acute clinical care within a pre-hospital practice. The unit will extend the practice of paramedic practitioners by further developing diagnostic skills, differential diagnosis, utilisation of physical examination, interpreting investigations, and implementing a management plan to keep patients in their home while working in collaboration with general practitioners and other health professionals.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Demonstrate core knowledge of the normal structure, function and development of the human body at all stages of life.
  2. Demonstrate knowledge of the aetiology, pathology, symptoms and signs, natural history, and prognosis of common ailments in children, adolescents, adults and the aged.
  3. Recognise risk factors for disease or injury, while using appropriate screening tools to be able to triage patients to remain in their home, refer to general practice or other appropriate health services.
  4. Select and interpret appropriate, cost-effective diagnostic tools and use them as an adjunct to the history and physical examination findings to formulate an appropriate diagnosis, differential diagnosis and implement an appropriate management plan.
  5. Make informed decisions about diagnostic and therapeutic interventions and reflect critically on the justifications for decisions using an evidence-based approach.
  6. Identify emergent cases and complex conditions beyond the paramedic's range of medical knowledge and competence.
  7. Recognise the limitations of the student's medical knowledge, and how this relates to scope of practice, patient safety and their role within the broader health care team.

Assessment

Examination: 50%
Portfolio: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

Students will be expected to complete at least 6 hours of internet learning or and a minimum of 6 hours of private study and self-directed learning per week. If completed on-campus sessions, students will be expected to attend the equivalent of 6 hours of lectures, seminars and tutorials per week and complete a minimum of 6 hours of self-directed learning.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Master, Graduate Diploma or Graduate Certificate of Emergency Health


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

This unit reviews key concepts in primary health care in Australia and other countries using a comparative case based teaching method. Case examples of primary health care initiatives and systems are drawn from a wide range of countries including Australia, China, Japan, Saudi Arabia and other Gulf States, the United States and United Kingdom. Key documents including the Commonwealth's "Towards a National Primary Health Care Strategy: A Discussion Paper from the Australian Government and the WHO's "Primary Health Care: Now More Than Ever" statements will be reviewed and discussed. 9 hours of this course will be co-taught with Masters of Family Medicine candidates. The following topics will also be considered. The history and philosophy of primary care practice, the conceptual framework of primary care practice, the roles and tasks of the primary care practitioner, primary care practice in the community and community health, future directions of primary care practice and the academic in primary care practice. The course is designed for primary health care professionals and other professionals involved in the management, design and delivery of primary health care services.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. To critically analyse the contemporary key international trends and policies and practices in Primary Health Care systems and practice;
  2. To critically analyse these policies and practices through exposure to a wide range of Australian and international case studies in primary health care;
  3. To critically analyse the roles of key professions in different Primary Health Care systems through benchmarking of the systems;
  4. To critically analyse the contribution of Primary Health Care to health service delivery in different health systems.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis)(60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

12 hours per week including contact time and private study over the second semester - a total of 156 hours.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Hui Yang, Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

This unit reviews quality improvement systems models and research in quality improvement for primary health care in Australia and other countries using a case based teaching method. The use of benchmarking concepts and practices to drive quality improvement is introduced and critically analysed. Different types of benchmarking considered in this unit include time-based benchmarking, intra-agency benchmarking, inter-agency benchmarking, and national and international benchmarking in primary health care services.
Current knowledge and practice in the use of clinical and technical standards and accreditation systems to drive primary health care quality improvement is reviewed and critically analysed. Standards relevant to primary health care practice and delivery are thoroughly reviewed.
Particular focus is placed upon the use of patient experience feedback in primary health care quality improvement. The differences between patient experience and satisfaction are considered and how patient experience tools can be directly aligned to clinical and technical standards. Tools pertinent to primary health care quality improvement are thoroughly reviewed.
The course is designed for primary health care professionals and other professionals involved in the management, design and delivery of primary health care services.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. To critically analyse the contemporary key international trends and policies and practices in Service Development and Quality Improvement in Primary Health Care practice;
  2. To critically analyse these policies and practices in a wide range of Australian and international case studies in primary health care quality improvement;
  3. To critically analyse the role of benchmarking in primary health care quality care improvement and the differences and between and strengths and weaknesses of different types of benchmarking including:
    1. Time-based benchmarking,
    2. Intra-agency benchmarking,
    3. Inter-agency benchmarking; and
    4. National and international benchmarking
  4. To critically analyse the use of technical and clinical standards and accreditation systems in driving primary health care quality improvement;
  5. To critically analyse the key differences between patient satisfaction and experience tools and how they may be used to drive primary health care quality improvement.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis)(60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24 hours per week including contact time and private study over the second semester -a total of 312 hours.


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Colette Browning, Associate Professor Susan Feldman

Synopsis

Ageing is said to be one of the major forces of the new millennium. It is a universal force that can bring change to society and while there are many challenges there are also many opportunities for ageing to be a force for social progress and development. Understanding the health and wellbeing of the ageing population is critical for health improvement of individuals, communities and whole populations of older people.
This Unit is designed to take a broad view of ageing from across a number of perspectives including the demographic transition and the impact on the population profile, health and welfare costs, and health care delivery; the need to refocus health priorities to address the changing needs of an ageing population; psychosocial and behavioural aspects of ageing and their impact on health and well being; and conditions of ageing and their prevention and management in primary health care settings. Students will examine ageing from a healthy ageing perspective and consider the value of health promotion approaches for older people in primary care settings.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. To critically analyse the basic principles underlying demographic and epidemiological trends in an ageing population;
  2. To critically analyse the current age profile of the Australian population and population trends;
  3. To critically analyse the frequency of common health problems of older people and the associated risk factors for, and the preventability of some of the common health problems of older people;
  4. To critically analyse healthy ageing and discuss associated concepts including determinants of healthy ageing, healthy ageing policy, health promotion in older groups, social resources and healthy ageing;
  5. To critically analyse the challenge of applying healthy ageing concepts to a diverse older population;
  6. To critically analyse current structure and function of health services for older people and discuss current issues for older people in accessing appropriate health services;
  7. To compare and contrast different models of service delivery with an emphasis on primary health care services;
  8. To critically analyse a range of theories for promoting healthy ageing and how they are used in primary health care settings;
  9. To critically analyse the design and evaluation of health promotion programs for older people in primary health care settings;
  10. To critically analyse the participation of older people in primary health care decision-making.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis)(60%).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

12 hours per week including contact time and private study, over 2 semesters - a total of 312 hours.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Colette Browning

Synopsis

Chronic illness is by definition, long lasting and at times severe. Chronic illnesses are large contributors to mortality, morbidity, disability and increased hospital admissions. They also make up a significant proportion of individuals using primary health care services. In Australia, almost half of all deaths are caused by the 12 leading chronic illnesses which include a range of physical and mental illnesses. These include coronary heart disease, stroke, lung cancer, colorectal cancer, depression, diabetes, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic kidney disease, oral diseases, arthritis and osteoporosis. Individuals with some of these illnesses - high blood pressure, depression, arthritis, diabetes and asthma - rely heavily on primary health care services for day to day management and support. The causes of chronic illness are both broad and complex. They represent a range and combination of Downstream determinants, such as biological factors; Midstream determinants, such as psychosocial factors and health behaviours; and Upstream determinants, such as social-cultural, physical and environmental factors. These factors may also impact on the management of chronic illness, in particular how health care and information is accessed, received and interpreted by individuals.

This Unit, designed for primary health care professionals, aims to provide participants with an understanding of the socio-cultural and behavioural determinants of chronic illness, and how these determinants impact on health promotion, prevention, management strategies and outcomes in the primary health care setting. The Unit is based on a multi-disciplinary approach, drawing on theoretical and empirical case studies from the social sciences, public health, health promotion and primary health care. The Unit will examine the different causation models of the determinants of chronic illness with particular emphasis on the socio-cultural determinants of health and behavioural risk and protective factors, including early life factors. It will make the link, with a number of case study examples, between the burden associated with disease and risk and protective factors. The Unit will also examine models of chronic disease self-management and how these approaches apply in primary health care settings. It will show how individual and group socio-cultural factors may influence health care decision making, and interactions with the primary health care team.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. Explain the socio-cultural and behavioural determinants of chronic illness;
  2. Describe the different causation models of the determinants of chronic illness with particular emphasis on the socio-cultural determinants of health and behavioural risk and protective factors, including early life factors;
  3. Identify how these determinants impact on health promotion, prevention, management strategies and outcomes in the primary health care setting;
  4. Link, with a number of case study examples, the burden associated with disease and risk and protective factors;
  5. Identify how individual and group socio-cultural factors may influence health care decision making, and interactions with the primary health care team;
  6. Compare and contrast different models of chronic disease management with an emphasis on primary health care services;
  7. Critically appraise qualitative and quantitative research pertinent to the management of chronic illness in primary health care settings;
  8. Design empirical research studies to evaluate chronic disease management in primary health care settings.

Assessment

Workshop Presentation (20%)
Structured Learning Task (20%)
Research Essay (3000 words)(60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

12 hours per week including contact time and private study, averaged over the 12 week semesters - a total of 156 hours.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

The international liberalisation of legalised access to gambling has lead to an increased incidence and prevalence of problem gambling in many jurisdictions. Workers in the health and human services are now much more likely to encounter clients with problem gambling and associated co-morbid problems.
This unit will define what is meant by "problem gambling" and how different Australian and overseas jurisdictions have tackled this problem in the context of overall gambling policy. The distribution of problem gambling within the Australian community and international communities will be reviewed. Risk and protective factors for problem gambling will also be reviewed. There is now significant evidence that problem gambling usually occurs in conjunction with other problems including drug and alcohol addiction and mental health disorders including depression. The evidence for these co-morbidities and their implications for policy and treatment will be reviewed.
The course is designed for primary health care professionals and other professionals involved in services dealing with problem gamblers and their families and for those with a general interest in gambling and problem gambling.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. To critically analyse the epidemiology of problem gambling within the Australian and international communities and its demographic and health correlates;
  2. To critically analyse alternate definitions of problem gambling and their implications for policy in dealing with problem gambling within communities;
  3. To critically analyse how problem gambling is measured and assessed;
  4. To critically analyse the research evidence concerning risk and protective factors for problem gambling;
  5. To critically analyse the research evidence concerning drug and alcohol addiction and mental problems as co-morbidities for problem gambling and their implications for policy and programs;
  6. To critically analyse the different policy responses to gambling and problem gambling in terms of their impacts upon different groups in the community.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%)
Case study (20%)
Essay (critical analysis)(60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

12 hours per week including contact time and private study over the first semester - a total of 156 hours.


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Primary Health Care
OfferedClayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Shane Thomas

Synopsis

This unit will review the full range of responses available for the prevention and treatment of problem gambling. Primary, secondary and tertiary approaches will be considered in this unit.

This unit will consider the design, effectiveness and efficiency of public education approaches to diverting people at risk of developing problem gambling. It will also consider individual, family and group treatment methods and models for the treatment of problem gambling. Counselling methods including motivational and informational approaches, Peer-support programs, Self-help programs and Cognitive, Behavioural and Cognitive Behavioural therapies will be reviewed.

The implications of drug and alcohol addiction and/or mental health problems for the design and delivery of treatment programs for problem gambling will also be reviewed.

The course is designed for primary health care professionals and other professionals involved in services dealing with problem gamblers and their families.

Outcomes

  1. To critically analyse the design, effectiveness and efficiency of public education approaches to diverting people at risk of developing problem gambling
  2. To critically analyse the key characteristics of individual family and group approaches to the treatment of problem gambling.
  3. To critically analyse the design effectiveness and efficiency of the following treatment approaches for problem gambling:
    1. Counselling methods including motivational and informational approaches;
    2. Peer-support programs;
    3. Self-help programs; and
    4. Cognitive, Behavioural and Cognitive Behavioural therapies
  4. To critically analyse the research evidence concerning the effectiveness of different therapies for problem gambling
  5. To critically analyse the implications of drug and alcohol addiction and/or mental health problems for the design and delivery of treatment programs for problem gambling.

Assessment

Review of literature (20%); case study (20%); Essay (critical analysis) (60%).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

12 hours per week including contact time and private study over the first semester - a total of 156 hours.


36 points, SCA Band 2, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rishi Mehra, Dr Enjarn Lin

Notes

Please note that recognition of prior learning for POM5001 (Perioperative Management of the Cardiac Patient), will apply to all students who have previously completed the Short Course in Perioperaive Medicine.

Synopsis

Cardiac disease is increasing in prevalence and creates a number of perioperative diagnostic and management dilemmas. This unit aims to consolidate and extend the student's knowledge of the pathophysiology of cardiac disease, and review the perioperative interventions that can be applied to improve patient outcome

Outcomes

  1. Correlate the pathogenesis of coronary artery disease, cardiac failure, hypertension, valvular lesions and pulmonary hypertension with patient history and clinical examination.
  2. Critically appraise the perioperative management plan for a patient with pre-existing cardiovascular disease who is undergoing non-cardiac surgery
  3. Use the findings from perioperative cardiac investigations to stratify a patient's perioperative cardiovascular risk
  4. Perform a thorough examination of the cardiac patient and formulate a suitable/appropriate/feasible management plan
  5. Organize an appropriate perioperative plan to maximize the patient's perioperative outcome
  6. Work collaboratively as part of a multidisciplinary perioperative medicine team

Assessment

2 essays (2000 words each) 33.3%
4 group case discussion assignments (4x1000 words) 33.3%
Weekend block days (simulation, face to face case discussions, 5 hours each day)33.3%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24 hours per week


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Joel Symons, Professor Paul Myles

Synopsis

The focus of this unit is for the participant to obtain the necessary knowledge and skills in managing the trauma patient in the acute setting, as well as the chronic patient with an acute exacerbation of their disease.
It will focus on strategies to improve the outcome for these patients.
Participants will gain practical knowledge of airway management, ventilation strategies and circulatory support strategies.

Outcomes

  1. Diagnose and treat patients with a range of chronic medical diseases, with a focus on the perioperative period.
  2. Identify the patient who may require acute airway management and apply basic airway management principles to maintain and secure the airway.
  3. Explain various ventilation strategies that assist in improving respiratory outcomes in the acute trauma patient, as well as the patient with chronic lung disease.
  4. List and justify the rationale for using various fluids (including blood products) to maintain circulatory and nutritional support.
  5. Explain the pathophysiological mechanisms that occur to a patient in the setting of acute trauma. This includes neurotrauma, chest and abdominal trauma, as well as burns trauma. Correlate these with the patient's clinical signs and symptoms.
  6. Competently examine the respiratory patient and formulate a perioperative management plan.
  7. Discuss issues relating to retrieval of the acutely ill patient.
  8. With appropriate collaboration formulate and effectively execute/deliver a defensible/appropriate management plan for an acutely unwell patient

Assessment

4 short answer questions (500 words each) 16.67%
4 group case discussion assignments (4x1000 words) 33.3%
Weekend block days (simulation, face to face case discussions, 6 hours each day) 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24 hours per week


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Anaesthesia and Perioperative Medicine
OfferedAlfred Hospital Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Christine Ball, Dr Chris Bain

Synopsis

Students will gain knowledge of the pathogenesis and perioperative management of patients with endocrine, renal, hepatic, gastrointestinal and coagulation dysfunction.
In addition, students will learn to apply basic analgesic principles to the management of patients with perioperative pain problems.

Outcomes

  1. Describe the pathogenesis and pathophysiology of endocrine disorders including diabetes, obesity and sleep apnoea, and their impact on the perioperative patient.
  2. Explain the impact of renal, hepatic and gastrointestinal dysfunction on the patient during the perioperative period.
  3. Formulate an effective/appropriate/suitable/feasible perioperative management plan for patients with endocrine disorders and/or dysfunction.
  4. Recognise commonly used anticoagulant and antiplatelet agents, and justify their use in the perioperative period.
  5. Recognise the patient with acute, complex acute and chronic pain and correlate their condition to the underlying pathophysiology
  6. Evaluate the use of commonly used analgesics and apply these to a management plan.

Assessment

4 short answer questions (500 words each) 16.67%
4 group case discussion assignments (4x1000 words) 33.3%
Weekend block days (simulation, face to face case discussions, 6 hours each day)50%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24 hours per week


18 points, SCA Band 1, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Penny Hasking

Synopsis

Students are required to conduct a research project based on the research proposal. This will involve collecting data and analysing it in an appropriate manner. Students will be required to submit written progress reports to their supervisors at regular intervals throughout the year. Students will write up the research in the form of a research report and a review of relevant literature.

Outcomes

In undertaking this unit, students will:

  1. learn the skills of producing a literature review relevant to the topic of their research;
  2. collect, analyse, and interpret data; and
  3. produce an independent assessable research report according to the specifications of the Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association which will be ready to submit for publication.

Assessment

Literature review (30%)
Research report (70%) Oral presentation (on campus)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

First and Second Semesters (full year)

Co-requisites

PSY4502 & PSY4510


24 points, SCA Band 1, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Penny Hasking

Synopsis

This unit covers all aspects of the conduct of research. Students undertake a study program in statistics and research design and under the guidance of a staff member plan an independent research project. This project involves designing research in relation to previous work on the topic of the study, gaining ethical approval for data collection or use of data, data gathering, data entry and analysis using appropriate statistical techniques, and the preparation of a research report and a literature review according to the specifications of the Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association. The research report is to be submitted in a format ready for publication. The research process is monitored and guided by a research supervisor who is a member of the teaching faculties.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit students will be able to appreciate the role of scientific research in the field of psychology, understand how to evaluate the validity of research conclusions, collect, analyse and interpret data related to their independent research project, correctly apply the appropriate statistical methods for designs commonly encountered in psychological research, identify ethical issues that can arise in research in psychology and how these are to be addressed, use an appropriate statistical package for analysing research data, such as the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS), produce an assessable research report in a ready to publish format according to the specifications of the Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association and produce a literature review to an acceptable standard on the topic of their search.

Assessment

Research proposal - oral presentation (10%).
A two-hour open book multiple choice examination on all topics covered in the statistics and research design program (15 %).
Literature review of 4000-5000 words (20%).
Research report prepared as an article for publication - 5000-7000 words (55%).

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

24 hours per week of each semester.
The statistical analysis and research design component of the unit consists of a two hour lecture and a two hour tutorial in the case of on-campus students and a workshop program of 2.5 days together with an independent study program in the case of off-campus students. This will take place in Semester 1. Each student also plans, carries out and writes up an individual research project under the supervision of a staff member. In conjunction with this, students undertake an extensive literature
review in the area of their research. The research is conducted over two semesters.

Co-requisites

PSY4510


36 points, SCA Band 1, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 1, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitSchool of Psychology and Psychiatry
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


36 points, SCA Band 2, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


36 points, SCA Band 3, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


36 points, SCA Band 2, 0.750 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


18 points, SCA Band 2, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

This unit comprises a major research program including submission of a thesis. The thesis should embody the results of the candidate's investigation, which demonstrates independence of thought and the candidate's ability to carry out research in that discipline. Minor coursework such as a literature review and oral presentation is specified by the enrolling department.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will be able to understand the processes involved in the design, development and implementation of a research project; show communication skills in both oral and written presentations to both a specialist and non-specialist audience; have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in the relevant area of study.

Assessment

Minor thesis, literature review and allied work. Assessment will be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
OfferedClayton Full year 2013 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2013 (External Candidature)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2013 (External Candidature)
Coordinator(s)Professor Mibel Aguilar

Synopsis

Students will undertake honours level coursework in their relevant discipline, to be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Outcomes

On completion of the unit, students will have demonstrated a high-level of understanding of the key theoretical and practical aspects of their area of study, including to have gained insight into the specific discipline and its place within the broader scope of health sciences; have acquired knowledge, skills and attitudes appropriate to their area of study; and have demonstrated the potential to pursue higher studies and learning in their area of study. The specific learning outcomes will be in accordance with the objectives of the specific discipline.

Assessment

Consistent with the honours coursework assessment of the discipline. To be advised to the student by the department/school honours coordinator.

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

This unit addresses scientific and technical principles of diagnostic ultrasound and the scanning modes. The fundamentals of ultrasound transducers, continuous-wave and pulse-wave high frequency sound, A-mode, M-mode and B-mode diagnostic ultrasound scanning, the Doppler effect, spectral Doppler, colour and power Doppler and associated instrumentation are introduced. Recent developments in harmonic imaging and the use of contrast agents are presented. Safety issues are also covered including an understanding of bio-effects and bio-hazards. Students will develop skills in the recognition of image artefacts, the implementation of a quality assurance program and in optimising image quality.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to demonstrate and communicate a broad and critical conceptual understanding of:

  1. ultrasound production, propagation and tissue interactions and the focusing and steering of ultrasound beams;
  2. the instrumentation, performance and use of A-mode, real-time B-mode and M-mode scanning in ultrasound practice;
  3. the Doppler effect and Doppler modes used in diagnostic ultrasound to image vascular flow including spectral, colour and power modes;
  4. image quality, relevant image processing, the recognition of artefacts and instrument calibration;
  5. safety issues in medical ultrasound, bio-effects and potential bio-hazards;
  6. advances in harmonic imaging the use of contrast agents and future trends on transducer technologies.

Assessment

Written examination (3 hours): 60%
On-line assessment Tests: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Entry into the Master of Medical Ultrasound course


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Mu-SenChuang (Kevin)

Synopsis

This unit explores the events of embryonic development and the embryonic development of the digestive, urinary, reproductive and endocrine systems. The gross, topographical and sectional anatomy of the organs and pathophysiologic concepts and specific pathophysiologic processes associated with the digestive, urinary, reproductive and endocrine systems will also be addressed. A key component of the unit is the development of image recognition skills in relation to the cross-sectional, coronal and sagittal display of these organs and structures.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. describe the general process of embryology and the specific development of the digestive, urinary, reproductive and endocrine systems;
  2. describe cellular structure and function;
  3. explain the aetiology of disease, its pathogenesis, the pathways by which morphologic changes occur and the basic biology of neoplasia;
  4. describe the structure and function of the organs and structures comprising the digestive, urinary, reproductive and endocrine systems;
  5. describe the aetiology, clinical manifestations and pathophysiology of various disorders affecting the digestive, urinary, reproductive and endocrine systems;
  6. Identify the cross-sectional, coronal and sagittal representation of the organs and structures comprising the digestive, urinary, reproductive and endocrine systems as portrayed on anatomical illustrations and sections.

Assessment

3hr written exam: 60%
2 x 30min online tests: 30%
1500 word assignment: 10%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Entry into the Master of Medical Ultrasound course


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

The initial component introduces key principles of medicolegal practice, medical ethics, infection control and professional communication. In the second part of the unit, the breast and thyroid are used as exemplars to relate these principles to the practice of medical ultrasound. Sonographic scanning methods and techniques for examinations of the breast and thyroid will be introduced, information gathering techniques and the elements of a clinical history will be discussed, interpretational skills in respect to the recognition of the sonographic appearances of normal anatomy, anatomical variants and disease processes affecting the breast and the thyroid will be developed.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of key principles of medical law, medical ethics and the control of infection;
  2. identify potential medico-legal and ethical situations arising from sonographic practice and the communication of sonographic findings to patients, radiologists or sonologists and referring medical practitioners;
  3. apply information gathering techniques and take a clinical history;
  4. perform routine sonographic examinations of the breast and thyroid safely and to a

standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer;

  1. recognise and describe normal and abnormal sonographic appearances of the breast and thyroid and related artefacts;
  2. appreciate when modifications to routine scanning approaches are required as well as the limitations of ultrasound in respect to imaging the breast and thyroid.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of a requisite number of ultrasound examinations (hurdle requirement)
Clinical skills assessment (hurdle requirement)
Two x 1500 word assignments (20%)
Written examination (2 hours)(40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour)(20%)
Reflective journal (20%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

3 days a week performing relevant clinical ultrasound examinations or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Sonographic scanning methods and standard protocols related to examinations of adult liver, gallbladder, biliary system, pancreas, gastrointestinal tract, urinary system, spleen, retroperitoneum, abdominal wall and related vascular structures. The scientific principles underpinning tissue harmonic imaging and use of contrast agents in abdominal sonography. Interpretational skills in respect to recognition of sonographic appearances of normal anatomy, anatomical variants, disease processes and ability to modify standard sonographic approaches with regards to the clinical question and patient presentation.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. describe and justify the selection of protocols, imaging parameters, equipment and transducers for sonographic examinations of the organs and structures comprising the digestive and urinary systems;
  2. perform routine sonographic examinations of the abdomen safely and to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer:
  3. recognise and describe normal and abnormal sonographic appearances of the organs and structures comprising the digestive and urinary systems and related artefacts;
  4. appreciate the need to adapt and modify standard imaging protocols when dictated by the clinical condition of the patient together with the limitations of this imaging method;
  5. use Spectral, Colour and Power Doppler techniques where appropriate;
  6. demonstrate an understanding of the application of contrast agents and tissue harmonic imaging in abdominal sonography, describe and apply quality assurance principles to sonographic abdominal imaging.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of a requisite number of ultrasound examinations (hurdle
requirement)
Two x 1500 word assignments (30%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

3 days a week performing relevant clinical ultrasound examinations or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Sonographic scanning methods, standard protocols and interpretational skills for recognition of sonographic appearances of normal anatomy, anatomical variants and disease processes associated with the female pelvis, the scrotum and its contents. Appreciation of when to modify standard approaches to the clinical question and patient presentation and recognise limitations of ultrasound in relation to other medical imaging and laparoscopic examinations of the reproductive system.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. describe and justify the selection of imaging parameters, equipment and transducers, infection control measures and consent protocols for sonographic examinations of the female pelvis and the scrotum;
  2. perform routine transabdominal and transvaginal scanning of the female pelvis and routine sonographic examinations of the scrotum to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer;
  3. describe and recognise the normal and abnormal sonographic appearances of the male and female reproductive systems and related artefacts;
  4. appreciate the need to adapt and modify standard imaging protocols when dictated by the clinical condition of the patient;
  5. use Spectral, Colour and Power Doppler techniques where appropriate;
  6. demonstrate an understanding of the limitations of ultrasound in relation to the diagnosis of pathology in the male and female pelvis;
  7. describe and apply quality assurance principles to sonographic imaging of the reproductive system.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of a requisite number of ultrasound examinations (hurdle
requirement)
Two x 1500 word assignments (30%)
Written examination (2 hours) (40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour) (20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

3 days a week performing relevant clinical ultrasound examinations or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Review of human genetics, pregnancy and human development. Scanning methods/techniques including transabdominal, transvaginal, transperineal related to sonography of the 3 trimesters of pregnancy, evaluation of ectopic pregnancy and assisted fertilisation techniques. Ethical principals re-examined in light of this medical speciality. Ultrasound of multiple pregnancies, obstetric ultrasound interventional techniques, sonographic assessment of gestational age and growth and use of ultrasound in prenatal diagnosis of congenital anomalies and diagnosis of foetal death in utero. Physical principles of visualising surfaces in 3D and their applications for obstetric ultrasound.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. Describe the events of foetal development and circulation;
  2. Describe foetal and placental anomalies;
  3. Demonstrate appropriate knowledge and understanding of genetics, indications and the application of ethics in obstetric ultrasound examinations and the use of ultrasound in the prenatal diagnosis of congenital anomalies;
  4. Describe appropriate sonographic imaging techniques and methods to demonstrate normal embryonic processes and pathology visible in the first trimester, including ectopic pregnancy, normal and abnormal fetoplacental anatomy;
  5. Assess gestational age and growth in the second and third trimesters and growth disorders in the third trimester;
  6. Assess gestational age and growth in the second trimester and growth disorders in the third trimester;
  7. perform routine transabdominal, transvaginal and transperineal sonographic examinations involving the 1st, 2nd and 3rd trimesters of both single and multiple pregnancies safely and to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer*
  8. Use the theory and interpretive skills obtained in this unit in the performance of transabdominal, transvaginal and transperineal ultrasound examinations involving the 1st, 2nd and 3rd trimesters*
  9. Recognise and describe placental abnormalities and foetal death, normal embryonic processes and pathology visible in the first, second and third trimesters;
    • The level of the competency obtained will be dependent on access to obstetric ultrasound clinical experience..There is provision to perform to a lower standard (advanced beginner) as many students now have limited or restricted access to ultrasound practice.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of a requisite number of ultrasound examinations (hurdle
requirement)
Two x 1500 word assignments (30%)
Written examination (2 hours)(40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour)(20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

3 days a week performing relevant clinical ultrasound examinations or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Sonographic scanning methods and standard protocols related to examinations of the musculoskeletal system and paediatric brain, hips and abdomen. Interpretational skills in respect to recognition of sonographic appearances of normal anatomy, anatomical variants, disease processes and the ability to modify standard
sonographic approaches with regards to the clinical question and patient presentation. Particular attention will be paid to the principles of neonatal and paediatric patient care.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. describe the anatomy, pathophysiology and sonographic appearances of common disorders affecting the musculoskeletal system.
  2. describe the anatomy, pathophysiology and sonographic appearances of common disorders affecting the neonatal brain, hips and abdomen;
  3. describe sonographic imaging techniques and protocols to facilitate the production of diagnostic images demonstrating the shoulder and knee joints, neonatal brain, hips and paediatric abdomen;
  4. perform sonographic examinations of the shoulder and/or the paediatric kidneys to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer;
  5. appreciate the need to adapt and modify the standard imaging protocols when dictated by the clinical presentation or clinical question;
  6. describe the application of patient care principles to neonatal and paediatric sonography.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of the requisite number of ultrasound examinations (hurdle
requirement)
Two x 1500 word assignments (30%)
Written examination (2 hours)(40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour)(20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

3 days a week performing relevant clinical ultrasound examinations or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

Sonographic scanning methods, techniques and protocols related to selected examinations of the cardiovascular system. Gross anatomical structure and function and relevant pathophysiological disorders associated with the cardiovascular and immune systems. Interpretational skills in respect to artefacts and the sonographic appearances of the examinations addressed will be gained. The process of organ rejection and the role of ultrasound in the postoperative evaluation of liver and renal transplants. Quality assurance, sonographic measurement techniques, the utilisation of specific duplex modalities and the use of stents and grafts in vascular surgery.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students will be able to:

  1. describe the gross structure and pathophysiological processes including organ rejection associated with the cardiovascular and immune systems;
  2. recognise artefacts with the cross-sectional representation of the upper and lower limb venous and arterial systems and carotid and vertebral arteries on sonographic images;
  3. demonstrate knowledge and understanding of imaging modes, sonographic techniques and methods suitable for vascular imaging and the assessment of blood flow and organ perfusion;
  4. perform basic vascular sonographic examinations, including functional measurements of selected vessels of the cardiovascular system to a standard and ethical conduct expected of a competent sonographer;
  5. describe and apply quality assurance principles to sonographic vascular and transplant imaging.

Assessment

Compulsory attainment of the requisite number of ultrasound examinations (hurdle
requirement)
Two x 1500 word assignments (30%)
Written examination (2 hours)(40%)
Image recognition examination (1 hour)(20%)
Clinical skills assessment (10%)

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

3 days a week performing relevant clinical ultrasound examinations or equivalent


12 points, SCA Band 2, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Medical Imaging and Radiation Sciences
OfferedClayton First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Clayton Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Lombardo

Synopsis

The unit aims to facilitate the process of research in medical ultrasound. Firstly, the unit will extend the knowledge and understanding of research methodology gained in the research methods unit and additionally focus attention upon a range of practical, technical and management issues associated with the conduct of scientific research. The unit will facilitate student access to academics or clinicians offering projects and who will support the student during all stages of the inquiry process.

Outcomes

Upon completion of this unit, students will have gained knowledge and understanding of the research process; an increased capacity to critically appraise the literature; a capacity to apply research findings to their clinical practice; a capacity to communicate research findings to the wider community; and an enhanced capacity to extend the critical, ethical and creative research stance to their everyday clinical practice.

They will:

  1. Gain greater insight into the worthiness of the ultrasound and medical literature and the veracity of new knowledge as it applies to clinical practice;
  2. gain experience in identifying research problems in medical ultrasound and developing a research plan that will assist in the resolution of the research question;
  3. Develop knowledge and understanding of the practical, technical and management issues associated with the design and conduct of a research project;
  4. Gain experience in identifying ethical aspects of a research project and the subsequent process of gaining Ethics Approval;
  5. Develop skills in applying a particular research method to the resolution of a research question;
  6. Develop skills in logical and critical thought and analysis;
  7. Develop skills in the process whereby the development of new knowledge and understanding can be communicated in a coherent manner to a wider professional audience;
  8. Gain skills in self organisation in terms of the completion of a project within a set time frame; and
  9. Develop the capacity to extend the critical, ethical and creative stance to the clinical setting.

Assessment

1 x 5000 word Literature and research plan : 25%
1 x 2000 word Reflective research diary: 5%
1 x 15min Oral presentation: 10%
1 x 4000 word Research report 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Prerequisites

Successful completion of the Graduate Diploma level of the Master of Medical Ultrasound, MFM2006R


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Robyn Mason

Synopsis

This unit offers an overview of the history and contemporary context of social work practice within a framework of understanding the connection between social issues, policy development and strategies for sustainable change at both local and global levels. The unit is underpinned by notions of social justice and human rights and offers a preview of topics that will be studied in greater depth in subsequent units within the course.

Outcomes

At completion of the unit, students should be able to:

  1. Describe the nature of social work in a range of contexts and settings as well as describe contemporary debates about the nature of social work.
  2. Critically analyse the ethical value base of social work with particular reference to human rights and the promotion of social justice.
  3. Critically analyse key global social policy issues including, but not limited to, mass movement of people, climate change, reconstruction, and poverty.
  4. Critically review and analyse contemporary trends in the delivery of social work services.
  5. Articulate the nature of social change and the strategies to achieve this.

Assessment

Major essay (2,500 words)(60%)
Written assessment of (2,000 words)(40%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The unit runs for 12 weeks. Students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly tasks as set out in the Unit Outline and in the off-campus Unit Guide.


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Bernadette Saunders

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the history and evolution of the international human rights regime, current debates about human rights locally, nationally and internationally, as well as ethical codes and decision-making processes as they apply to social work practice. The unit provides opportunities for students to explore the foundations of the Australian legal system in a human rights framework and the legal contexts within which social workers practice. The unit addresses concepts of moral philosophy underpinning the AASW Code of Ethics and explores the foundations of ethical decision-making. In line with Monash University's commitment to human rights and social justice, the unit has an overarching human rights approach, within which legal and ethical practice occurs.

Outcomes

At completion of the unit, students will be able to:

  1. Utilise a human rights framework in a social work practice situation;
  2. Describe the history and current context of the international human rights regime;
  3. Demonstrate a beginning knowledge of local, national and international legal; systems and how they interface with social work practice;
  4. Read and consider the impact of legislation relevant to social work practice;
  5. Implement a process of ethical decision-making, making use of the AASW Code of Ethics and other relevant tools;
  6. Analyse ethical and legal issues relevant to social work practice;
  7. Reflect critically on their approach to human rights and ethical issues;
  8. Write required commentary on human rights, ethics and legal issues.

Assessment

The assessment requirement for the Master of Social Work (Qualifying) 6 point subject Human Rights, Law and Ethics Contexts for Social Work Practice is the completion of two assessment tasks:
Report (1,500 words)(40%)
Essay (3,000 words)(60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

The unit runs for 12 weeks. Students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly unit tasks as set out in the Unit Outline and in the off-campus Unit Guide.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Uschi Bay

Synopsis

This unit covers child, adolescent and adult development with an emphasis on the development of resilience across the life course. A particular focus is on risk and protective factors at individual, family, community and societal levels that impede or enhance development. The unit has three parts:

  • a human development component that covers child, adolescent and adult development with an emphasis on the development of resilience across the life course. A particular focus is on the risk and protective factors at individual, family, community and societal levels that impede or enhance child, adolescent and adult development.
  • a social work practice theory section provides an orientation to the theory of direct social work practice with individuals and families focusing on one to one work with individuals and on working with family groups.
  • a skills component that provides the opportunity for students to learn, and apply the direct social work practice skills that include assessment, engagement and the development of intervention strategies through the use of role plays, case studies and problem based learning.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this Unit students will be able to:

  1. Explain the specific developmental needs that arise in childhood, adolescence and adulthood;
  2. Describe how risk and protective factors enhance or impede the development of resilience in childhood, adolescence and adulthood;
  3. Assess the biopsychosocial development of a child, adolescent and adult and identify the structural factors that have impacted on development;
  4. Critically evaluate the values and assumptions underpinning various theoretical approaches to human development;
  5. Summarize the key evidence in relation to the effectiveness of different approaches to direct social work practice;
  6. Identify the basic elements of the social work process including assessment, the relationship, and the problem solving process ;
  7. Demonstrate the key principles in relation to working with children and families and different cultural groups ;
  8. Demonstrate competence in engaging with; assessment of and intervention with clients;
  9. Demonstrate appropriate use of 'self' in the professional helping relationship, based on an awareness of self in a familial, social and cultural context.

Assessment

Critical reflection on the life-span (1,000 words)
Case study analysis that asks student to apply the theoretical knowledge learned to a typical social work client situation (2,000 words)
A biopyschosocial assessment of a child, adolescent or adult (2,000 words)
Completion of a role play assessment activity (1,000 words)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

This subject runs for 12 weeks. A twelve point unit requires twenty four hours per week or 312 hours per semester. On campus students will attend for five hours face to face contact per week that will include three hours of lectures and two hours of tutorials. Off-campus students participate in 20 hours residential workshops, four hours per week on online activities and 18 hours per week on private study. Week 12 will not introduce any new material but provide an opportunity for revision and completion of assignments.

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus students are required to attend a compulsory on-campus workshop for successful completion of this unit, where social work practice skills will be taught.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Marija Dragic

Synopsis

Supervised Professional Practice 1 enables students to operationalise the professional social work role. The unit comprises 70 days (480 hours) of supervised professional practice in the field and 20 hours of skills development and integration of theory and practice in the classroom and in the field. On campus students will attend placement briefings and integration sessions where their placement experiences will be critically reviewed in order to connect with social work knowledge and theory, while off-campus students will work attend skills and integration sessions at compulsory residential workshops. Liaison visits from University staff to the student and supervisor while on placement will also be opportunities to review skills and to facilitate the integration of theory and practice. The successful completion of a total of 1000 hours (clinical placements and skills) in the MSW (Qualifying) will enable graduates to seek social work positions overseas where the completion of 1000 hours of clinical practice placement is often an eligibility requirement.

Outcomes

At successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of how theory and practice can be integrated for effective direct service delivery
  2. Demonstrate an ability to practice in accordance with professional social work ethics and familiarity with the AASW Code of Ethics
  3. Demonstrate an ability to articulate and adhere to professional social work values, skills and attributes including an understanding of the nature of professional roles and responsibilities
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of a range of social work intervention strategies applicable to work with individuals, families and communities
  5. Demonstrate an ability to assess and plan appropriate intervention, including evaluation of outcomes, for a range of individual, family and community problems
  6. Demonstrate an ability to appropriately and effectively utilise professional supervision to explore professional practice and to enhance competence and professional identity
  7. Demonstrate an ability to reflectively and critically evaluate client situations and policy approaches

Assessment

Successful completion of skills component
Learning agreement completed by the student within 15 days of commencement of the placement
Mid-placement review completed by the student and field educator
Final evaluation report completed by the student and field educator
Written case study
Written critical incident report

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

70 days placement
20 hours integration

Prerequisites


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Melissa Petrakis

Synopsis

This unit provides an ecological approach to the understanding of contemporary health and mental health concerns that impact on the individuals and families who come to the attention of social work. The subject incorporates weekly direct practice skills seminars to develop key skills for effective social work practice in the health and mental health fields. Social Work interfaces with a range of clients and practice contexts in community health and mental health, in disability, in drug and alcohol settings, in rural and regional settings.

Outcomes

At successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. identify appropriate competencies for the practice domains that intersect with mental health, including legal and statutory responsibilities;
  2. demonstrate key communication and assessment skills necessary for effective practice with a range of clients in diverse health settings;
  3. reflect critically on their practice- specifically the integration of theory and practice in challenging client situations;
  4. describe specific health problems, recognise the social and psychological components, causes and consequences of ill-health, and have a critical awareness of the socio-economic dimension of health problems;
  5. demonstrate knowledge of the practice and policy frameworks that animate health and mental health and consumer services in Australia;
  6. articulate the factors that influence health and mental health needs of clients and propose distinct and distinctive responses to these;
  7. assess the nature of health and mental health issues and the contributions made by the wide range of professional groups who work with individuals experiencing mental illness;
  8. identify key issues and demonstrate skills in working effectively with clients in health and mental health settings;
  9. structure and present a report on a substantive health issue.

Assessment

Literature review (2,500 words) (25%)
Briefing Note (2,500 words) (25%)
Essay (4,000 words) (50%)
Students must pass all assessment tasks to successfully complete the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Melissa Petrakis and Associate Professor Rosemary Sheehan

Contact hours

The unit runs for 8 weeks. Students are expected to undertake 312 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly unit tasks as set out in the Unit Outline and in the off-campus Unit Guide.

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus students are required to attend a compulsory on-campus workshop for successful completion of this unit, where social work practice skills will be taught.

Prerequisites


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Catherine Flynn

Synopsis

In all fields of contemporary social work, practitioners need the skills to effectively consume, produce and apply research knowledge, to ensure that actions are based on appropriate and critiqued evidence. Research is a powerful intervention tool through which change can be achieved with individuals, groups and communities.

This unit is offered as part of the core requirements of the professional association, the AASW. Social work research is seen to be informed by a clear value base and driven to deliver socially constructive outcomes. The unit will explore research processes, presenting a structured approach to the implementation of a research proposal.

There will be particular emphasis on research in practice: program evaluation, needs analyses and program development; as well as the ethical underpinnings of all research. The overall aim of this unit is to encourage students to become critically reflective, research minded practitioners, who contribute in an ongoing way to the knowledge base of the profession.

Outcomes

  1. Discuss the contributions of research to the wider social work skill and knowledge base and to socially constructive outcomes
  2. Articulate the most common research methods evident in social work research and discuss the strengths and weaknesses of the different research methods that can be applied to social work
  3. Critically analyse key approaches to social work practice research
  4. Demonstrate the knowledge required to evaluate and choose relevant research methods for a range of social work research projects
  5. Critically evaluate existing research literature, especially in terms of research design
  6. Design a social work practice research project that meets rigorous and evidence-based design principles
  7. Identify the ethical issues that need to be considered with respect to the conduct of human research projects

Assessment

1. A review of the available research in a specific field of social work practice (40%)
2. A research proposal in the chosen field, including research significance, aims, methodology, sampling procedures, data collection and analysis and ethical issues (2500 words). (60%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The unit runs for 12 weeks. On-campus students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly unit tasks as set out in the Unit Outline, including readings and to complete two assignment tasks.

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to complete weekly reading and other online tasks such contribution to an online discussion group; and to complete two assignment tasks.

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

None

Prohibitions

None

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Deborah Western

Synopsis

Group work is a major social work intervention method. In professional practice in the field, social workers are required to practise effective group work interventions in diverse settings, with families, service users, stakeholders, community groups, inter-agency networks, colleagues in the workplace and in policy environments. The unit requires students to work effectively in groups to develop a relationship with a partner organisation and complete a project nominated by the partner organisation.

The unit has a focus on the theory and practice of group work, including the historical development of this social work method, planning and implementing a group work intervention, communication in groups, group leadership and facilitation styles, and managing group dynamics. Students will also learn how to negotiate and navigate a community engagement process with a partner organisation in the field and successfully complete a 'real-world' group project.

Outcomes

  1. Describe the stages of group development
  2. Apply the stages of group development to the student group project
  3. Analyse the impact of different group leadership styles and processes
  4. Demonstrate a beginning level of competence in group problem-solving strategies relevant to a range of social work contexts
  5. Critically analyse all aspects of their own group experience through engaging in critical reflection
  6. Engage effectively with professionals in a nominated partner organisation through the use of evidence-based community engagement processes
  7. Articulate the features of an effective community engagement process
  8. Negotiate, manage and document the planning and completion of a group project
  9. Evaluate the group and project processes and outcomes through application of evaluation methods appropriate to a range of group work interventions

Assessment

The assessment requirement for the Master of Social Work (Qualifying) 6 point unit Critical Social Work 3: Community Engagement Group Project is the completion of two assessment tasks.
1. A structured reflective journal (2500 words) that: (a) critically analyses the group experience, demonstrating knowledge of relevant group work theory and group processes, and (b) provides a critical reflection on the student's own contribution to and learning from the group experience (60%).
2. Contribution to a group project report (2000 words) and presentation to class colleagues. Each student in the group is responsible for a specified component of the project report and group presentation (40%).
Students must pass both assessment tasks to successfully complete the unit.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The unit runs for 12 weeks. Students are expected to undertake 156 hours of study per semester. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake the weekly unit tasks as set out in the Unit Outline and in the off-campus Unit Guide (off campus students), which include set readings; and, to complete two assignment tasks: a reflective journal (2500 words) and a contribution to a project report (2000 words).

Off-campus attendance requirements

Mandatory attendance is required by off-campus students for a 2 day workshop which is held at the Caulfield campus in early April of semester one. Dates to be advised at the beginning of semester 1.

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

None

Prohibitions

None

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Full year 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Marija Dragic

Synopsis

Supervised Professional Practice 2 enables students to operationalise the professional social work role. In doing so, students are expected to be able to conceptualise, articulate and explain the progress they are making in relation to their development of a professional social work identity. Students will learn to assess and analyse social work situations and plan appropriate intervention strategies across a diverse range of social work methods and settings, from direct practice with individuals and groups, community development, program development, agency administration, policy or research.

Theorizing about social problems, critically analysing interventions and reflecting on how one's 'use of self' impacts on social work relationships are essential components of learning in clinical practice placements. In addition, students are expected to complete a piece of practice research and to develop competencies in line with the AASW's practice standards, while adhering to the AASW Code of Ethics.

The unit comprises 70 days (480 hours) of supervised professional practice in the field and 20 hours of skills development in the classroom and in the field. The successful completion of a total of 1000 hours (clinical placements and skills) in the MSW (Qualifying) will enable graduates to seek social work positions overseas where the completion of 1000 hours of clinical practice placement is often an eligibility requirement.

Outcomes

At successful completion of Supervised Professional Practice 2, students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of how theory and practice can be integrated in one or more social work settings
  2. Demonstrate an ability to practise in accordance with professional social work ethics and familiarity with the AASW Code of Ethics
  3. Demonstrate professional social work values, skills and attributes including an understanding of the nature of professional roles and responsibilities
  4. Demonstrate an understanding of a range of social work intervention strategies applicable to work with individuals, families and communities
  5. Demonstrate an ability to assess and plan appropriate intervention, including evaluation of outcomes, for a range of individual, family and community problems
  6. Complete a piece of practice research under supervision
  7. Demonstrate an ability to appropriately and effectively utilise professional supervision to explore professional practice and to enhance competence and professional identity
  8. Demonstrate a commitment to critical and reflective social work practice
  9. Demonstrate an understanding of the complexities of working in an organisational context
  10. Demonstrate competence in meeting the AASW practice standards

Assessment

A learning agreement completed by the student within 15 days of commencement of the placement
A mid-placement review completed by the student and field educator
A final evaluation report completed by the student and field educator
A written case study
A written critical incident report
A written research report
Grading in this unit is on a Pass/Fail basis only.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

For this unit, 70 days (480 hours) will be spent on placement in agencies and organizations. A further 20 hours will be spent at placement briefings or integration sessions, or in private study. Students are required to complete 6 assessment tasks including two joint reports with field educators.

Prerequisites

Prohibitions

None

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Philip Mendes

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to the specific role of social work in social policy analysis and community practice and advocacy. Areas covered will include the meaning and nature of social policy, the key trends and philosophies underlying the positions of the major political parties, the key theories and ideological perspectives in social policy, the link between social policy and the goals and actions of social work, the impact of social structure and social policy on welfare service consumers, the implementation of social policy interventions in everyday social work practice, ideological critiques of the welfare state, the role, strategies and effectiveness of lobby groups in social policy debates, the link between local and global welfare trends, the concepts of community and community work, and the role of community work skills and strategies in social work practice.

Outcomes

  1. Analyse the nature of contemporary social policy and social policy debates in Australia and internationally
  2. Cite examples, both in the classroom and online, of the way political parties deal with policy issues, and describe the key trends and philosophies underlying the positions of major political parties;
  3. Describe and apply key theories and ideological perspectives in social policy, social change and community practice
  4. Identify the impact of social structure and social policy on welfare service users
  5. Implement social policy interventions in their everyday social work practice
  6. Articulate the concepts of community and community work.
  7. Make informed choices about using community work practice methods based on contemporary community work research and practice wisdom
  8. Demonstrate competence in a range of community work skills and strategies applicable to social work practice with communities

Assessment

1. A critical analysis of a current newspaper or popular journal opinion piece on a social policy topic by a prominent politician, journalist, or public commentator (500 words and 10%) (20%)
2. An analysis of public policy debates in an area of Australian social policy related to their placement field using the social policy literature (2000 words) (assesses objectives 3 and 4) (40%)
3. Written analysis of a practice example from field placement where community work skills were utilized or could have been utilized, with reference to the community work and social change literature (2000 words) (assesses objectives 4-8) (40%)
Students must pass all assessment tasks to successfully complete the unit

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The unit runs for 8 weeks for on-campus students and 12 weeks for off-campus students.
On-campus students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester study. Students are expected to use their study time to attend on-campus lectures and workshops, undertake weekly readings as set out in the Unit Outline, and to complete three assignment tasks. This unit will be taught in a total of 36 hours contact time over 8 weeks following the completion of the second fieldwork placement (SWM5108) for full-time students.

Off-campus attendance requirements

Off-campus students are expected to undertake 156 hours per semester in private study, completing readings and other tasks as outlined on the Blackboard site in the off-campus Unit Guide, and to complete three assignment tasks. Off-campus students are required to attend a compulsory on-campus workshop for successful completion of this unit, where social work practice skills will be taught.

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

None

Prohibitions

None

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Chris Trotter

Synopsis

Theories and knowledge regarding direct work with clients in a variety of social work settings. The context of casework practice and some alternative methods of working with individuals and groups.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit students should:

  1. understand the role and purpose of casework, the sources of knowledge in casework and the relevance of outcome evaluation;
  2. be able to critically analyse their own practice and at least one casework theory.

Assessment

Essay (6000 words): 70%
Topic synopsis (1000 words): 10%
Essay (2000 words): 20%

Chief examiner(s)


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Grace Brown

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to an understanding of leadership in the human services in Australia as a requirement for social work practice, one that is not always understood or accepted professionally. The human services sector is expanding in the numbers of its component organisations, both governmental and non-governmental, and in the size and complexity of the component parts. Leadership of social change and social justice in the human services is now at a premium, having been given little attention in the past or currently. Little is known of leadership requirements in this sector particularly as contrasted with other service sectors. Students undertaking this unit will be introduced to theories of leadership of humanservice organisations, their programs and policies, and leadership of the new organisational phenomena in this sector, large community service departments, non-governmental consortia, and advocacy organisations. They will also be introduced to other notions of leadership in social work - leadership through research, advocacy and community action.

Subsequently, theories of leadership will be placed against the experiences and views of current social work leaders in this sector, who will be active participants in this unit, so that students gain some understanding of what leadership comprises, what priority actual leaders place on the various aspects of leadership, and what research and theory underpins actual leadership in the policy development, planning and delivery of social services today.

Outcomes

  1. Describe leadership within a professional social work framework through analysis of historical and current leadership examples from the human services sector
  2. Critically analyse theories of leadership for the human services in Australia.
  3. Contrast leadership theories with selected leaders' experiences and identify and analyse the differences.
  4. Articulate where leadership opportunities and responsibilities exist within the human services sector.
  5. Identify the components of leadership in the humanservices sector and the distinguishing features of leadership in the human services field.

Assessment

Students will be required to complete two written assignments:
1.A critical analysis of contemporary leadership theories in the light of presentations in the classroom and conveyed online, from social work leaders during the unit (2000 words, 40%). This assessment is formative and summative and relates to objectives 1,2 and 3.
2.An assessment of their own actual and potential contribution to social work leadership, based on critical reflection on practice experience,current data on leadership in a specific field of practice and analysis of relevant literature (2500 words, 60%). This assessment is summative and relates to objectives 4, 5 and 6. Students must pass both assessment tasks in order to complete the unit successfully.

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Co-requisites

None

Prohibitions

None

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Chris Trotter

Synopsis

The major focus of this unit is on effective methods of working with offenders in the community after they have been placed on court orders. It discusses the objectives of correctional programs and what works best for whom in terms of reducing re-offending.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should:

  1. have an understanding of the field of corrections, its purpose and its relationship with social work;
  2. have knowledge and understanding of the place of rehabilitation in work with offenders and how this fits with other goals of corrective programs;
  3. be able to articulate the key principles of effective interventions in terms of rehabilitation work with offenders;
  4. have an understanding of the nature of risk assessment and of the advantages criticisms of risk assessment;
  5. be able to identify a number of correctional theories and understand how these relate to the direct practice work done by social workers in this field;
  6. have an understanding of at least one of the specialist programs directed towards offenders.

Assessment

Essay (3000 words) 25%
Essay (6000 words) 75%.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Uschi BayAssociate

Synopsis

Theories and models of policy making, program planning and evaluation for human service programs. Organisation contexts and political implications. Key steps in planning and evaluation. Students participate in a planning or evaluation project for a community agency and negotiate the plan with that agency. Students will also take SWM5150 in semester 2 and finalise the project.

Outcomes

This unit prepares students to plan for the implementation of a planning or evaluation project via learning:

  1. relevant social theories and organisational theories and models of planning and evaluations;
  2. integrating this knowledge into the preparation of a plan for a human service organisation.

Assessment

A major report for the community agency (6000 words: 67%); planning and evaluation exercises 3000 words: 33%).

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedNot offered in 2013
Coordinator(s)Dr Uschi Bay

Synopsis

Practical application of theories and concepts learned in SWM5140. Conduct of the previously negotiated planning or evaluation exercise; design of methodology, data collection and analysis; report for community agency.

Outcomes

This unit builds on SWM5140. It aims to enable students to learn how to carry out a planning or evaluation project and report on it, integrating the material learned in SWM5140.

Assessment

A major report for the community agency (6000 words: 67%); planning and evaluation exercises 3000 words: 33%).

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Bernadette Saunders

Synopsis

This unit explores a number of issues related to social work practice that involves children; particularly children whose well-being may be at risk or who have suffered child abuse or neglect. Attention will be drawn to the relationship between the child, the family, the community and the state, with a particular focus on children's perspectives, children's status, and children's rights.

Outcomes

The specific learning objectives for this unit are for students to:

  1. reflect upon the complex relationships between the child, the family, the community and the State;
  2. develop an understanding of the complexities of child protection practice, and develop an understanding of the links between policy and practice in the fields of child welfare, child protection and child abuse and neglect..

Assessment

1. An annotated bibliography of an issue related to childhood or children in society - topics will be chosen from areas covered in the unit or in consultation with the unit coordinator. The annotated bibliography will demonstrate knowledge of the local, national and international context (3000 words). (40%)
2. A major assignment (6000 words) (60%).

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Deb Western

Synopsis

Unit content will be developed between the student and an appointed staff supervisor. One piece of assessment will be developed and completed by the student for this unit. The nature and content of the assessment itself may vary from student to student depending upon their area of interest, the skill area they wish to develop and, in some cases, the requirements of their work organisation. Topics could include small research projects such as evaluations of particular health and welfare programs, pilot studies, literature reviews, or the learning and implementation of particular social work approaches or theories. The research study or project generally takes the form of an academic project or an advanced practicum project. The focus may be on any field in which social workers are employed, dependant on staff availability to supervise.

Outcomes

The objectives of the unit are to enable students to:

  • Further develop their professional role as social work practitioner-researchers
  • Integrate research knowledge with past and present work experience
  • Deepen specialised practice knowledge and skills from a greater focus on selected areas, including the acquisition of new research-based clinical and program interventions
  • Acquire advanced specialised research knowledge and skills that will allow students to develop research-based practice at the clinical, program and policy levels for newly emerging service areas
  • Develop and complete a research-based and/or research-informed activity that will contribute to their professional development and to continuous quality improvement activities within their workplace.

Assessment

Research report, evaluation report, or assignment (9000 words): 100%

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Deborah Western

Synopsis

At the conclusion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Demonstrate an understanding of contemporary theory and practice in human resources management, including:
    • the nature and characteristics of the social and community services (health and welfare) workforce

industrial relations in this workforce

  • the different types of organisations in this industrial sector and consequent differences in workforce patterns
  • theories of human resources management as they relate to the health and welfare workforce, and especially to social work staff
  • administrative control of staff
  • professional development of staff
  • support of staff
  • mediation within and between organisations
  • professional staff recruitment; and
  • supervising professional staff in general and through organisational transition.
2. Consider, analyse, discuss and apply these concepts and theories in your practice as a manager.

Outcomes

The unit will cover the nature and characteristics of the social and community services (health and welfare) workforce, industrial relations in this workforce, the different types of organisations in this industrial sector and consequent differences in workforce patterns, theories of human resources management as they relate to the health and welfare workforce and especially to social work staff, administrative control of staff, professional development of staff, support of staff, mediation within and between organisations, professional staff recruitment, supervising professional staff in general and through organisational transitions.

Assessment

Assignment 1: hurdle requirement of reflective exercises equivalent to 1000 words;
Assignment 2: essay 2000 words (30%)
Assignment 3: essay or presentation 6000 words or equivalent (70%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
Monash Passport categoryResearch Challenge (Investigate Program)
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Chris Trotter

Synopsis

Topics include the purpose of research and its place in social work; research ethics including intellectual property issues; research designs including qualitative, quantitative, exploratory and experimental methods; developing research questions and hypotheses; sampling and data analysis including statistical analysis and writing research reports.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, candidates should have developed an understanding of:

  1. ethical issues relating to research with humans;
  2. issues relating to the place and role of different types of research in Social Work;
  3. the principles underlying qualitative and quantitative research;
  4. research design, research questions and data collection methods;
  5. a range of statistical techniques and when it is appropriate to use them.

Students are also required to demonstrate their ability to develop a research proposal.

Assessment

One or two assignments totalling 9000 words including a research proposal: 100%

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Fiona McDermott

Synopsis

Current community health concerns and the preoccupations of health policy and services. Frameworks for conceptualising and assessing the health concerns that impact on individuals, families and communities, are analysed and applied to specific health concerns.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit it is expected that students will have:

  1. explored contemporary frameworks used to understand health concerns and inform policy;
  2. considered the application of these frameworks to their own practice and to other settings where health issues predominate.

Assessment

Essay (6000 words): 67%
Assignment (3000 words): 33%

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kerry Brydon

Synopsis

This unit presents aspects of contemporary social work policy and practice in ageing through a lens of longevity and ongoing change. Aging is conceptualised in dynamic and innovative ways that reflect and encourage changing perceptions, theoretical understandings and possibilities of this transition phase. The impact of dimensions such as gender, class, location, diversity and spirituality on the transition phases of ageing will be explored. The notion of risk will be examined as an underlying tension in social work practice in this field.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. Review contemporary debates about life transitions with a focus on ageing
  2. Evaluate concepts of ageing and longevity using dimensions such as gender, class, time, space and place
  3. Assess current and emerging theories of ageing and their relevance to social work
  4. Critically analyse the notion of risk and its implications for social work practice in this area
  5. Examine relevant social work policy and practice issues in longevity and ageing
  6. Apply a multi-dimensional approach in a specific area of ageing

Assessment

Written assessment (3000 words, 40%)
Major essay (6000 words, 60%)

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Caulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Rosemary Sheehan

Synopsis

This unit introduces postgraduate students to the epistemologies of practice in mental health and a critical analysis of contemporary mental health issues. It provides advanced knowledge about the context and consequences of mental illness for individuals, families and the broader community. Social Work interfaces with a range of clients and practice contexts, in community and mental health, in disability, child protection, drug and alcohol and criminal justice systems. The unit provides an ecological approach to understanding and intervention in the mental health field.

Outcomes

By completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Give students a good understanding of mental health practice and policy frameworks in Australia;
  2. Identify competencies for practice in mental health including legal and statutory responsibilities;
  3. Examine the factors that influence client mental health needs and the service system constructed to met these:
  4. Understand the nature of mental illness and the roles are contributions made by the professional groups who work in mental health;
  5. Evaluate research and service programmes in mental health;
  6. Give students confidence to critically analyse contemporary mental health issues.

Assessment

Literature review (35%)
Major assignment (65%)

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

Students in OCDL mode have the unit presented as a unit book which contains weekly seminar readings and exercises and may include an on-line teaching component. This unit runs for 12 weeks. Students are expected to undertake twelve hours per week study in addition to completing weekly unit tasks set readings.


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Kerry Brydon

Synopsis

This unit has been designed for front line supervisors of human service delivery and allied health staff. Although the unit draws on frameworks for social work supervision, from line supervisors with qualification from many disciplines will also benefit from this unit and find it contains material that is directly relevant to their workplace and their discipline. The unit will be attractive to supervisors (or potential supervisors) who wish to develop their skills in a creative and dynamic way.

Outcomes

By the end of the unit students should be able to:

  1. describe the role of supervisor as that of professional developer
  2. identify and articulate key components of clinical supervision
  3. develop a supervisory contract/agreement
  4. consider the benefits and limitations of individual, group and peer supervision
  5. critically evaluate their own supervisory style
  6. identify and articulate strategies to create a culture of professional earning within their workplace
  7. identify and articulate an understanding of common blocks in supervision and how to overcome these
  8. develop a portfolio of their own supervisory style

Assessment

One hurdle requirement (equivalent 2, 000 words), one assessment in any medium equivalent 3, 000 words and one assessment of 5,000 words.

Chief examiner(s)


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Professor Margaret Alston

Synopsis

In recent decades significant global changes have impacted on the way people and communities live their lives. This unit provides an international and national focus on emerging threats such as climate change, water and food security and on factors such as globalisation and social movements, and their gendered impacts on people and communities. Research from across the world reveals that impacts vary significantly between women and men and that these impacts will affect the abilities of families and communities to sustain themselves into the future. Our ability to live sustainably will be one of the challenges of the twenty-first century. Because of the significant social impacts of these changes, this unit provides a social work perspective to this new field of practice. Social workers will be critical workers providing the link between people, communities and the policy environment.

This unit examines these major factors and the potential social work response. It draws on frameworks for practice including a human rights and anti-oppressive perspective and examines policy responses and how these are potentially shaped by key stakeholders and leaders to the exclusion of others. Critical concepts are gender, social inclusion, resilience and sustainability. The unit draws out ways for social workers to become critical change agents.

Outcomes

  1. Articulate a critical understanding of the gendered impacts of climate change across the globe
  2. Identify relevant social work responses to current and emerging social impacts of climate change, in local, national and international contexts
  3. Critically analyse the nature of social sustainability in the context of food and water security
  4. Demonstrate knowledge of social work's role in policies and practices relating to climate change and social sustainability

Assessment

1. An annotated bibliography of an aspect of climate change and social sustainability, demonstrating knowledge of the local, national and international context (3000 words). This task if formative and summative and relates to objectives 1 and 2. (40%)
2. A major essay on social work policy and practice responses to a selected aspect of gender, climate change and social sustainability, including theoretical frameworks and references to relevant social work literature (6000 words). This task is summative and relates to all objectives. (60%).

Chief examiner(s)

Off-campus attendance requirements

The unit runs for 13 weeks. For a 12 point unit, off-campus students are expected to spend 24 hours per week completing set tasks outlined in the Unit Guide, undertaking set readings and private research. Online contact such as discussion groups will be initiated by staff.

Prerequisites

None

Co-requisites

None

Prohibitions

None

Additional information on this unit is available from the faculty at:


12 points, SCA Band 1, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelPostgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Medicine, Nursing and Health Sciences
Organisational UnitDepartment of Social Work
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2013 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Marija Dragic

Synopsis

The Australian Association of Social Workers states that "The social work profession is committed to the pursuit of social justice, the enhancement of the quality of life and the development of the full potential of each individual, group and community in society. Social workers work at the interface between people and their environments, utilising theories of human behaviour and social systems."

In recent decades, significant changes have impacted on individuals and communities as a consequence of globalization, post-colonial policies, conflict, terrorism and natural disasters. Millions of people around the world continue to be displaced. Some are driven to leave their homelands by poverty or forced migration while others are drawn to perceived opportunities for a better life elsewhere.
This unit asks students to consider how global challenges frame social work practice both internationally and locally. Social work theory, knowledge and skills will be assessed to gauge their relevance to emerging practice issues in this area. The unit encourages students to examine their own cultural and professional identity in the light of contemporary debates and tensions about society and culture, both in Australia and internationally.
The unit will explore the local and international effects of, for example, colonisation, globalisation, forced migration, pandemics, child exploitation and human trafficking. It will ask students to critically evaluate current international and local policy and service responses and develop strategies to advocate for social change. The unit will enhance students' capacity for global and local social work leadership.

Outcomes

At the completion of this unit, students will be able to:

  1. Assess contemporary debates about globalization, post-colonialism, and internationalisation and their impact on communities around the world, including Indigenous peoples
  2. Critically evaluate how cultural identities and beliefs are constructed both locally and internationally
  3. Analyse principles and ideas informing International Development programs and their implications for social work practice
  4. Identify the links between global and local issues and how social workers can practice effectively at both levels
  5. Assess policy and service frameworks for responding to social need in a global context and at local community level
  6. Develop relevant social work policy, service and practice responses to selected issues in global and local social work practice

Assessment

Major essay (4000 words) 40%,
major essay including development of online materials (5000 words) 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Contact hours

The unit runs for 12 weeks. For a 12 point unit, off-campus students are expected to spend 4 hours per week completing set tasks outlined in the Unit Guide, undertaking set readings and private research. Online contact such as discussion groups will be initiated by staff.

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in the Master of Social Work (Qualifying) - course code 3969 have the following pre-requisites:
SWM5100 Social Work: Leading sustainable change
SWM5101 Human Rights, Ethics and Law Contexts for Social Work Practice
SWM5102 Critical Social Work 1: Individuals and Families - context and practice
SWM5103 Supervised professional practice 1
SWM5104 Critical Social Work 2: Frameworks for Practice in Health and Mental Health

For students enrolled in the Master of Social Work (Coursework) - course code 0019 there are no pre-requisites.